Home

EXOR Maintenance Manager User Guide

Contents

1. W iispection Summary Inspection IBatch Date Inspected Date Loaded Inspector Initiation Type Road Section Safety Detailed XL E E E E EO ooo 946953 82778 01 JAN 2006 04 JAN 2006 PSR NRM Normal 1200D20949 00105 SOUTH STREET JCT NEW ST D m 946955 82778 01 JAN 2006 04 JAN 2006 PSR NRM Normal 1200B3150 00245 HIGH WEST STREET TOP O ID 946956 82778 01 JAN 2006 04 JAN 2006 PSR NRM Normal 1200B3150 00250 HIGH EAST STREET JCT COFID 946957 82778 01 JAN 2006 04 JAN 2006 PSR NRM Normal 1200D20921 00105 NEW STREET JCT C12 TRIN D Detail Figure 6 Inspection Summary Button The Summary button on the Inspection form will display a summary of all the currently queried Inspections To view the full detail of an Inspection click on the required Inspection then press the Detail button Version 4 7 9 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc vi 34 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS Bllospections maiz 08 Inspection Id 582519 Insp Batch 181393 Date Inspected t8 MAY 2010 Inspector svs SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR Date Loaded 25 MAY 2010 2nd Inspector Last Updated 25 MAY 2010 Initiation Type NRM Safet
2. Version 4 7 25 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 B en le Y Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS 2 3 Using Locator with Inspections and Defects Pi Locator nmos72 4 Restrict amp amp amp amp amp m 22 ele 4 AR d B S zz P5 a Feature Iw All Items no location restriction jee mr Feature Edit Menu TRU ani Name sj a Stes LIVE NETWORK L Send Multiple Points to application AP Tunk Roads L1 Principal Roads Create Enquiry Description 12 B Chssified I Entire LE eral Create Enquiry On Asset ts Start J End Relocate Enquiry DEFECTS BY STATUS 3 Available to be instructed Create Defects On Assets Selected Search Description Seed Create Defects On Asset at X Y Repaired by Structural Mai ES Search For Detects Available Superseded not instructed Create Defects on Network at X Y Ignore Case Def Id Priority Def Code Activity Created Date Time Road Name Road Description Location St Chain Ed Ej x x E x 2 Advanced Search J Scale 42 64 Wom 1 4264 106 48 367181 88555 9
3. Version 4 7 215 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE WORKS ORDERING REPORTS Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure E 4 2 2 Works Order Unpriced MAI3485 LIVE2108 LIVE2108 NORTH PENNINE LINK GROUP Date 20 DEC 1999 MAI3485 Print Works Order Unoriced Pace m DTp Local Agency LINK Job Code Item Code Year Works Order No DTp 2900A69 1 020401 1999 2 00003 TO BE COMPLETED IN Raised by Date 16 APR 96 By eH Authorised by Date Completed 23 NOV 99 Time Completed j Mhrs 7days 28days Other Completed by Date 23 NOV 99 Signed for Contractor Signed for Client CER DESCRIPTION Emergency Repairs to Safety Fence Signs amp Manhole A p E Works Order Total t Chainage item u i Order T Di 9 Deseri isc Order Star End XSP Type mon Unik Qiy m Value 19 013 No Action defect deser 0 15 0 3 No Action defect descr 0 j Figure 182 Part 1 LIVE2108 LIVE2108 NORTH PENNINE LINK GROUP Date 20 DEC 1999 MAI3485 Print Works Order Unoriced Pace 1 DTp Local Agency LINK Job Code Item Code Year Works Order No DTp 2900A69 1 020401 1999 2 00003 TO BE COMPLETED IN Raise
4. Postcode BS8 1EJ Telephone 0117 900 6200 Contractor Contact IAN SKINNER X Address Exo S O Clifton Bristol m Postcode BS8 1EJ Telephone 01 17 900 6200 Figure 123 Contacts tab Promoter Contact Default For Initial notices this will display the default value as set up in the Defaults button This can be amended if required For other notices it is the current value from the works phase Contractor Contact Default For Initial notices this will display the default value as set up in the Defaults button This can be amended if required For other notices it is the current value from the works phase Version 4 7 136 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc rit Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE ol Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 7 5 Co ordinates tab Mo Easting X Morthing Y Figure 124 Co ordinates tab Easting X and Northing Y Default For Initial notices this default to the x y value at the start of the street To update the co ordinates do the following 1 Select the Get from Map button this will take you to Locator 2 Select send multiple point to application digitise a new line double click the mouse to end selection 3 This will r
5. Contract Totals Opens the contract totals window and displays all contracts that can fulfill the work contained on the works order with associated costs and scores An alternative contract can now be selected if required Additional Details Opens the additional details window additional additional details can be added if required Flexible Attributes Opens the maintain flexible attributes window attribute values can be added if required Figure 110 Navigator Opens Navigator which allows the user to view and retrieve data associated a work order an example of this is shown below Details on the use of navigator can be found in the Query Builder and Navigator User Manual Version 4 7 172 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 4 en t le y Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Navigation Style GL Work Order BENTLEY M29 DORSET BENTLEY 28 LR BENTLEY Bentley Contract Document 256094 PHOT 256094_casterbridge jpg IMAGES 02 Nov 2010 Work Order Line 475605 DRAFT 18303 ELIZABETH PLACE JCT CAMBRIDGE Budget 060111 Budget 597000 Committed 12748 93 Actual 5551 53 E Repair Permanent Ok Defect 361563 SELECTED GC FLO
6. This is the Scheme Type for the Work Order The default value is determined by the value set for Product Option DEFSCHTYPL or DEFSCHTYPD depending on the System Flag set for the Section or Budget Allocation Group on which the Defect is raised The default value may only be updated if product option DEFSCHTYPU is set to Y Contract Required Default List This is the Contract used within the Work Order The default value is determined by the value set for product Option DUMCONCODE Once the appropriate Contract has been selected press the Next Button Work Order Default If Product Option WORREFGEN Is set to M manual the Work Order Number and Description should be entered If set to C Contract based or A Admin Unit based the work order number will be automatically generated when the Next gt button is pressed and a valid Budget is selected If Multiple Budgets exist for the defect Activity Scheme Type Section or Budget Allocation Group combinations a list will be displayed from which to select the required Budget Version 4 7 19 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR gt MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 Be ntle y MANAGING INSPECTIONS Balance Cost Code ACCIDENT A TER CARE SC ACCIDENT AFTE
7. 4 Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure EXOR Maintenance Manager User Guide March 2014 Version 4 7 Submitted by Bentley Systems UK Ltd 9 Floor 20 Gracechurch Street London EC3V 0BG Version 4 7 i CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 6 Sustulaing Vitrastr ct re DOCUMENT TRACKER EXOR Maintenance Manager User Guide Trademark Bentley and the B Bentley logo are either registered or unregistered trademarks or service marks of Bentley Systems Incorporated or one of its direct or indirect wholly owned subsidiaries Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners Copyright Copyright 2013 Bentley Systems Incorporated All Rights Reserved Including software file formats and audiovisual displays may only be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement contains confidential and proprietary information of Bentley Systems Incorporated and or third parties which is protected by copyright and trade secret law and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization Restricted Rights Legend If this software is acquired for or on behalf of the United States of America its agencies and or instrument
8. Defects View Defects Figure 54 Defects Menu Option Defect Id 7 Order By Defect Id Desc Sd Navigator Asset Carriageway View Asset Road Section imus won Cts XSP T3 Start Chain e Inspector PRM Inspection Batch 101172 Road Desc BABYLON HILL R A NEAR YEOVIL Initiation Type NRM Inspection Id 1141343 Location opposite house 4 Priority 1 siss ALL _ Special Instr none Superseded N By Activity Mc Minor Carriageway Repairs Number Roadstud Type Iu Defect Type POTH Pothole x 3722220 Defect Desc Y 87700 0 Defect Status SELECTED Update Inv No 8 0 tC Recharge Date Inspected 11 AUG 2011 09 40 Notice Printed Notify Date Recorded 15 AUG 2011 12 06 Notice Id Repair Category Temporary I Perm Imm M Temp Date Repair Due 12 AUG 2011 Work Status DRAFT Repair Desc PERMANENT REPAIR CAT 1 Date Instructed WorkOrder cLB TESTAB Treatment o Target Complete I2 AUG 2011 10 00 Work Sheet Lo Total Cost Date Completed rT Check Batch IEEE BOQ Uplift Item DCC 963 RWH Total scheme gt 34 000 01 Check Date Check Result WOL Uplift Item DCC 2 RWH Total scheme 1 400 01 34 000 00 Date Paid Payment Id BOQ Items ltem Code Description Dim 1 Dim3 Quantity Unit Rate Cost 29701002 TMB Mobile lane closure adj cenref 100 10 HOUR weeos 189035 summay Pim Create WYO Edit Defect Figure 55 Defects 2 9 1 Ge
9. HIG1500 Refer to the Audit Manager manual for further details For more information on defect status codes please refer to the Maintenance Manager System Administration Manual section Defect Status Codes HIG9110 Priority Required List Select the priority for repair of this defect Select a Defect Priority from the list provided Only those Defect Priorities associated with the previously selected Activity will be available for selection The Priority selected will be used to generate a Target Date for the Defect Repair which is displayed in the bottom right hand corner of the Defect Details window Defect Priorities and Activities are associated using Defect Priorities MAI3812 refer to the Maintenance Manager System Admin Guide Superseded Display Only This field will show Y if the current defect has been superseded by another defect Defects will be automatically superseded if they are logged using chainage and XSP values and the chainage falls within the tolerance set in the form Defect Superseding Rules MAI4406 For more information on superseding rules please refer to the appropriate section in the Maintenance Manager System Administrator Manual The superseded defect will no longer be available for inclusion on a works order Defects can be manually superseded using Match Duplicate Defects refer to Match Duplicate Defects MAI2730 and unmatched using Unmatch Duplicate Defects refer to Unma
10. MAI3840 First Payment Last Payment Display Only Displays the range of payment numbers which were allocated during the payment run Total Value Display Only Displays the total value of the job items for the works orders included in this payment run Note that some works order may have been deselected for payment using Deselect Items For Payment MAI3842 and will not therefore be included in this total Retention Display Only If a retention has been specified the calculated retention amount will be displayed here Retentions are calculated as a percentage of total contract value up to a maximum value The retention percentage and the maximum value are defined when the contract is created via Contracts MAI3880 Maintenance Manger Administration Manual VAT Display Only If the payment run was set to calculate and include VAT the total VAT amount will be displayed here Payment Amount Display Only The total amount actually paid will be displayed here Version 4 7 288 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc
11. Maintenance Manager Z3 Inventory I Inspections Works Works Orders Defects Works Orders Cyclic Maintain York Orders Contractor Interface View Work Order Line History Gang Crew Allocation Work Orders Authorisation View Cyclic Maintenance VVork Cyclic Maintenance Schedules Cyclic Maintenance Schedules by Road Section Maintenance Report Cancel VVork Orders External Activities Figure 176 Quality Inspection Results Menu Option Version 4 7 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT 206 The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc on Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 Faa NEES WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Quality Inspection Results MAI3820 ries LAX Check Road Id Defect Id Work Order Check Check Check Hae Batch Description Schedule Work Sheet Result Code Date Comment 1001451050 00001 ATLAS 3 49 MARINE ROAD EAST LIN 1001F77300 00003 91095 IP LaNcDAILY 2 CHURCH STREET 1001F 77300 00003 91093 P LANCDAILYA CHURCH STREET 10025278 0 00012 91408 P ATLAS 1 107 MAY LANE LYDIATE LAN Figure 177 Quality Inspection Results 3 16 1 General Information This option is used to record the results of Quality Inspections carried out on completed Work Order Lines Works Order Lines are only dis
12. Registerable Register Status Target Date BOO Items ew Notices Get From Map J Copy Line Select Defects ce Invoices Summary Figure 96 Work Order Lines 3 5 3 Work Order Lines This window is displayed when the Lines button is selected in the Works Orders Defects window It holds details of each of the defects selected for inclusion on the works order Each of these defects is known as a Work Order Line In addition to the defects the work order line may contain small scheme works this is works defined on the network but does not have any associated defects Work orders can contain a combination of defect and non defect work order lines as required Initially all the lines will be blank defects are added to this window by selecting the Select Defects button and entering the required selection criteria This window contains a line for each defect found If you want to remove a defect from the works order position the cursor on the appropriate line and press the Delete Record button in the toolbar The defect will then be removed from the works order and returned to the pool of outstanding defects Should you want to add further defects select the Select Defects button again This will return you to the Selection Criteria window where you can initiate a further search to recover additional defects This search will not find the defects currently on the works order but if a defect has been removed from t
13. fi py i o TMA Works Description Yi X H Send To Register View TMA Works Work Order Lines TMA Notice WOL Id Location Road Id Description Defect Id Type Priority End Date Count Select WOL hace nei i20008G485 00 MUNTSTREETwEYMOUTH fisis por perap OO Mo a 474165 lene iz00093485 00 MOUNT STREET WEYMOUTH feiss pom 23 aPR 2009 0 v erue ee oe 4 SS a i EEUU M BS gne SSS pee eee e ge mp is Figure 116 TMA Interface 3 6 1 General Information This module will allow the user to manage the notices that are to be generated for the work order lines in both Work Orders Defect and Small Scheme MAI3800 and Work Orders Cyclic MAI3800A The purpose of this module is e To automatically derive and associate one or more USRN s for each instructed registered work order line Multiple work order lines may be on one notice if those lines all fall on the same street Multiple Notices may be generated for one work order line if that work order line spans a number of streets Version 4 7 125 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 B en le d Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT To facilitate the production of k
14. 3 7 10 Send to Register button Works Order Works Reference Ext Ref USRN Notice Type Success aRwartsios pcoossess SS amwerita asaoo2s0 FLEETSTREET tied Notice i e lamweriioa pcoonseo jamWezid104 210008 ADAMSGREEN PAA Mejor Permit Applica 1 T a a mme repe m Ss oO E a CO SS a Failure Details Figure 129 Send to Register button The Results window is displayed when the Send to Register button is selected Each selected notice will have a record displayed showing whether or not the attempt at registration was successful When successfully registered the Dealt With checkbox for the notice record is ticked so it cannot be re noticed The lt Back button takes you back to the main screen The Exit button will close the form and return you to TMA Interface TMA3990 When a Notice is raised from a works order the register checkbox will be ticked and the register status will be set to O Outstanding The Street Works Notice can be viewed by pressing the TMA Register button Figure 130 Version 4 7 142 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR PF MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 6 WORK ORDER MANAGEM
15. Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure Act Cost Display Only This field will display the actual cost of repairing this defect As the actual cost is only known once the defect has been repaired and the Status updated to COMPLETED or an Interim Payment has been made and the Status updated to PART PAID this field will initially be blank Invoice Display Only This is a payment Invoice flag used within the Financial Payment process Valid values are e Null No invoices have been processed or the status is instructed e O At least one outstanding records remains in the payments table e H At least one held record remains in the payments table e B Both held and outstanding records remain in the payments table e A Only approved records remain in the payments table Registerable Checkbox This tick box is used to indicate whether an individual line should be registered with TMA If this is checked the Registerable tick box at the work order level will be updated automatically if not already checked Register Status Display Only This Line level Register Status field indicates the Noticing Status of the individual work order line The status of this field depends on the following logic e Nothing Registered The WOL has been ticked as Registerable but no Notices have been sent for it e Outstanding The WOL has been ticked as Registerable and at least one Notice has been sent for it but not a 0600
16. Date Instructed Optional Select the checkbox to include a date search on the work order dates below Date From Optional Enter the date from which you wish to make a search This field can be used in conjunction with the next field for searching for defects in a date range Date To Optional Default Enter the date to which you wish to search for defects default is 7 days after the Date From Version 4 7 202 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ipie Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Ss prosdhesided edendi WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 14 3 Work Order Lines The contents of this window will be either 1 Allun allocated works order lines or 2 Alllines allocated to the selected gang This will depend upon the selection criteria entered previously All fields in this window are display only select the checkbox for the work order lines that are to be selected followed by the Assign Gang button Selecting a work order line followed by Expand will display Works Orders MAI3800 and will be the complete work order containing the line selected The Y button will select all lines in this window The X button will de select all selected lines The scroll bar along the bottom of the window allows the user to vi
17. Last Valuation Value Status Date Entered Paid Cancel Figure 105 BOQ Details This window can be called by pressing the Expand button in the menu toolbar when a BOQ item is selected It is useful when entering quantities because if the items are banded this window will show the minimum and maximum allowed values Details of the estimated and actual values are also displayed If the Works Order Line on which the selected BOQ item is on is part of an Interim Payment the Last Valuation cost Status and the Date the Valuation was entered or the payment made will be displayed When entering a Valuation for an Interim Payment the Minimum Quantity limit for the Standard Item is overridden but the Maximum Quantity limit is retained Select Cancel to return to the BOQ Items window Version 4 7 113 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ipie 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 5 12 Standard Item Totals e Standard Item Totals Estimated Estimated Actual Actual ltem Code Item Name i Quantity Cost Quantity Figure 106 Standard Item Totals This window is displayed when the Standard Item Totals button is selected in the Works Orders Defects
18. The code and name for the contractor will be displayed This is obtained from the contract details Contact Optional Enter a contact name if required Contractor Score Optional If required enter a score to represent the performance of the contractor in fulfilling this works order This can only be entered when the works order is complete Originator Required Default List Select a valid person ID to represent the originator of the work order Default is the current user To be Authorised By Optional List When creating a work order the user may nominate another user who should authorise the current work order This field will only accept the initials of a user that can view and authorize a work order this picklist will be populated with those users that have been given the permission to authorise a work order by the System Administrator using Maintenance Manager User Data MAI4410 Population of this field does not restrict this work order to be authorised by the selected user it may be authorised by any user that has the permission to authorise a work order Version 4 7 89 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ipie Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Ss Biaesialeg hatt WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Authorised
19. Version 4 7 180 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ipie Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 a NEES WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Quantity Required or Optional The first three fields allow the user to specify up to three dimensions associated to the Item if they are required for the specified item Each standard job item can have one or more dimensions associated with it depending on the nature of the work represented by the job item For example replacing damaged kerbing will have a single dimension representing the length of kerbing to be replaced whilst filling a pothole may have three dimensions representing the length width and depth of the pothole to be filled Consequently these three dimension fields are Required or Optional according to the needs of the job in question Note The message line will display a message explaining what unit of measurement should be used for each dimension field This message will be of the form Enter the Length Quantity Display Only Displays the calculated quantity of work based on the dimensions supplied in the previous fields The unit of this field is displayed in the Unit field described below Unit Display Only Displays the unit of measurement of this job item This unit r
20. Y or N to indicate whether the report is to be draft Confirmed Works Order No Required Enter the Works Order Number to be reported on Version 4 7 227 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE WORKS ORDERING REPORTS F Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 4 8 2 Work Orders Enhanced MAI3919 Contract Detail DORSET COUNTY COUNCIL Print Works Order Enhanced DORSET COUNTY COUNCIL To County Routine Maintenance Contractor Description Test Stu 101 Area WAP Scheme Type LR Issue Date 07 MAY 2008 Engineer Contact for the Works Work Restriction Supporting Documents Received for Contractor By Planned Start By lanned Completion lanned Duration days Actual Completion Actual Duration days pe as soo 1G Certified Costs Certified Complete Ooo ooo ho xa 0 eee Actual Start Jooo S Pp Pp Scheme Id 00000 Cost Centre Instructed Date 07 MAY 2008 DateTime Authorised By YS Date 21 MAY 2009 Page Work Order No 8 902C 2 Estimated Value Sub Total Balancing Sum Total Utility Plans Method Statement CI 49 Maintenance CI 14 Programme 3 Actual Value Sub Total 17 91 Balancing
21. 4 7 49 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR 5 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS 2 8 Inspections by Group MAI3899 Lo Maintenance Manager c Inventory A Inspections Inspections Inspections by Group Defects View Defects Figure 52 Inspections by Group Menu Option Ra Inspections by Group MAI3899 Inspector AEG AREA EAST GENERAL USER 2nd Inspector Date Inspected 16 JAN 2007 Weather Condition Initiation Type NRM Normal Road Surface Cond Safety Detailed D Road Type LINK Local Links Road 3008B52460 CHORLEY ROAD Activity MC BLACKTOP CARRIAGEWAY REPAIRS Inspected Roads Road Road Not No Id Description Inspected Defects Defects 3008B52460 00003 DIAMOND JUBILEE ROAD A59 TO SERV s s a 3008B52460 00050 THE MARSHES LANE MERE LANE TO He 3 s 3008B52460 00002 CHORLEY ROAD THE COMMON TO ROE E s 3008B52460 00004 DIAMOND JUBILEE ROAD SERVICE RO 3 s 3008B52460 00008 HALL LANE GRIMSHAW GREEN LANE T 3 s Set Not Inspected All Set No Defects Al Cancel Figure 53 Inspection by Group 2 8 1 General Information This form allows inspectors who do not use DCD s to carry out ins
22. 5 4 3 Road Secblolls eite rueCI E rM d AE Cu MR ELA EE 263 EXOR E MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 Be ntle y TABLE OF CONTENTS 5 4 4 Niel Eeh 264 5 4 5 Her E 265 5 5 View Cyclic Maintenance Work MAI3804 essere enne 266 5 5 1 General Information ceccceesceceseceeseceeseeceeneeceaeeeeaaecseaeeceeeessaeceeaaecseaeeceaeeessaeeeeaaeseenees 266 3 5 2 View Cyclic Maintenance Work essent nennen nennen 267 5 53 BOQ MEMS aeinn nOn nO ee O n tU idem eiie brat 267 5 5 4 BOQ Details eL 268 5 6 Maintenance Reports MAI3825 ooo ee ceecceseeseeeeeeesseeeseecsaecsaecaecsaecaeesseeeeeeseeseneeeaeeeaaeenaes 269 5 6 1 General Information 3 iere Pere rer Ee sendiaces RISE Postea iere Eres ERE HERO RENE UO 270 5 6 2 Section BICI 270 5 6 3 Ma intenanc Report C 270 5 6 4 PUPILS neen n eE eia a aaia ER aa Ea AES NEES E EAE EASA EASTER 270 5 7 Valid for Maintenance Rules MAI3440Q sees nene nnne nnne nennen 271 5 7 1 General Information ence tenen ertet esee Le ee eer Iren t se ehe eee one n en eo aede neu aae omi 272 5 7 2 Valid for Maintenance Rules ie REI tette ie ee Ente EI ure TUER ede 272 5 8 Related Maintenance Activities MATI3628 essere nennen entere 273 5 8 1 General Information 2 pitt e eter I eene torta EE LER Ve Lee a E
23. INSTRUCTED 15 JAN 2007 2006C356 0 00004 BARTON LANE JEPPS LANE TO CENMC POTH_ AVAILABLE 15 JAN 2007 2006122700 00002 DEEPDALE MILL STREET RIBBLETO MC POTH AVAILABLE 15 JAN 2007 20064583 1 00022 ATERY LANE 190M WEST OF PORMC POTH AVAILABLE 15 JAN 2007 10020442 0 00010 LONG LANE FACTORY BROW TO SC MC POTH AVAILABLE 12 JAN 2007 1002428 0 00014 STRICKENS LANE LONG LANE TO FIMC POTH AVAILABLE E 12 JAN 2007 2006854110 00005 WOODPLUMPTON ROAD BANKSFIE FC BKPF NSTRUCTED 12 JAN 2007 Detail Figure 57 Defect Summary 2 9 5 Defect Summary This window will display summary information for the defects retrieved in the previous window to view the details of a defect select the required defect then press the Detail button Version 4 7 55 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR 2 MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 6 Be ntle y MANAGING INSPECTIONS ler o xl Defect Id 377907 Time Inspected o jo Defect Status SELECTED Priority 1 Superseded Lg By Asset Type CW Asset Ref ld Find Asset XSP E Start Chain 45 Location opposite house 4 Co ords X 372222 000 Defect Desc Y 87700 000 Special Instr Roadstud Type E Activity mc
24. Road Group Priority Defect Id Road Section Id Road Section Description XSP Start Chainage of Defect Date Instructed Labour Units Work Status Total Cost 4 14 1 Selection Parameters Admin Unit Required Default List Select an administrational unit to be used for this report The default is the Admin Unit assigned to the current User Road Type Optional List If required enter the Road Type from which to select defects from If this field is left blank all Road Group Types will be reported on Road Id Optional List If required enter the Road Group Id from which to select defects from If this field is left blank all Road Group Types will be reported on Date Instructed From Optional If required enter the earliest Date Instructed to be included on the report Only those Defects on Work Orders Instructed after this date will be included in the report Date Instructed To Optional If required enter the latest Date Instructed to be included on the report Only those Defects on Work Orders Instructed before this date will be included in the report Defect Priority Optional List If required enter the defect priority to be reported on If this field is left blank all defect priorities will be included To report on multiple Defect Priorities press the Create Record button on the toolbar Contract Id Optional List Version 4 7 239 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT
25. The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE WORKS ORDERING REPORTS 234 Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure If required enter the name of the contract to be reported on Works Order No Required List If required enter the Works Order Number to be reported on SISS Optional List If required enter the Standard Item Sub Section SISS to be reported on If this field is left blank all SISS Codes will be included To include multiple SISS codes press the Create Record button on the toolbar XSP Optional List If required enter the Cross Sectional Position of defects to be reported on If this field is left blank defect on all XSP s will be included 4 14 2 Instructed Defects due for Completion EXOR2204 EXOR2204 List of Instructed Defects due for Completion Date 05 SEP 2000 MAI3926 Page Road Group DEMOA271__ SISS ALL All Standard Items Priority 1 Defect Id 34 Road Section DEMOA271_ 05 TEST SECTION FOR INSPECTION LO XSP 1 StChain 12 Locn bar Date Instructed 22 AUG 2000 Due Date 22 AUG 2000 Days to Due 1400 Work Order No DEMO 33 Work Sheet No Total Cost 228 20 Labour Units Work Status INSTRUCTED Defect Id 35 Road Section DEMOA271_ 05 TEST SECTION FOR INSPECTION LO XSP 1 StChain
26. Works Order Audit Maintenance MAI3803 and can be called by pressing the Expand button on the menu toolbar form the main Works Order window The size of the Audit log trail can be restricted by setting Product Option AUDIT ALL to N If this option is set to N only the initial and final values of a field are recorded in the Audit trail per session per User and any intermediate changes are not be logged If Product Option AUDIT ALL is set to Y then all changes to the selected fields are logged It should be noted that for some Works Orders the audit trail could be very large if this option is set to Y The Order in which Audited changes are displayed can be determined by setting a value in the Order By field In addition work order auditing may be carried out using Audit Manager The type of audited changes displayed can be determined by clicking the appropriate check box in the Show Changes portion of the window as shown below Show Changes om C Work Order C Work Order Line BOQ C Payments Figure 160 Show Changes The changes displayed can be restricted to the following areas Version 4 7 186 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 W etal f g Tutrestiict m WORK ORDE
27. Works Stop Notice e Completed The WOL has been ticked as Registerable and a 0600 Works Stop Notice has been sent Once a Works Order Line has been included in a Payment Run the Invoice details can be viewed by pressing the Invoices button on the window Target Date Required The target date for the work order line can be entered manually for non defect clearance work orders The target dates for the individual work order lines will affect the overall work order Target Date For defect clearance work orders When a defect and its associated repair are created the repair has a Target Complete Date associated with it When a work order line is created from a defect repair and the work order is instructed or when a repair is selected onto an existing instructed work order the work order line Target Date may be calculated in one of two ways depending upon how the Recalculate Repair Due Dates checkbox has been set in Contracts MAI3880 1 If unchecked the work order line Target Date will be populated with the associated Repair Date Due If checked the work order line Target Date will be calculated by applying the same Interval used for the Repair Due Date to the Works Order Instructed Date The interval used is derived from the associated e Defect Activity e Defect Priority e Repair Category Version 4 7 100 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are conf
28. a OI a ioo ELM ee NEN M LDL s Cancel Finish Figure 31 Edit BOQs To edit the BOQ items before committing the defect press Next This will call the Edit BOQs window This is only available when a single repair has been specified Where multiple repairs have been specified the user will have to finish the defect creation process then use form Inspections MAI3808 to edit the defect s The Edit BOQs window allows BOQ items and quantities to be amended added to removed etc To create the Defect press Finish At the end of the Defect creation process a message will be displayed offering the option to raise a Works Order to include the Defects just raised To raise a Work Order press Yes or No to finish the entire process Figure 32 Create Work Order If a Works Order is to be raised the form shown below will be displayed Version 4 7 36 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 6 Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS Raise Works Order GIS DORSET nmd4beta2 GBEXOR730 MAI v4 0 Scheme Type Contract 7 933 Routine Maintenance PS2 06 07 ACTUAL Work Order Cancel Figure 33 Raise Work Order The Raise Works
29. enter the Defect Type to be included on the report If this field is left blank all defect types will be included Defect Priority Optional List If required enter the defect priority to be reported on If this field is left blank all defect priorities will be included To report on multiple Defect Priorities press the Create Record button on the toolbar SISS Optional List If required enter the Standard Item Sub Section SISS to be reported on If this field is left blank all SISS Codes will be included To include multiple SISS codes press the Create Record button on the toolbar Item Code Optional List If required enter the Item code to be reported on If this field is left blank all Item Codes will be included To include multiple Item Codes press the Create Record button on the toolbar XSP Optional List If required enter the Cross Sectional Position of defects to be reported on If this field is left blank defect on all XSP s will be included 4 11 2 Defects Not Yet Instructed MAI3922 EXOR2204 EXOR2204 List of Defects Not Yet Insirucied Date 05 SEP 2000 MAI3922 Page 1 Road Group DEMOA1625 SISS ALL All Standard Items Priority 23 DefectId Type Road Section Defect Location Recharge XSP St Chain Date Inspected Due Date Days to Due Date Special Instructions 28 OTHR DEMOA16251 03 TEST SECTION 2 aaaa 1 0 25 MAY 2000 25 NOV 2000 30 aaaaa PERMANENT ITEM1 Item 1 10 00 GRIP 10 00 SHP1
30. ince Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE e Sustaining Infrastructure PAYMENTS 7 1 General Information Once an entire Works Order an individual Works Order line or in the case of an Interim payment part of a Works Order line has been completed they are ready to be processed through the payment run The purpose of this module is to allow you to determine which completed Works Orders or Works Order lines you would like to be included in the next payment run Unless a works order is specifically deselected using this screen it will be paid by the next payment run Those items which are deselected will remain so until they are explicitly set to be ready for paying Items may be deselected if there is a large discrepancy between the Estimated and Actual costs This allows you to deselect the item from payment until discussions have been made with the contractor If amendments need to be made to an already completed works order or works order line follow the procedure Changing a Completed Works Order earlier in this manual To view Works Order details press the Expand button on the menu toolbar 7 1 2 Work Order Lines When you enter this window it will be in query mode enter your selection criteria followed by Execute Query to return the required works order line details Completed Works Order Lines can be queried on Contract Id Road Id Defect Id Schedule Id Works Order Number or any combination of these fields Selecting t
31. when selected this button will call Locator and allow the user to select the appropriate asset to link to the defect When locator is displayed it will automatically have a restriction placed on it so any searches for asset data will be restricted to the network that has been selected in the inspection XSP Required List If your system has been set to record defects by XSP enter the Cross Sectional Position of the defect This together with the Chainage and Location fields enables the defect to be located exactly within the section Start Chain Required If your system has been set to record defects by chainage enter the chainage along the section at which the defect was found Location Optional If known enter a free text location description to locate the defect within the section If you are not locating defects by chainage and XSP an accurate defect location should be entered Defect Desc Optional If required enter an additional textual description of the defect Special Inst Optional If required enter any additional instructions or comments relating to the defect Version 4 7 15 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR P MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 1 Be ntle y MANAGING INSPECTIONS Co o
32. 0 00 ITEM Version 4 7 244 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR P MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Ss WORKS ORDERING REPORTS Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 4 17 Quality Inspection Performance MAI3952 Purpose This report produces a summary of Quality Inspections carried out and updated in Quality Inspection Results MAI3820 The following information is displayed Supervisor Code Number of Inspections carried out Number of repairs checked Number of repairs passed Passed Number Borderline Borderline Number Failed Failed Total Repairs Completed Checked 4 17 1 Selection Parameters Admin Unit Required Default List Select an administrational unit to be used for this report The default is the Admin Unit assigned to the current User Road Type Optional List If required enter the Road Type from which to select defects from If this field is left blank all Road Group Types will be reported on Road Id Optional List If required enter the Road Group Id from which to select defects from If this field is left blank all Road Group Types will be reported on Quality Inspected From Optional If required enter the earliest date of Quality Inspection to be inc
33. 00 Labour Units Work Status INSTRUCTED Figure 197 Version 4 7 240 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ic Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE e Sustaining Infrastructure WORKS ORDERING REPORTS 4 15 Inventory Updates MAI3930 Purpose This report produces a summary of defects which require Inventory information to be updated i e have the Update Inv field on Defects MAI3806 set to Y and which meet the required selection parameters 4 15 1 Selection Parameters Admin Unit Required Default List Select an administrational unit to be used for this report The default is the Admin Unit assigned to the current User Road Type Optional List If required enter the Road Type from which to select defects from If this field is left blank all Road Group Types will be reported on Road Id Optional List If required enter the Road Group Id from which to select defects from If this field is left blank all Road Group Types will be reported on Date Inspected From Optional If required enter the earliest Date Inspected to be included on the report Only those Defect Records recorded after this date will be included in the report Date Inspected To Optional If required enter the latest D
34. 153 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR 5 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 11 3 Work Order Lines 4H TESTI21 Defect Id Treatment Status Final Work Category Type Priority Sheet Comp Date Remarks Road Id Descr Location Schedule Labour Units Gang Act Cost 120002091800133 pros P o A ort WEST WALKS ROAD JCT c166 PRINCES SI POTH 24 ff ho 0 E hd 03JUN2011 10 22 Target Date Target Date Pe ne o ee DOE ee m Target Date BOQ Items Invoices Figure 140 Work Order Lines This window is displayed when the Lines button is selected in the Works Orders Contractor window It shows each works order line on the selected works order if the order contains defects full details of the defect can be viewed by pressing the Expand button in the toolbar this will display Defects MAI3806 This window contains a line for each works order line Works order lines cannot be added or removed from this window Each works order line displays a summary of the defect information the majority of the fields are display only Road Id Display Only Displays the road Id where this defect is located Descr Disp
35. BOQ An gt will be displayed beside the percentage item to signify that it is a child item of the main Standard Job Item Qo UON CA E UD p3c E Note Quantities for Percentage Items cannot be amended e Select the Check All to check all BOQ items displayed e Select Uncheck All to clear all checked BOQ items 3 5 9 Adding Non Contract Items to a Works Order Normally the Bill Of Quantities on a works order is defined as a series of standard job items as described above These items have agreed unit rates Occasionally however it is required to add an item to a works order that is not on the contract This can be achieved by the use of Rogue Items sometimes known as Wildcard Items A Rogue Item is simply a standard job item with no preset rate quantity or description Generally it will have item codes ending 9999 When you select a Rogue Item from the list of items the Item Description Total Qty and Rate fields will be empty You can then complete these fields to effectively create a non standard item It is important to note that for the software to be able to calculate the works order totals correctly you must enter a rate for the Rogue Item Standard job items including Rogue Items are managed through Standard Items MAI3888 For further information on Standard Items refer to the Contracts and Contractors section of the Maintenance Manager Administration Manual Contracts and Rates It is possible to select stan
36. BOQ Items window to the actual dimensions 4 Add any further BOQ items if required 5 Save the changes Once the changes have been saved no further changes can be made to that works order line Once all works order lines are completed the works order will be completed This status can change to COMPLETED in one of two ways they are as follows The Complete button is selected in the Works Orders Defects window This will complete all works order lines in the current works order the completed date will also be entered in the next field If this method is used changes cannot be made to the actual values of the BOQ items The User changes the individual line to completed manually and enters a date in the next field At this point changes can be made to the actual values of the BOQ items these changes must be made before saving the changes As the works order line passes through the payments cycle the status will be updated automatically Version 4 7 196 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ipie 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Pae B beides WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 12 23Changing a Completed Works Order Once a Works Order or Works Order Line is complete no changes can be made to the value of the order If however when it
37. Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS 2 12 Unmatch Duplicate Defects MAI2760 7 C3 Maintenance Manager ay Inventory Inspections Inspections Inspections by Group Defects View Defects Responses to Notices Match Duplicate Defects Unmatch Duplicate Defects Delete Inspections Figure 68 Unmatch Duplicate Defects Menu Option a Unmatch Duplicate Defects Link Id 1200833908 Agency 1200 Linkcode B33905 Section 00520 Bug Number Length 2965 Description JCT C79 AFFPUDDLE TO JCT C80 WADDOCK CROSS Superseded Defect Defect Defect Serial No 450247 Type BFRT Act Area MC St Chain 189 Length Priority 24 Local Date Due 11 MAR 2009 Desc Inspection Date 11 MAR 2009 Superseding Defect Defect Defect Serial No 447081 Type BFRT ActArea MC St Chain 190 Length Priority 21 Local Date Due 10 FEB 2008 Desc Inspection Date 10 FEB 2009 Unmatch Figure 69 Unmatch Duplicate Defects 2 12 1 General Information This form is used to correct any defects that have been matched in error either automatically by the system or when using Match Duplicate Defects MAI2730 Version 4 7 65 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ox 34 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER
38. By sEH Susan Hetherington Remarks Date Raised 11 DEC 2007 16 25 Rechargeable Target Complete Cost Recharged Date Authorised Estimates Actuals Date Instructed 01 DEC 2007 00 00 Sub Total 1270 00 Last Printed 12 DEC 2007 Balancing Sum 0 00 Date Received Total Cost 1270 00 Date Completed Labour Units Defec 0 Scheme 1 Cycic 0 Schedules Standard Item Totals Contract Totals Additional Details Flexible Attributes Navigator Notice Summary TMA Interface TMA Register 0 SWM Register O Copy Print Authorise Complete Figure 149 Work Order Cyclic Version 4 7 165 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc acu Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Ss Pae B beides WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 12 1 General Information The cyclic maintenance system allows regular maintenance to be predefined by means of a schedule This schedule is set up via the Cyclic Maintenance Schedules MAI3860 and defines the standard job items that will make up the regular maintenance work along with the quantities and costs of those job items When creating a cyclic works order you select the cyclic maintenance schedule to be used and the software will generate all of the works order l
39. Crew Allocation Work Orders Authorisation View Cyclic Maintenance VWork Cyclic Maintenance Schedules Cyclic Maintenance Schedules by Road Section Figure 206 Cyclic Maintenance Schedules Menu Option Bicyclic Maintenance Schedules DRO nm4beta2 GBEXOR730 MAI v4 0 Schedule Id 256 Name GRASS CUTTING Last Quantity Calculations Description PT Work Category 000000 DUMMY WORK CATEGORY FOR ALL ACTIVITIES 22 Agency 7035 Eastern Division 0000 siss 61 GRASS ENV Grass Cutting Tractor 0000000 Frequency FRI Once per Year Schedule By Asset Road Group Type LINK Start Date Road Group Id 702040002_ End Date Road Group Desc A0002 Works Order No lo2RSDO1M 7 12 Date Instructed Date Complete Schedule Items Calculate Quantities Figure 207 Cyclic Maintenance Schedule Version 4 7 256 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR w2 MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 1 CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERS ADMIN Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 5 3 1 General Information It allows the definition of cyclic maintenance schedules for use when generating cyclic works orders A cyclic maintenance schedule is simply a list of standard job items and quantities which are to be carried out
40. Daisey 10 00 ITEM 100 00 Total Cost Lab Units 110 00 Figure 194 Version 4 7 234 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ic Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE ol Sustaining Infrastructure WORKS ORDERING REPORTS 4 12 Summary of Defects Not Yet Instructed MAI3920 Purpose This report produces a List of defects which have a Status of AVAILABLE and which meet the required selection parameters Defects which appear on this report may be selected on a Work Order The report is ordered by Road Id and is divided by Priority and Standard Item Sub Section The following information is displayed Road Group Name Link and Section Id Defect Priority SISS Labour Units Cost 4 12 1 Selection Parameters Admin Unit Required Default List Select an administrational unit to be used for this report The default is the Admin Unit assigned to the current User Road Type Optional List If required enter the Road Type from which to select defects from If this field is left blank all Road Group Types will be reported on Road Id Optional List If required enter the Road Group Id from which to select defects from If this field is left blank all Road Group Types will be reported on From Date Optional If requir
41. Date Instructed Work Order Lines Reference Work Order Status Defect Priority Date Due Labour Units Road Rog c re ARE9510055 INSTRUCTED 3692 fi 29 MAR 1995 1200D40890 00115 kiN a 38055 RMEV20052 INSTRUCTED 140770 f 29 APR 1998 10 00 1200A350 N 00321 act 69361 RME 20733 INSTRUCTED 157170 f 07 OCT 1998 10 00 12004350 N 00341 ist 423032 coE 660107 INSTRUCTED 10 00 1200A30 E 00397 ENC 141120 coE 660107 AUDIT 10 00 1200A30 E 00397 ENC a en Order By Reference Ascending New Gang F Assign Gang Gang Labour Units 0 00 Total Selected Labour Units 30 00 Figure 173 Gang Crew Allocation Version 4 7 200 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc acu Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 raaka hito WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 14 1 General Information Once a work order has been raised and issued by the client the contractor may wish to organize that work in their own way to suit the skill set of their own work gangs This form is designed to allow the association of work order lines to individual work gangs as well as re allocating work between gangs The product option GANGENABLE will be set to Y to allow the use of gangs Once set additional fields will be displ
42. Details Works Order No AE Scheme Type Local Roads Attributes Temp Trattemt asss 0000 a y y A Existing CAY Conditions No of Vehs in 3 mins 55 Existing PED Conditions a Footway Width m Footway Category right Footway Width m Verge oo Cycleway oo No of Peds in 3 mins Figure 110 Flexible Attributes 3 5 15 Flexible Attributes Each different type of work order may potentially require a different set of information to be held against it To facilitate this the work order flexible attributes can be linked to individual scheme type This allows the customer to define a set of attributes that are specific for a small scheme work order and another set specific for cyclic work orders The attributes are based on scheme type The flexible attributes are set up using the standard asset meta model module by defining a special type of asset record this asset record is then linked to the appropriate scheme type using Application Attributes MAI3819 The Attributes part of the form will display the flexible attributes of the asset metamodel mapped to the scheme type used in the work order Attribute values can be added or modified Version 4 7 117 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ia 5 Bentle
43. GUIDE 5 B en t le y Sustaining Infrastructure PAYMENTS 7 2 5 Payment Run Report C Creditor Type Reference Creditors Name Direct Services Department Highways Address Davyfield Road Blackburn Total Value of Work Amount due for Payment 3318 54 3318 54 957 48 957 48 137 00 137 00 1114 56 1114 56 968 39 968 39 25431 25431 630 66 630 66 Figure 231 Payment Run Report C Version 4 7 286 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR PF MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE E PAYMENTS Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 7 3 Query Payment Run Details MAI3940 Maintenance Manager e Inventory o Inspections e Works e Contracts gt Interfaces 8 Financial Deselect Items for Payment Payment Run Query Payment Run Details Budgets Figure 232 Query Payment Run Details Menu Option emm Payment Run Details MAI3840 Contract Payment Id Run Date Username First Payment Total Value Retention INAT Payment Amount Last Payment E uz A MET BURCDAILY n 02 MA Y 2006 LANCSTEST 21 67 00 0 00 0 00 67 00 o BURCDAILY 22 02 MAY 2006 LANCSTEST 21 145 00 0 00 0 00 145 00 21 BURCDAILY 23 02 MAY 2006 LANCSTEST 21 159 00 0 00 0 00 159 00 22 BURC
44. If required enter a logical condition to restrict the inventory affected by the current job item This field is used to be more selective with the inventory item and can limit the work to inventory of a given type It is populated with the inventory item Column Name and Attribute Values which can be established from Asset Metamodel NM0410 For example for grass cutting on an embankment where the angle of the embankment required is less than 45 the Attribute condition would be IIT ANGLE lt 45 Factor Optional Enter a factor if the contract rate is charged on a different unit of measurement to the unit the inventory item is normally measured in For example a verge is measured in metres but the SOR price may be priced per kilometre in this case a factor of 0 001 can be applied converting the verge length from metres to kilometres Version 4 7 255 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 H en t le U Sustaining Infrastructure CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERS ADMIN 5 3 Cyclic Maintenance Schedules MAI3860 Maintenance Manager a Inventory Inspections Works Works Orders Defects Works Orders Cyclic Maintain Work Orders Contractor Interface View Work Order Line History Gang
45. Line Budget Reallocation Menu Option ie Budget Reallocation MAI3620 DORSET maidev44 EXDL18 MAI v4 3 0 0 Work Order CLB_TEST36 eB TES COPY Road Type fop Road Id ALL_SECTIONS_GROUP ts SchemeType R Contract CLB_TEST TEST CONTRACT Date Completed t0 JAN 2011 11 34 Estimated Actual Date Work Road Id WOL Id Defect Id Type Treatment Cost Cost Completed Category 1200430 E 00393 474379 m 677 25 1002 25 10 JAN 2011 11 30 060111 a 1200430 E 00383 474380 P 0 00 0 00 10 JAN 2011 11 34 060111 1200430 E 00393 474381 3 645 00 970 00 10 JAN 2011 11 34 60111 sss SSS SSS SS SSS SSS eee Figure 171 Work Order Line Budget Reallocation 3 13 1 General Information This form allows the User to query any completed Works Order and amend the Budget Work Category on each individual Works Order Line to another appropriate budget The selected Budget must satisfy the following criteria e There must be sufficient balance available to accommodate the Actual Cost of the Works Order Line e The Financial Year must be either the same as that of the original Budget or the following Financial Year Version 4 7 198 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ipie 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGE
46. MAI3899 ooo eecssecssecssecseceseceeceseesseeeseeseneesaeseaeesaaecaaesaeeaeenaeseaeee 50 2 8 1 General nformation 2 2 ite IC UE eit eme e EUR eL Eee pe EP RE Eoo pae anaa 50 2 8 2 Inspections by Group ms 51 2 8 3 Inspected Roads niii nete late eret oaie a E TE AEE SE OREA 52 29 Detects MAT3806 4 ueterem E TERE eed SE E EEE E EEE 53 2 9 1 General Informationen eer e ee a aia Ee Lap iaae 53 2 9 2 DCL CHS Hm M 53 2 9 3 DD A 54 2 9 4 o eglau T aae 54 2 9 5 Detect etinm 55 2 9 6 Edit Defect Rn oii deeds tee REL ier ei PN secet ere AN Gti eee PEDE cen 56 2 9 7 Create Work Order trier ep i deans edet e eee Toe p Rae Edu ped eda 56 210 View Defects MAIBSIO iine teet rete e e Pe De A hatha taweses 59 2 10 1 General ntormatiohn roe re ies der ida peste a tpe av eta ense eR Ep Eee ever e E Hia ERER 59 2102 View Defects ee Hte esteso bete ve bee cero Ie a n beet osse pe eno eee oae ee tese peo eset sv seco pen ve ecce eusu aea 60 EXOR E MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 Be ntle y TABLE OF CONTENTS POE E E DEC A E A E E T A A saves 61 241 Match Duplicate Defects MAD 730 ruriini a 62 DAI General Information tree eren EREE CORE Pe EUER E den 62 2 11 2 Section D tails aec etae eret Po EL ise Eee ERI e a eee ente ERN Ets 63 211 3 Defect to be Superseded reete eerte ete t e naaie E ke pei gn Ro
47. Name 29 078 550 Scheduled Cut Principal Verges Unit Min Quantity Max Quantity Lab Unit Factor Quantity Est Lab Units Y Rate Cost Estimates 4630 69 4630 69 2 99 13845 76 Actuals Continue Figure 216 BOQ Details 5 5 4 BOQ Details This window is displayed by pressing the Expand button in the menu toolbar when a BOQ item is selected in the window above it is for information therefore all fields are display only Select Continue to return to the BOQ Items window Version 4 7 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT 268 The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 B en le Y i Sustaining Infrastructure CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERS ADMIN 5 6 Maintenance Reports MAI3825 Maintenance Manager Zi Inventory Z3 Inspections Works Works Orders Creation Interface Works Orders Cyclic Maintain Work Orders Contractor Interface Gang Crew Allocation Work Orders Authorisation View Cyclic Maintenance Work Cyclic Maintenance Schedules Cyclic Maintenance Schedules by Road Section Mair Report Cancel York Orders Figure 217 Maintenance Reports Menu Option ka Maintenance Report DORSET nm4beta2 GBEXOR730 MAI v4 0 Link Id 12004338 Agency 1200 Linkcode a338 E Section 45
48. Name Distance Measure Units Select 120002091 8 001 ALLINGTON STREET JCT 83150 TO JCT C166 LIVE NETWORK L lu 12006166 00205 PRINCE S STREET JCT ALBERT ROAD TO JCT LIVE NETWORKL Search Scale 0 85 Wem 1 85 2 15 0 248 59 774 Metres 0 200 125 155 Metres Crown copyright All rights reserved 100019340 2006 HeH 369057 22146 90641 90602 Active Layer STRUCTURES Attribute Not Set Figure 24 Select Network The following details are displayed within the Confirm New Feature Creation window Network Group Type of Element Element Name Element Description Theme or Layer name of snapping theme Perpendicular distance to the Element from the click position Offset measure along the Element at the snapping point e Units of measurements Each Section within the List may be highlighted on the Map in turn by checking the Select option This allows the User to select the correct Section on which to create the Defect Version 4 7 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT 28 The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR 2 8 MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE e Be ntle y MANAGING INSPECTIONS Theme Name Distance Measure Select JAD JOT HAWTHORNE ROAD LIVE NETWORK L 0 46
49. No of Peds in 3 mins lie lie ne e oe elie n fre in e po p Figure 145 Flexible Attributes Each different type of work order may potentially require a different set of information to be held against it To facilitate this the work order flexible attributes can be linked to individual scheme type This allows the customer to define a set of attributes that are specific for a small scheme work order and another set specific for cyclic work orders The attributes are based on scheme type The flexible attributes are set up using the standard asset meta model module by defining a special type of asset record this asset record is then linked to the appropriate scheme type using Application Attributes MAI3819 The Attributes part of the form will display the flexible attributes of the asset metamodel mapped to the scheme type used in the work order Attribute values can be added or modified Version 4 7 162 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc owl 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustalnlug Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 11 10Programme Details Priority Interim Payment Risk Assesment Report Method Statement Works Programme Additiona
50. Press Finish to create the Work Order Scheme Type Contract JB_ Figure 50 Raise Work Order When the Finish button is pressed the Work Order Defects MAI3800 module will be called and the Work Order will be displayed There will be a work order line for each maintenance section selected Version 4 7 48 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc e 5 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS WB RESCETNEESETE Defect Id Treatment Status Work Category Type Priority Sheet Completed Repaired Asset Ref Labour Units Est Cost Identifier Descr Location Remarks WOL Id Asset ld Schedule Registerable Register Status e 1200D10920 00105 474266 __jinstRucteo oonan MANOR DRIVE JCT MERRIOTT HILL NETTLECOM Registerable Register Status 1200D10923 00105 474267 m JINSTRUCTED 070131 CASTLE LANE JCT KING S LANE TO JCT MERRIO Registerable Register Status SE j BOG Items View Notices Get From Map J Copy Line J Select Defects TMA Interface Invoices Summary Figure 51 Work Order Lines The Map window will be automatically refreshed and the newly created Scheme be displayed Version
51. Section or Budget Allocation Group on which the Defect is raised The default value may only be updated if product option DEFSCHTYPU is set to Y Contract Required Default List This is the Contract used within the Work Order The default value is determined by the value set for product Option DUMCONCODE Once the appropriate Contract has been selected press the Next Button Work Order Default If Product Option WORREFGEN Is set to M manual the Work Order Number and Description should be entered If set to C Contract based or A Admin Unit based the work order number will be automatically generated when the Next gt button is pressed and a valid Budget is selected If Multiple Budgets exist for the defect Activity Scheme Type Section or Budget Allocation Group combinations a list will be displayed from which to select the required Budget Version 4 7 57 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR PF MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 6 MANAGING INSPECTIONS Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure Balance Cost Code ACCIDENT A TER CARE SC ACCIDENT AFTER CARE Sc 00 270602314 ACCIDENT AFTER CARE sc 1000 270302314 ACCIDENT A gt TER CARE Sc 500 260502314 ACCIDENT AFTER CARE Si 290602314 ACCIDENT A T
52. Sum 0 00 Total 17 91 For Client Figure 190 Part 1 For Contractor For Contractor 1 Version 4 7 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc 228 ae 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE await tartan WORKS ORDERING REPORTS DORSET DORSET COUNTY COUNCIL Date 21 MAY 2009 MAI3919 Print Works Order Enhanced Page 2 Works Details Work Order No 902C 2 Permanent Repair Due 07 NOV 2008 Job Code 070131 Cost Code Road Name SWANNERY BRIDGE KING S R A TO WESTHAM R A WEYMOUTH Road Id 1200A353 P 00934 Chainage Offset 0 XSP Defect Id 361499 Defect Priority 22 Defect Description Other Defect Location Special Instructions Repair Treatment MCA Pemm Pyhole repair Hardstone w c ne 0 25 Repair Description Item Description Quantity Unit Rate Value 29 01001 TMA Mobile lane close adj verge block working veh 0 10 HOUR 179 08 17 91 sign vehicle trailer Sub Total 17 91 VOP 0 00 V O P 0 00 Overall Total 1791 Figure 191 Part 2 Version 4 7 229 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR
53. Works Orders Contractor Interface MAI3802 this date will be populated the id of the user who viewed the work order displayed in the adjacent field Date Completed Display Only When all of the lines on the works order are completed this field will display the date of completion Once the works order is completed and saved no further changes can be made to the works order To complete a works order without completing each individual line select the Complete button This will set all the BOQ Actual values equal to the current estimated values To complete a works order by completing each line individually the User can change the individual line to completed manually and enter a date in the next field At this point changes can be made to the actual values of the BOQ items these changes must be made before saving the changes Rechargeable Optional Enter either Y or N to indicate if some or all or this work order is rechargeable Cost Recharged Optional When a rechargeable defect has been rectified and the works order completed it is possible to recharge an amount of money to the contractor If required enter that amount here Estimates Sub Total Display Only As the works order is being compiled each works order line is costed up based on the current rates for the job items held against the contract This figure does not take into account any discount arrangements in place with the contractor Estimat
54. along a predetermined stretch of road at a predefined frequency An example would be Grass Cutting all the grass verges and embankments along the A33 twice yearly The schedule itself is linked to a road group or road section thus allowing the amounts of inventory items along each section to be calculated In this way this form can automatically calculate work volumes for each standard job item The method of calculation is set up in Product Options HIG9130 setting the USECYCGRPD DoT roads or USECYCGRPL Local roads options to either Y or N These product options determine whether road schedules and associated work order lines will be based on road groups or road sections In Work Orders Cyclic if this option is set to Y then each road work order line will be based on a road group If set to N then lines will be based on a road section In Cyclic Maintenance Schedules if this option is set to Y then actual quantities may be entered for the schedule items If set to N they may not be entered In Cyclic Maintenance Schedules by Section if this option is set to N then actual item quantities for road sections are automatically accumulated into schedule totals If set to Y there is no accumulation This option must not be amended on a live system Due to the varying nature of cyclic maintenance work a number of different road group types may be required for different routes etc for example the grass cutting route will di
55. and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc piod Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE roy Sustaining Infrastructure WORKS ORDERING REPORTS EXOR2204 DEMO COUNTY COUNCIL Date 05 SEP 2000 MAI3906 Print BOQ Work Order Defecis Page 1 of 1 Control Sheet Defects Contractor 15 Stewart amp Sons Engineering Contract 13 Bitmac Patching 2000 Work Order STEWARTOI 3 Date Issued Est Comp Date Sheet Defect Id Priority Location Target Date Item Code Quantity Unit Labour Units Repaired Squad Ret Comments Figure 188 Control Sheet Version 4 7 221 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 23 Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure WORKS ORDERING REPORTS 4 5 Work Order Detail MAI3500 Purpose This report displays a summary of each Works Order Line on the selected Works Order and provides detailed information about the defect associated with a Works Order Line The following information is displayed Link and Section Id Road Section Description Road Section Length Defect Chainage Defect XSP Defect Id Defect Description Attribute Name and Value Treatment Code Repair Description Due Completion Date The Total Es
56. be included To include multiple Item Codes press the Create Record button on the toolbar XSP Optional List If required enter the Cross Sectional Position of defects to be reported on If this field is left blank defect on all XSP s will be included Summary of Defects Not Yet Instructed EXOR2204 EXOR2204 Summary of Defects Not Yet Instructed Date 05 SEP 00 MAI3920 Page 1 Road Group DEMOA16251 Priority 2 3 SISS Lab Units Cost Lab Units Cost ALL 0 00 110 00 0 00 110 00 Total 0 00 110 00 0 00 110 00 Figure 195 Version 4 7 236 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR P MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Ss WORKS ORDERING REPORTS Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 4 13 Instructed Work by Status MAI3924 Purpose This report produces a list of all Defects currently on a Work Order which meet the required selection parameters 4 13 1 Selection Parameters Admin Unit Required Default List Select an administrational unit to be used for this report The default is the Admin Unit assigned to the current User Road Type Optional List If required enter the Road Type from which to select defects from If this field is left blank all Road Group Types will be reported on Road Id Optional Li
57. been ticked as Registerable but no notices have been sent for any of them Version 4 7 167 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc acu Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 a NEES WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT e O Outstanding one or more of the works order lines have been ticked as Registerable and at least one notice has been sent for at least one of them Only work order lines that have a status of INSTRUCTED can be sent to the register e C Complete All work order lines that have been ticked as Registerable have had a 0600 notice sent At this point the View Register button will be displayed The Refresh button will refresh the status in the active form The status will be automatically refreshed when the work order is re queried Status Display Only This field will display a status code derived from the various status codes of the work order lines to indicate the overall status of the work order Status codes can be viewed in form Status Codes HIG9110 Work Order Status codes control the work ordering processes and should not be added to or modified without direct consultation with exor Contract Required List Select a valid contract under which this work will be carried out Contracts are set up u
58. beside the Works Order Total Cost field To deselect ALL Works Orders press the UnCheck All X button To select individual Works Orders to be authorised click in the check box of the Works Order required A tick will be displayed To authorise the selected Works Orders press the Authorise button 3 8 5 Works Order Authorisation Worktray The Work Order Authorisation Worktray is an Information Manager module that presents the user with a list of all the raised work orders that they are responsible for by geographical area and work category budget The user can choose to authorise and instruct a work order or forward it to another user s Worktray When in the Worktray the user has all the standard functions available from within Information Manager for display of the data Version 4 7 144 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR PF MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 6 WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure In addition they can Further restrict the data displayed by road group Drill to work order line and BOQ details Hover on the work order number to view work order line summary Drill from the work order number to the Navigator module to view all work order details View the work order location on a map View a
59. button to view the detail using Defects MAI3806 Selecting a field in the lower half of the window will display all the road sections in the selected road group these can be scrolled through until the required section is found before selecting the Select Defects button This will display all the defects meeting the criteria entered for the selected road section these defects will initially be displayed as a summary select the Detail button to view the detail using Defects MAI3806 2 10 3 Select Defects Acty Defect Defect Defect Date Repair Road Id Road Name Area Type Status Priority Location Inspected Category E ASTON LOA Nese eM eam ERERI a een 1200430 W 00207 BABYLON HILL R A NEAR YEOVIL MC POTH SELECTED 1 opposite house 4 fit auc 2011 Temporary eee x ee a n a p Se E E EE ETMESERMM L e a O E Detail Figure 65 Select Defects button The above window will be displayed when the Select Defects button is selected Select the Detail button to view the detail using Defects MAI3806 Version 4 7 61 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR P MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE E MANA
60. by clicking at the appropriate location on the map To create a Defect on the network firstly navigate to the appropriate map extent using the Locator Search facilities the Map window Navigation tools or a combination of both Select the Create Defects on Network at X Y function from the Feature Edit tool The mouse cursor will change to a cross hair To create the Defect click on the required location within the Map window The system will attempt to derive a Network location by snapping to an available Layer Only the visible Layers defined within the Layer Control tool which have been defined as Snapping Layers for the Defect theme in GIS Themes GIS0010 will be used by this snapping process A list of all Network Elements Datum s or Groups within a defined snapping tolerance defined in GIS Themes GIS0010 from the Visible Active Layers is displayed to allow the User to select the appropriate Network element to which to Snap and derive its location Version 4 7 27 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE MANAGING INSPECTIONS 6 Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure amp Confirm New Feature Creation Type NetworkID Network Name Theme
61. checked box will result in details of the repair being displayed in the repairs window When adding repairs to a defect selecting the unchecked box will allow you to enter a repair providing the repair category is valid against the priority of the selected defect Valid repair categories are set up using Defect Priorities MAI3812 Maintenance Manager System Administrator Manual If any of the boxes are checked their repairs can be viewed by selecting the Repairs button and using the Next and Previous buttons once in the repairs window 2 2 7 Summary This window will be displayed when the Summary button is selected A summary of all the defects collected for the selected inspection will be displayed To view the full details of a defect select the required defect then select the Detail button this will take you back to the previous window Defect Id Type Acty SISS Prty Status Location 91192 AVAILABLE OPPOSITE HOUSE NO 68 Detail Figure 14 Defect Summary Button 2 2 8 Print This button will run the Print Defect Details MAI3902 report Version 4 7 17 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR PF MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 1 MANAGING INSPECTIONS Bentley Sustaining
62. consent of Bentley Inc pon 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure WORKS ORDERING REPORTS Local or DTp Flag Required List Enter D to select Work Orders on DoT roads or L to select Work Orders on local roads Complete or Outstanding Optional List Enter C to include only Completed Work Orders O to include only Outstanding Work Orders or leave blank to include both Work Category Optional List If required enter the Work Category or partial Work Category with LIKE operator 4 6 2 Work Orders Summary MAI3505 LIVE2108 NORTH PENNINE LINK GROUP Date 21 DEC 1999 MAI3S05 Print Works Orders Summary Page Actual Date Date Date Last Raised No of Cos Insiructed Completed Printed Bv Defec 0 00 24 NOV 1999 IMT 0 00 Version 4 7 224 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR P MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 WORKS ORDERING REPORTS Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 4 7 Work Order NMA MAI3909 Purpose This report produces a detailed work order in a format acceptable to NMA s The following information is displayed Work Order Number Work Order Description Defect Id Cost Code Work Category Link Id Road Section Number Road Se
63. contains the sum of the Actual Sub Total and Actual Balancing Sum fields above If the contractor has no discount groups in place then the Sub Total and Total Cost fields will be the same If a discount group structure is in place then this field will show the works order cost after the discount has been applied Defect J Scheme 0 Cyclic 0 Figure 93 Work Order Content Summary These three fields are displayed at the bottom of the main works order window and indicate the number and type of work order lines that are contained within the work order A number of buttons have been defined on this window for use when raising a works order they are as follows Lines Opens the defects window and allows the user to add works order lines This window is also common to both other works and cyclic maintenance works orders Figure 96 Standard Item Totals Opens the standard item totals window and displays the estimated and actual costs and quantities for each standard item in the works order Figure 106 Contract Totals Opens the contract totals window and displays all contracts that can fulfill the work contained on the works order with associated costs and scores Figure 107 An alternative contract can now be selected if required Additional Details Opens the additional details window additional additional details can be added if required Figure 111 Flexible Attributes Opens the maintain flexible attributes window attrib
64. document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure INTRODUCTION This User Manual is intended for those who will use MM to manage the organisations maintenance program This guide explains how MM can be used to manage Scheduled and Ad hoc inspections Cyclic Maintenance Schedules the creation of Works Orders their allocation to Contractors and the administration of those orders through to completion and final payment Metadata can be created in MM to enforce compliance with the organizations business rules and procedures Typically this might include inspection frequencies valid defect types attributes and priorities valid treatment types treatment models and priorities levels of financial authority user privileges and the creation and maintenance of Contracts Contractors and works items This metadata will normally be set up by the modules administrator using the Maintenance manager System Admin Manual Details of how to download and upload inspections from Data Collection Devices can be found in the Maintenance Manager Inspection Loader Manual Version 4 7 2 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distribu
65. enter the Road Type from which to select defects from If this field is left blank all Road Group Types will be reported on Road Id Optional List If required enter the Road Group Id from which to select defects from If this field is left blank all Road Group Types will be reported on Contract Id Optional List If required enter the name of the contract to be reported on Date Completed From Optional If required enter the earliest Date Completed to be included on the report Only those Work Order Lines completed after this date will be included in the report Date Completed To Optional Version 4 7 242 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ic 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sasa Dehesa WORKS ORDERING REPORTS If required enter the latest Date Completed to be included on the report Only those Work Order Lines completed before this date will be included in the report Sample Percentage Required Default Enter the Percentage of Work Order lines which meet the required selection parameters to select for the Quality Audit The default value is 596 SISS Optional List If required enter the Standard Item Sub Section SISS to be reported on If this field is left blank
66. entire line including any BOQ percentage uplifts that have already been applied Note Ifthe value of the Work Order needs to be uplifted based on a banding for the value of the entire work order then Discount Groups MAI3624 Maintenance Manager Admin should be used 3 12 7 Adding Individual Percentage Items to a BOQ Item Adding a Percentage Item to a Bill Of Quantities allows the cost of the BOQ item to which the Percentage Item is associated to be increased or decreased depending on the percentage value defined for the Percentage Item in the selected Contract For example work carried out on Bank Holidays may attract a percentage surcharge Adding a Percentage Item to the BOQ would allow this surcharge to be applied Percentage Items may only be associated with the Standard Job Items which have the Allow Percent Items flag set to Y in Standard Items MAI3888 Maintenance Manager System Administration Manual Percentage Items are those Standard Job Items which have the Unit of Measurement as defined for Product Option PERC_ITEM e g PERCENTAGE The computation method for a Percentage Item is determined by Product Option CUM_PERC and can either by NORMAL When set to NORMAL a percentage item will display the percentage of the standard item Or CUMULATIVE A setting of CUMULATIVE will result in the percentage item being the sum of the standard item and other percentage items related to the standard item The Product Option Value ca
67. filed set to Y in Standard Items MAI3888 Check the Add box for the selected Item on the right of the window Click on the Add button on the BOQ Items window A list of valid Percentage Items will be displayed Select the required age item from the List The selected age item will be added to the BOQ An gt will be displayed beside the age item to signify that it is a child item of the main Standard Job Item Dl gs AR Note Quantities for Percentage Items cannot be amended Select the Check AII to check all BOQ items displayed 9 Select Uncheck All to clear all checked BOQ items ge 3 12 10Adding Non Contract Items to a Works Order Normally the Bill of Quantities on a works order is defined as a series of standard job items as described above These items have agreed unit rates Occasionally however it is required to add an item to a works order that is not on the contract This can be achieved by the use of Rogue Items sometimes known as Wildcard Items A Rogue Item is simply a standard job item with no preset rate quantity or description Generally it will have item codes ending 9999 When you select a Rogue Item from the list of items the Item Description Total Qty and Rate fields will be empty You can then complete these fields to effectively create a non standard item It is important to note that for the software to be able to calculate the works order totals correctly you must enter a rate f
68. following pop up window is displayed allowing the user to enter a date that is prior to the sysdate enabling the creation of retrospective work orders BB instruct works Order Please Enter The Date Instructed Figure 150 Instruct pop up Continue will Instruct the work order at the displayed date and time Cancel will return the user to the Work Order details with no changes made A works order must have a date instructed if the contractor is to view the order using Works Orders Contractor Interface MAI3802 and for the work order to be picked up by the CIM interface Last Printed Display Only When the works order is printed the date of printing is displayed here If the works order is reprinted at any time this field is updated to reflect the last printing date This field is part of the works ordering audit trail so each time it is printed an audit is maintained Once a works order has been printed changes to the works order lines are not allowed unless the Product Option ADDPRINT is set to Y Version 4 7 170 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc acu Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 Aa NEES WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Date Received Display Only When a contractor accesses the works order using
69. for product Option DUMCONCODE Once the appropriate Contract has been selected press the Next Button Work Order Default If Product Option WORREFGEN Is set to M manual the Work Order Number and Description should be entered If set to C Contract based or A Admin Unit based the work order number will be automatically generated when the Next gt button is pressed and a valid Budget is selected Press Next to call the Budget window If multiple Budgets exist for the defect Activity Scheme Type Section or Budget Allocation Group combinations a list will be displayed from which to select the required Budget Version 4 7 47 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR gt MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 Be ntle y MANAGING INSPECTIONS Balance Cost Code ACCIDENT A TER CARE 3c ACCIDENT A TER CARE sc 500 270602314 ACCIDENT AFTER CARE Sc 1000 270302314 ACCIDENT A gt TER CARE sc 500 260602314 ACCIDENT AFTER CARE Si 290602314 ACCIDENT AFTER CARE 290302914 ACCIDENT A TER CARE Sc 2309 30 954 47 270302314 ACCIDENT A TER CARE SC 30035 628 8 270402314 y x x Figure 49 Budgets Once a Budget has been selected the number or sections added to the Work Order will be displayed in a pop up dialogue
70. for which the local highway authority are the street authority Details of every street which is a prospectively maintainable highway Details of every street of which the local highway authority is aware which is a highway but for which they are not the street authority Version 4 7 123 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc acu Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 prosdhesded Br bids WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT e Details of every street or part of street which is a a protected street b a street with special engineering difficulties or c a traffic sensitive street or proposed designations e Description and location of both street authority works for road purposes and any such works that are proposed e Particular of consents under s61 along with any conditions or directions under s62 e Particulars of street works licenses including details of conditions and changes of ownership e Information under section 70 3 and 4A as to completion of reinstatements e Particulars of apparatus notified to the street authority under section 80 2 e Every notice of works under section 85 2 e Details of road closure and diversions where an order under section 14 of the Road Traffic Regulation Act 1984 is required e The road c
71. form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ons 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE prosiiu deer bei CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERS ADMIN Actual Quantity Optional Enter the actual amount of work to be done in this section each time a works order is generated for this schedule It is possible to accept the system generated value from the Calculated Quantity field by Duplicate Field from the menu bar or by pressing F3 to accept the system calculated quantity Last Updated Display Only Displays the date that this line of the schedule was last updated 5 4 5 The Next Step Having created the schedule and entered the actual amount of work to be done for each road section the next step is to create a suitable contract to raise the works order against This is done via Contracts MAI3880 Maintenance Manager Administration Manual Note Before a contract can be created the contractor relating to that contract must exist Contractors are created via Contractors MAI3881 Maintenance Manager Administration Manual Version 4 7 265 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 6 CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERS ADMIN 5 5 View
72. ieu edet eet tees t orba ede dene NESAS essa Toca AS eee Lo neta CR e aee lanea 217 4 4 BOQ Work Order Defects MAT3906 esses eene nnne ennnnss 219 4 4 1 Selection Parameter eene eee iir tete ees herede KANKAAN AEEA NAN ANNAA SAA FAAARA 219 4 4 2 BOQ Work Order Defects MAI3906 ssesssssseseeeeeeeeee enne nnne enne nenne 220 4 5 Work Order Detail MAI3500 essessesseseeeeeeee eene ennt enne seen ttes enne 222 4 5 1 Selection Parameter cioe terree trino deo had eoe ARETA Fa e eee lec ee TR TER ea eo Foe ee RE 222 4 5 2 Works Order Detail MA3500 ccccccccssscccssssececsesececsesaececessaececsesaeeeesesaeeecsesseseeseaaes 222 4 6 Works Order Summary MAI3505 sssssssssseeseeeeeee eee nennen ren rennen nennen nennen 223 4 6 1 Select Om Parameter sarsaran aaisan aAa hh eee bo e OUR NANETA RPAN AAE soacecantaaccdiaasaagedsseones 223 4 6 2 Work Orders Summary MAI3505 uu ceeccceecceesseceeeeceeeeeceeeeesaeceeaeeceeeeesaeeesaaeeeeaeeeaes 224 4 7 Work Order NMA MAI3909 0 eccccsccecssseeceessececeeseaaececsesseceesesaececseaaececeeaueeeeseaaeeeeneaaes 225 4 7 1 Selection Parameters iei3 sccevccecccesdesnzceshanidasesdasscduelancanshedaestebabieasersnsdeseedencansbessdessvasncavendenes 225 4 7 2 Work Orders NMA MAI3909 sssssssssseseseseeeeen enne nnne nennen tenes en nennen nens 226 4 8 Work Order Enhanced MAI3919 sseess
73. it is strongly recommended that they use the same process 3 5 23 1 2 The requirement is to register for all works promoters Version 4 7 122 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 23 Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 1 All works that involve the breaking up or resurfacing of any street but see below for pole testing involving excavation 2 All works that involve the opening of the carriageway or cycleway of traffic sensitive streets at traffic sensitive times 3 All works that require the use of any form of temporary traffic control as defined in the Code of Practice for Safety at Street Works and Road Works 4 All works that reduce the number of lanes available on a carriageway of three or more lanes 5 All works that require a temporary traffic restriction order or notice or the suspension of pedestrian crossing facilities 6 All works that require a reduction in width of the existing carriageway of a traffic sensitive street at a traffic sensitive time Non Registerable 1 Traffic Census Surveys Traffic census surveys have deliberately not been included as disclosure of this information prior to a census taking place can encourage a change to the normal pa
74. job in question Note that the message line will display a message explaining what unit of measurement should be used for each dimension field This message will be of the form Enter the Length Quantity Display Only Displays the calculated quantity of work based on the dimensions supplied in the previous fields The unit of this field is displayed in the Unit field described below Unit Display Only Displays the unit of measurement of this job item This unit relates to the Total Qty field described above Rate Display Only Displays the rate per unit for this work item as held on the contract under which this works order is being created Cost Display Only The actual cost will be displayed Additional BOQ details can be viewed for each item by selecting the Expand button from the toolbar Check Box If this item is to attract a percentage increase or decrease using a Percentage Item tick this box Note that only Standard Job Items which have the Allow Percentage Flag flag set to Y in Standard Items MAI3888 can have a Percentage Item associated with them For information on adding Percentage Items to a Works Order line refer to the section Adding a Percentage Item Page109 above BOQ Uplift Item Display Only The BOQ uplift item used for all boq items that require a uplift will be displayed WOL Uplift Item Display Only The Work Order Line uplift item for the selected w
75. need completing to keep your records up to date There are two methods of doing this they are as follows Manually Defects can be manually completed using the procedure described in Manually Completing a Defect in this guide Automatically The relevant defects can be added as additional work order lines in the current other work works order in the same way as they are added to a defect clearance works order Works Orders Defects Version 4 7 149 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc on 23 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE sedat hito WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Once the defects are on the order they can each have a single rogue item with a zero rate and hence a zero cost associated with them Therefore when the works order is completed all the defects will be completed without affecting the cost of the order 3 10 Non Highways Related Works The Works Ordering system references your road network when raising works orders However there are occasions where you will wish to raise a works order to carry out some work on a part of your organisation that is not related to the network examples of this are depot work grounds maintenance and vehicle maintenance The following procedure details a method of raising a works order with th
76. of Bentley Inc int 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 11 Works Orders Contractor Interface MAI3802 Maintenance Manager LJ Inventory LJ Inspections Works Works Orders Defects Works Orders Cyclic Maintain Work Orders Contractor Interface View Work Order Line History Figure 138 Works Ordersn Contractor Menu Option Maintain Work Orders Contractor Interface M Gang Road Date Date Work Order Type Road Id Instructed Completed Total Cost Status os Rwe21 HMWC HMWC NORTHAREA p amp JuN2000 INSTRUCTED ios Rm20 rop ALLLINKS 25 Jun 2010 INSTRUCTED fiog_RMei8 rop ALL LINKS 26 JUN 2010 INSTRUCTED M e csne4 rop aLL LINKS 25 Jun 2010 INSTRUCTED oe Rm770 rop ALL LINKS 24 JUN 2010 INSTRUCTED Bos pwois mwe mwe SOUTH AREA 4uun zoi0 Nsmucreo r og mweto rop ALL LINKS 23 Jun 2010 INSTRUCTED r fiog_RMeos rop ALL LINKS Dxjuw200 INSTRUCTED os Rmo TOP ALL LINKS 23 Jun 2010 INSTRUCTED M fio9_Rmeo4 rop ALL LINKS 23 Jun 2010 INSTRUCTED fiog_RMeo2 rop ALL LINKS 23 Jun 2010 INSTRUCTED r oy mwe rop ALL LINKS Dxjuw200 INSTRUCTED fiog_si7e66 roP ALL LINKS 22 JUN 2010 INSTRUCTED M os Rwen rop ALL LINKS 16 Jun 2010 INSTRUCTED r og Rm799 rop ALL LINKS 16 Jun 2010 INSTRUCTED T ix Lines WO Details Fl
77. of the Instruct button the date will be the same date as the instructed date this also allows the user to enter a date prior to the sysdate for the creation of retrospective work orders Note Version 4 7 169 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR P MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE E WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure When the User attempts to Authorise a Works Order this date field is used to determine the total value of Works Orders already Authorised by the User on the same day If the value of the current Works Order would lead to the User s Daily Authorisation Limit see the Max value per Day field in Maintenance Manager User Data MAI4410 being exceeded an error will be displayed and the current Works Order will not be Authorised Date Instructed Optional When the works order has been completely defined and you are ready to issue it to the contractor set the Date Instructed to the current date by pressing the Instruct button on the form When the Work Order is instructed this button will be used to Complete a Works Order When building the works order leave this field blank All works order lines must be priced before the order can be instructed When the Instruct button is selected the
78. press the Cancel button Date Time Created Default The current system date and time will be populated These may be amended if required Inspector Required List Select the inspector from the list of values These inspectors must be logged on the system and are set up using Users HIG1832 Safety Detailed Required List Enter S for safety inspection D for detailed inspection Activity Required List Select the appropriate Activity from the list provided Only the Activities associated with the selected Asset Type will be available for selection Activities and Asset Types are associated using Asset Activities MAI3632 refer to the Maintenance Manager System Admin Guide Initiation Type Required List This is the Initiation Type used for the related Inspection record created for the Defect The default value is defined using Product Option INSP INIT This must contain a valid value as defined for the INITIATION TYPE Domain using Domains HI9120 refer to the General System Admin Guide Version 4 7 31 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR 2 MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE e Be ntle y MANAGING INSPECTIONS SISS Code Required List If required enter a SISS code Standard
79. product option Road Group Id Required List Use the Gazetteer to select the road group to which this schedule will apply Only road groups of the type entered in the previous field will be available Road Group Desc Display Only Displays the full name of the selected road group Start Date Optional Enter the start date of the schedule End Date Optional Enter the end date of the schedule The next group of fields display information about the 5 most recent works orders relating to this schedule This represents the last 5 times that the work contained on this schedule was performed As such they will initially all be blank Version 4 7 258 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ons Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 1 Sustaining Infrastructure CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERS ADMIN Works Order No Display Only Displays the works order number of the order relating to this schedule Date Instructed Display Only Displays the date that the work was instructed to the contractor Date Complete Display Only Displays the date that the work was completed Two buttons have been defined on this window for use when creating a schedule they are as follows Schedule Items Opens the sched
80. reactive ad hoc and quality Planning of surveys performance reporting and integration with mobile Data Collection Devices DCD are key features e defects with definable priority codes and status and an inventory change indicator Full on line reporting allows managers to readily assess maintenance needs e treatments treatment models translate defect treatments into sets of pre defined Bill Of Quantity BOQ items that allow engineers to easily translate defects into work packages e contracts holding estimates actuals and retentions for any pre defined work type Managers can therefore have direct access to up to date budget positions at any time e works orders defect cyclic and scheme works orders Automatic costing for multiple contracts and multiple budget codes allowing for variations and interim payments Work can be grouped based on location pricing budget code defect priority and BOQ item Using these tools engineers can benefit by comparing scenarios to plan cost effective and timely work solutions e resources such as contractors schedule of rates and budgets Budgets may be set for any area financial period or type of work and can be continually monitored and trends examined They may be integrated with Corporate Financial Systems or linked to standard office tools such as desktop spreadsheets for budget profiling In addition the on line assessment of contractor and labour availability is a clear benefit maintenance manage
81. representing the response of the notifiable organisation to the notice These values can be added to using Domains HIG9120 and updating the RESPONSE TYPES option Response Date Required Enter the date the response was received For an Acceptance this will default to today s date Version 4 7 73 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR 5 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS Accepted By Org Optional Enter the Org Code of the organisation accepting responsibility for the defect Version 4 7 74 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc acu Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Ss Pae B beides WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 Work Order Management This chapter describes the forms used to create maintain and review the Works Orders for both defect clearance works orders and other works Cyclic maintenance works orders are covered in a later chapter of this manual Works Orders Defects MAI3800 Works Order Authorisation MAI3848 Other Works MAI3800 Non Highways Rel
82. required For other notices it is the current value from the works phase Actual Insp Units Default For Initial notices this will default to null This can be updated For other notices it is the current value from the works phase Works Restricted Working Hours Parking Suspensions Footway Closure Checkbox Default For Initial notices this will display the default value as set up in the Defaults button This can be amended if required Version 4 7 135 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc pcd 5 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT For other notices it is the current value from the works phase Notes Default Populated with relevant details as to how the estimated start end dates are derived when the form is invoked with the intention of sending an initial notice Can also contain a message about locking should there be a locking issue Note The notes do not change as you change attribution of block items i e they are static and a way of informing the end user how the original values on the record were derived 3 7 4 Contacts tab Work Detats Contacts Coodndes 77 5 7 Work Order Lines Promoter Contact IAN SKINNER
83. roads options Once the schedules have been created and the quantities of work to be done calculated cyclic works orders can then be created at any time using Works Orders Cyclic MAI3800 This form will when given a schedule name generate and cost an appropriate works order to cover all the work needed to fulfill the schedule This works order can then be viewed amended and printed for issue to the contractor Version 4 7 251 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc meses 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE e sedie bin CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERS ADMIN Define Network Maintain Cyclic And Inventory Inventory Ruleg _ Contract Maintain Schedules EN Calc Quantities Maintain Sched by Road Section One off Setup Regular Use j Maintain Cyclic Works Order Print Cyclic Works Orders Figure 203 Version 4 7 252 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR E MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 B en le d Sustaining Infrastr
84. select a Treatment for the Defects If selected the BOQ items from the Treatment model will be used as the Repair Items for the Defect Only those Treatments associated with the previously selected Activity Defect Type combination will be available for selection Treatments are maintained using Treatment Data MAI1315 refer to the Maintenance Manager System Admin Guide The treatment code can be forced to be mandatory by setting the product option TRECODEMAN to Y Description Optional If required a description of the repair description may be entered Version 4 7 33 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR 2 MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE f Be ntle y MANAGING INSPECTIONS Date Repair Due Display Only The Target Date and Time for the Defect Repair will be displayed This is generated using the Defect Priority previously entered BOQs Optional List BOQs for the repair can be entered as required If Treatment Models are being used see Maintenance Manager User Admin Guides the default Bill Of Quantity Items within the Treatment Model defined for the selected Activity Defect Type Treatment will be shown These can be amended added to removed etc for the current set of Defects T
85. sent to the TMA Register the Works reference will be displayed This will be blank until the first notice is sent to the register USRN Display Only The USRN that has been derived against the work order line will be displayed e For defect clearance work order the USRN s will be derived based on the Road Section against the defect and the xy measure available on the defect to find the accurate USRN e For small scheme and cyclic work orders USRN s will be derived based on the Road Section against the work order line There are cases when USRN cannot be determined for the Road Section In such cases the Street field will be populated with Street cannot be determined for the Road Section and the Select Notice check box will be disabled User will not be allowed to send any TMA Notice against the work order line Street Name Display Query The Street Name for the derived USRN will be displayed Phase End Date Display Query This is the TMA actual end date if this is not available the estimated end date will be displayed Last Notice Type Display Query The last notice type that has been sent from the list of notices displayed below will be displayed For the available notices see below Next Notice Type Display Query The next notice from the available list of notices for the selected regime will be displayed For the available notices see below 3 6 2 1 How the Notice Types are derived As reques
86. status code changes from when it is loaded onto the system to when the repair is completed on a works order Defect status codes are set up and maintained using Status Codes HIG9110 as shown below Product MAI Domain Code DEFECTS Status Codes for an individual defect Feature 1 Defects are initially created with this status This status will be set in MAI3806 or BPR2200 Feature 2 The defect is ready to be assigned to a work order OThis status will be set in MAI3806 and checked in M Feature 3 At least one repair on the defect has been assigned to a work order LIThis status will be set in MAI3800 Feature 4 All repairs for the defect have been completed OThis status will be setin MAI3800 Feature 5 The defect may be manually amended or deleted ODefects with these statuses may be amended to a diffe Feature 6 The defect has been repaired via structural maintenance Feature 7 Superceded defects are reopened with this status This happens in MAI3806 when a superceding defect Feature 8 me defect has been written off Ilf no chainages are recorded the inspection loader cannot supercede c Feature 9 The description type and location are protected OThis feature is only relevant when the defect is updates Status Codes Allow Feature Start End Seq Code Name vp 2 SIAT O NES Date Date AVALABLE paene WNR 1 memo mnes WWW COMPLETED Completed IN NN IY IN Nv IN IN ry s emwawr feveredby
87. system administration function Inspection Id Display Only The Inspection ID is a serial reference number generated by the system to uniquely identify each inspection It cannot be amended Insp Batch Optional List If the inspection has been loaded from a DCD it will be assigned a batch number this field cannot be updated When creating a manual inspection if the inspection is contained within an existing batch when querying back the batch select the number from the List of Values If the manual inspection is not contained within an existing batch this field can be left blank and the system will generate an appropriate number Version 4 7 7 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR 2 MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 6 Be ntle y MANAGING INSPECTIONS Date Inspected Required Enter the date the inspection took place If the inspection has been loaded from a DCD this field cannot be amended Inspector Required List Select the inspector from the List of Values These inspectors must be logged on the system and are set up using Users HIG1832 Date Loaded Display Only This field will display the date the inspection was first loaded onto the system from a DCD 2nd Inspector Optional List If re
88. that the defect was recorded either entered onto the DCD using treatment models or recorded manually Should you want to add further items press the Create Record button in the toolbar This will enable you to add a new item Note To avoid problems the Save button should be used when each BOQ item has been added Note Once the work order has been instructed if the wrong BOQ has been entered or the band has changed prior to the entry of the actual values the incorrect BOQ item should be zeroed it cannot be deleted as it has been used in the definition of the estimated values before entering the correct item Item Code Required List Select a valid standard job item to represent a task to be carried out by the contractor All items added must exist on the selected contract Description Display Only Version 4 7 106 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc acu Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE E a NEES WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Displays the description of the standard job item Note that for Rogue Items this field becomes updateable to allow you to describe the Rogue Item in greater detail Quantity Required or Optional The first three fields allow the user to specify up to three dimensions associated to the
89. the Admin Unit is within the Admin Unit hierarchy of the associated network e Allowed repair types defined in the Defect Priorites form MAI3812 for a defect are based on the Activity and the Admin Unit of the associated Network Version 4 7 26 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR 5 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS e The calculation of the Repair due date will take the Admin Unit of the associated Network into account when identifying the appropriate Defect Priorities values to be used in the calculation e If Automatic Defect Prioritisation is being used defined by product option DEFAUTOPRD the Admin Unit of the Network assigned to the Defect along with the Defect Activity will be used to identify appropriate details defined in Maintain Automatic Defect Prioritisation form MAI3813 2 4 Create a Defect on Network at X Y using Locator Send X Y value to application Send Multiple Points to application Create Enquiry Create Enquiry On Asset Relocate Enquiry Create Defects On Assets Create Defects On Asset at X Y Create Defects on Network at X Y Figure 23 Feature Edit Menu This option allows a Defect to be created on a Network Section
90. the inventory contained on the selected sections Before cyclic maintenance works orders can be generated from the system a set of rules for each type of inventory to be included must be created These rules determine which inventory types will be affected when each of the standard jobs are carried out If no inventory exists on the sections and the actual values are to be entered using Cyclic Maintenance Schedules by Section MAI3862 no rules need entering 5 2 2 Cyclic Maintenance Inventory Rules When you enter this window the cursor sits in the Loca DTp field waiting for you to enter new data To obtain existing data press Execute Query from the toolbar Item Code Required List Select a valid job item from the List of Values to represent the work Description Display Only A description of the item code will be displayed Version 4 7 254 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc meses Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE S EE CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERS ADMIN Local DoT Required List Enter L for Local D for DoT inventory Inv Type Required List Select a valid inventory item type to represent the inventory which the current job item acts upon Attribute Condition Optional
91. to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc cdi k Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT M 3 12 3 Schedules Defect Id Treatment Status Work Category fType Priorty Sheet Completed Repaired Asset Ref Labour Units Est Cost Act Cost Identifier Descr Location Remarks WOL Id Asset Id Schedule Invoice Registerable Register Status I Target Date OLDRM3_C p263 Pa foo OLD RM3 CLASSIFIED ROADS B amp C ROADS 03 AUG 2000 10 11 o 566 72 56672 1868 A A Registerable Register Status Target Date OLDRMg_c 7634 Pa foo OLD RM3 CLASSIFIED ROADS B amp C ROADS 21 5EP 2000 00 00 7 1133 44 1133 44 1668 5 Registerable l Register Status Target Date Ij BOQ Items View Notices Get Fram M Copy Line Select Schedules TMA Interface Invoices Summary Figure 153 Schedules When this window is first displayed it will be blank select the Select Schedules button to retrieve the required schedule It holds details of each of the cyclic maintenance tasks selected for inclusion on the works order Each of these tasks is known as a Work Order Line Initially this block will contain a line for each of the road sections within the selected group If the By Asset flag set to Y in the Cyclic Maintenance By Road Section Form MA
92. to but not coincident with a Bus Stop or Guard Rail etc Examples of Defects created at XY locations shown as Red Stars within a Park polygon feature and adjacent to a Bus Stop point feature respectively are shown below Note No tolerance or validation is considered when creating Defects using this option Therefore Defects may be created at any distance from the selected Asset or created outside the boundary of a selected polygon feature Defects created against a Park and located within the park polygon feature highlighted in Green Figure 43 Polygon Feature Version 4 7 43 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS Defects created against a Bus Stop and located adjacent to the Bus Stop point feature circled in red wt Figure 44 Point Feature To Create Defects on an Asset at XY the asset in question must firstly be selected This can be done using the Locator Search functionality or by using the Navigation and Feature Selection tools available within the Map window If a Locator Search is used to select and zoom to the required asset s the Asset Layer will automatically be made the Active Layer When selecting an Asset direc
93. using the form Works Orders MAI3800 If you view this cancelled works order you will notice it has Cancelled in the description text and will have been marked as completed on today s date This is only there for historical purposes and cannot be used Historical works orders are useful when querying contractor details and monitoring a contractor s performance over previous financial years Only orders that have not been completed can be cancelled Once the works order has been cancelled it will also do the following Release the Works Order Lines i e any defects associated with this works order will return to the pool of defects ready to be picked up on another works order for completion i e the defects status will be set to AVAILABLE Cyclic maintenance activities on the cancelled works order will be released Any figure that has been committed to a budget will be released and returned to the budget Once you have queried back the order to be cancelled press the Cancel Works Order button followed by the save button in the toolbar Version 4 7 205 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 23 Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 3 16 Quality Inspection Results MAI3820
94. work Percent Item Computation Certified Complete Contractor Certified Complete Client Final Price Variation Late Costs Late Cost Certified Revised Cost Agreed By Date Contractor Agreed By Client Figure 112 Additional details Quality Finance 3 5 17 Additional Details Quality Finance This window is displayed when the Additional Details button is selected in the Works Orders Defects window All the fields within this window with the exception of Not Lowest Cost and Percent Item Computation are optional for additional information only and will be included for reference on works order prints Not Lowest Cost Display Only If the Cheapest qualifying Contractor is not selected the reason entered as to why the cheapest Contractor was not selected will be displayed Percent Item Computation Optional List The Product Option Value can be overridden by adding the required value into the Percent Item Computation field in the Program details window This will set the Computation method for any subsequent Percentage Items added to a BOQ for a Works Order line on the current Works Order to the value entered This allows for different Computation methods to be used without the need to edit the Product Option value Select Continue to return to the Works Orders Defects window Version 4 7 119 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas an
95. work order and another set specific for cyclic work orders The attributes are based on scheme type The flexible attributes are set up using the standard asset meta model module by defining a special type of asset record this asset record is then linked to the appropriate scheme type using Application Attributes MAI3819 The Attributes part of the form will display the flexible attributes of the asset metamodel mapped to the scheme type used in the work order Attribute values can be added or modified Version 4 7 192 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ia 5 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE A NEES WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT e Additional Details Planning Suppor Planning Support Quality Finance Continue Planned Actual Stat Earliest Start Completion Latest Completion Duration Risk Assesment Report N Utility Plans IN Method Statement INC Location Plan B Works Programme N Additional Safety N Supporting Documentation Work Restrictions Figure 167 Additional Details Planning Support 3 12 17Additional Details Planning Support This window is displayed when the Additional Details button is selected in the Works Orders window All the fields in this window are optional and are intended
96. work will be carried out Some restrictions will apply based on the values set using Item Code Breakdowns MAI194 Maintenance Manager System Administration Manual they are as follows The options available on the list will be restricted to whether the road selected is DoT or Locally owned The scheme type selected will restrict the work categories available when raising the order The scheme type cannot be changed if works order lines are present on the works order The product option DEFSCHTYPU must be set to Y if the user is allowed to update the default scheme type The scheme type will affect the flexible attributed returned when the Flexible Attributes button is selected The flexible attributes for each scheme type are defined by the System Administrator using Application Attributes MAI3819 Register Optional Checkbox If all the contents of this works order are to be notified to street works this check box will need to be checked Once checked the Register Status field will become populated and the TMA Interface button will become active Any work order lines subsequently added to the work order will have to be ticked manually If unchecked all work order lines that have not had a notice generated will be deselected Register Status Display Only This field will display the current register status of the works order lines Current statuses are e N Nothing to Register One or more works order lines have
97. 0 Road Number a338 Length 4775 Description Ne DUAL CAWAY CHRISTCHURCH BOROUGH BOUNDARY TO A31 TI Maintenance Reports Date Start End Work Done Inspector Chainage Chainage fat Ju 2005 c Lesley Cocker of 4m c 21 JUL 2005 L G Lesley Cocker 0 4775 28 JUN 2005 La Lesley Cocker 0 4775 28 JUN 2005 LC Lesley Cocker 0 4775 23 SEP 2005 KAS Karen Samways 0 4775 im Activities Activity Figure 218 Maintenance Report Version 4 7 269 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc meses 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE E EE CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERS ADMIN 5 6 1 General Information This form allows to insert update delete and review the maintenance work carried out on a section Details of any cyclic maintenance work carried out on a section will automatically be displayed here Maintenance activities can be manually entered if required so your records are up to date without carrying out cyclic activities 5 6 2 Section Details When you enter this form it will be in query mode Enter you selection criteria followed by Execute Query to retrieve the required road section Enter details in one of the following fields Link Id Agency Linkcode Section Road Number Length Description 5 6 3 Maintenanc
98. 1 43 0016400016 02 3ALL 000004 30 MAR 2000 249552 ALL OLO001 33 HOURS 8 00 264 00 413331 23 SQ M 3 40 782 A19999 119 M 183 00 2177 70 420000 8 ITEM 535 46 00 Figure 229 Payment Run Report A Version 4 7 284 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR PF MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 PAYMENTS Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 7 2 4 Payment Run Report B BINTER Blackbum with Darwen Borough Council Date 24 NOV 2000 MAI3840B Payment Run riB Page 1 Admin Unit Blackbum with Darwen Borough Council Contract Id 2000 Extended updated contract for 2000 Contractor DSO Direct Services Department Highways Docket Less Retention VAT Payable Totals 0 0096 00 E ot 32187 51 This Payment 7330 94 0 00 0 00 7380 94 Total To Date 39568 45 Maximum Retention Reached Dockets 1 to 3 Value of Work this Payment 7380 94 Value of Work Contract To Date 39568 45 SISS Sub Totals ALL 7320 94 Overall Total 7380 94 Figure 230 Payment Run Report B Version 4 7 285 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER
99. 1069 53151 Active Layer DEFECTS BY STATUS Attribute Not Set J 7 sub Select Existing Select To Figure 22 Locator 2 3 1 General Information Full information on the use of locator can be found in the Locator and Web Mapping User Guide V4 0 In summary Locator NM0572 provides Exor Users with an easy to use web based spatial interface that allows new Inspection and Defect information to be quickly created as well as existing Defect data to be found and viewed on a map Three options relating to the creation of Defects and their associated Inspection record are available e Create Defect On Assets e Create Defects On Asset at X Y e Create Defects On Network at X Y Once a defect has been created the treatment model can be automatically generated with the option to edit it if required The user is then presented with the option to immediately raise a works order once the defects have been entered Defects can also be searched for using any combination of network location and defect attribute data within the Locator search panel Once a defect or defects have been selected within Locator standard Exor modules or custom built PL SQL procedures can be run as required If the system has been set up to use multiple Admin Units for defect priorities the following additional rules apply e Valid priorites will be based on the list of Defect Priorities defined in the Defect Priorites form MAI3812 for the Activity and where
100. 12 Locn bar Date Instructed 22 AUG 2000 Due Date 22 AUG 2000 Days to Due 1400 Work Order No DEMO 33 Work Sheet No Total Cost 114 10 Labour Units Work Status INSTRUCTED Defect Id 36 Road Section DEMOA271_ 05 TEST SECTION FOR INSPECTION LO XOSP 1 StChain 12 Locn bar Date Instructed 22 AUG 2000 Due Date 22 AUG 2000 Days to Due 14 00 WorkOrder No DEMO 33 Work Sheet No Total Cost 91 28 Labour Units Work Status INSTRUCTED Defect Id 39 Road Section DEMOA271 05 TEST SECTION FOR INSPECTION LO XSP W StChain 56 Locn bar Date Instructed 22 AUG 2000 Due Date 22 AUG 2000 Days to Due 14 00 Work Order No DEMO 33 Work Sheet No Total Cost 136 92 Labour Units Work Status INSTRUCTED Defect Id Al Road Section DEMOA271_ 05 TEST SECTION FOR INSPECTION LO XSP 1 StChain 23 Locn bar Date Instructed 22 AUG 2000 Due Date 22 AUG 2000 Days to Due 1400 Work Order No DEMO 33 Work Sheet No Total Cost 342 30 Labour Units Work Status INSTRUCTED Defect Id 42 Road Section DEMOA271_ 05 TEST SECTION FOR INSPECTION LO XP 1 StChain 23 Locn bar Date Instructed 22 A UG 2000 Due Date 22 AUG 2000 Days to Due 1400 WorkOrderNo DEMO 33 Work Sheet No Total Cost 342 30 Labour Units Work Status INSTRUCTED Defect Id 43 Road Section DEMOA271_ 05 TEST SECTION FOR INSPECTION LO XSP 3 StChain 12 Locn bar Date Instructed 22 AUG 2000 Due Date 23 AUG 2000 Days to Due 13 00 Work Order No DEMO 33 Work Sheet No Total Cost 2282
101. 15 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc 5 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustelaing Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT AN The contractor selected is outside the bounds set Do you wish to continue Figure 108 Outside limit To select the Contractor and override the warning press OK otherwise press Cancel to select an alternative Contractor If the Contractor selected is not the cheapest Contractor a window will appear requesting a reason as to why the cheapest Contractor was not selected Enter the reason and press OK to continue with the selection Reason for not choosing cheapest contract Iof x Cheapest Contractor not available OK Figure 109 Reason This will be displayed in the Additional Details Window Version 4 7 116 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc pon Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 5 14 Work Order Flexible Attributes W Maintain Flexible Attributes MAI3821 ISKINNER wolvesev GBEXOR920 MAI v4 2 1 0 Works Order
102. 163 3 11 11 Standard Item Totals 200 0 ccc eeccceeseecsseceenaeceeeeeceeeesaecseaeeceeeeeesaeeseaaeceeaeeseeeeeaeeeeaeeenaes 164 3 12 Works Order Cyclic MAIS 800 a iccse eia 165 321 General Information scettr rere eee eet ee saseesdened ERE o vases RERE REE 166 3 122 Work Order ssrin 166 2 12 3 xSchedule s oerte eeiam EE iu EEA EEE 175 3 12 4 Select Schedules Button ettet reete teen een eterne nana aede tha annee ne eate gna Reed 179 3 12 5 BOQ tems ore teta tei ese pat eem ieu pede Rea bue eae bees hows ost Dee SERERE n tees 180 3 12 6 Percentage Uplifting of the value of an individual work order line 182 3 12 7 Adding Individual Percentage Items to a BOQ Item eee 182 3 12 8 Computation Method 5 nt ertet teretes e E deh ota e PT Pla e DR SERRE 183 3 12 9 Adding a Percentage BOQ Item esses eren nennen nennen 184 3 12 10 Adding Non Contract Items to a Works Order esee 184 3 12 11 Contracts and Rates mesi ae or ere e ae ree eee e RUE enu S 185 3 12 12 Works Order AUI sans etienne tette su eee e ete eee nena reete dee e Vrbe n antea neveu tan 186 3 12 13 BOQ Details A 188 3 12 14 standard Item Totals nte et o es ge RES UNR ESE EEEE E ENEE EE EE ERR AUS 189 3 12 15 Contractor lotals 2 oe eerte I eH ede Re eser PER Pee EUER TIRE eh Ron e eno ee
103. 2006 00 00 MA 6300 00 T XCH 770637 VINNEYS CLOSE REs 7 915 E LF 26 SEP 2006 00 00 MA 8920 00 l XCH 770538 MOORCROFT AVENUE 7 915 E LF 26 SEP 2006 00 00 MA 12500 00 XCH 770638 INVERAVON RESURF 7 815 E LF 26 SEP 2006 00 00 4110 00 XCH 770640 MORLEY CLOSE RE 7 915 E LF 26 SEP 2006 00 00 2020 00 Authorise Prnt yx Figure 132 Work Order Authorisation 3 8 1 General Information This form is used to authorise previously raised Works Orders Only those Works Orders with a total cost within the Authorisation limits set for the current User in Users HIG1832 will be displayed If the User has no limits set they may authorise any value of Works Order If the current User has also raised the Works Orders i e is the Originator Product Option AUTH_OWN must be set to Y in order for the same person to both Raise and Authorise a Works Order To view the details of a Works Order press the Expand button on the menu toolbar 3 8 2 Works Order Authorisation When you enter this form no Works Order details will be displayed Press the Execute Query button to retrieve the Works Orders to be authorised Note Only those Works Orders with a total cost within the Authorisation limits set for the current User in Users HIG1832 will be displayed To select ALL of the Works Orders displayed press the Check All Y button A tick will be displayed in the check box
104. 276 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR P MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERING REPORTS Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 6 3 Cyclic Maintenance Done MAI5032 Purpose This report provides a summary of all Cyclical Maintenance work carried out on the selected Road Section The following information is displayed Linkcode Section Number Report Number Date Work Done Starrt Chainage End Chainage Activity Area Activity Description 6 3 1 Selection Parameters Admin Unit Required Default List Select an administrational unit to be used for this report The default is the Admin Unit assigned to the current User Road Id Required List Gaz If required enter the Road Group Id from which to select defects from If this field is left blank all Road Group Types will be reported on Start Chainage Optional Enter the chainage from which to start reporting from Only cyclic maintenance work carried out after this chainage position will be included in the report End Chainage Optional Enter the chainage from which to stop reporting from Only cyclic maintenance work carried out before this chainage position will be included in the report Version 4 7 277 CONFI
105. 3 0 427 Metres D JCT PROSPECT ROAD TO LIVE NETWORK L 0 733 72164Metres 1 Figure 25 Highlight Network e To create the Defect on the selected Network press the OK button e To cancel the entire Defect Creation process press the Cancel button If the position at which the User clicks to create the Defect on the Network is outside the tolerance set an error message will be displayed Acknowledge the message by pressing the OK button and re select the Create Defects on network at X Y option if the Defect is still required o No network found within Tolerance Network Location is mandatory for this feature type Aborting feature creation now Figure 26 Message When the correct position for the Defect on the Network has been selected the Confirm Network Selection window will be displayed If the incorrect Section has been selected press Cancel otherwise press Next gt to continue with the defect creation process Version 4 7 29 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE MANAGING INSPECTIONS 23 Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure I Confirm Network Selection Type m LOCAL Section Unique 1200D11908 00105 Admin Unit Ps1 Parish Maintenance South 1 Descri
106. 3 9 2 Work Order Lite ss sccsvseccesccsas eter titolo tere verse Peer E Len Une doa senate EEE NAE dev ed ode gras 148 3 9 3 Adding Other Work to an Order sees eene nennen 149 3 9 4 Completing Defects when Carrying out Other Work serere 149 EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 23 Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure TABLE OF CONTENTS 3 10 Non Highways Related WOrks eiieec etre ee tor eet ett nin n e ciao ee eno eon 150 3 10 1 Creating Dummy Sections eterne erben rne tetra ciere re ee iiis 150 3 11 Works Orders Contractor Interface MAI3802 sseseeeeseeeeeeeeeneneee eene 151 3 11 1 General Information cece ceecceceecceeneceeseeceeeeecaeeeeaaecseaeeceeeeesaecseaaeceneeeaeeseaaeeeeaeeee 151 3 112 Work Orders eene ree ree ee eere Y SERI RC RRTE YR Ue UR et Se ede Ne EET Re ede usn RR Exe 152 3411 3 Work Order Lines oe eet oett eee dna roe she ia E ee eo e e EE eaenessned CERE NR 154 SIE BOQ iron cR 157 3 11 5 Completing Works Order terere retento teinte Peng eerte Lesen 158 3416 BOQ Details iiss ice e ree R cides ETHER Le EE Erb LE Feste Up era EE te seo R iE 159 CUN AM c Lc TE 160 3 11 8 Works Order Details 200 0 cecceesceceeeceeseceeaeeceeceeseaeeeeaaecseaeeceeeessaeceeaaeceeneecsaeeeeaaeceeneeees 161 3 11 9 Plexi ble Attributes eei rene tente aa cance aaa aS E ASEE 162 3 11 10 Pr srammie Details i ed ide Rr pee e Pese ve REM Eee EUER E
107. 5 5 2 View Cyclic Maintenance Work Upon entering this window the system will automatically query back a schedule to retrieve the required schedule press Enter Query enter the required selection criteria followed by Execute Query to retrieve the required schedule All fields in this window are queryable and will be display only when the query has been executed Select the BOQ Items button to display the BOQ Items window Effe tems Schedule 2108 FEL Item Code Description Dim 1 Dim2 Dim3 Quantity Unit Rate Cost Figure 215 BOQ Items 5 5 3 BOQ Items This window contains details of the standard job items which make up the current schedule including dimensions rates and costs All fields are display only and cannot be updated To update the schedule you should use Cyclic Maintenance Schedules MAI3860 To view additional information for a selected job item press the Expand button in the toolbar and the following window will be displayed Version 4 7 267 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERS ADMIN 23 Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 100 SQ M 0 00 99999999 99 Dimension 1 Dimension 2 Dimension 3 ka BOQ Details Item Code Item
108. 5 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Mies tara on WORKS ORDERING REPORTS 4 9 Work Order Strip Plan MAI5130 Purpose This report produces a strip plan report showing a summary of the defects on the Selected Work Order in their Cross Sectional Positions The following information is displayed Link and Section Number Road Class Defect Chainage Defect XSP displayed in strip plan format Defect Description Attribute Value Defect Location Treatment Description A Cross Sectional Position Key is also provided 4 9 1 Selection Parameters Works Order No Required Enter the Works Order Number to be reported on 4 9 2 Works Order Strip Plan MAI5130 LIVE2108 NORTH PENNINE LINK GROUP Date 21 DEC 1999 MAISI30 Print Works Orders Strip Plan Page 2 Sesion 2900A69 1 10 Class AP Change 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 39 0 Oth Defect Description Attribute Location Treatment Description 19 3 pothole 3 2 50 8630 JUNCTION RENEW 4 BEAMS STRAIGHTEN POSTS End of Section 2900A69 1 10 Section 2900A69 1 24 Class AP Chamagg 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Oth Defect Description Attribute Location Treatment Dessription I5 3 TOWNFOOT JUNCTION RENEW I BOLLARD SHELL EndofSection 2900A69 1 24 Figure 192 Version 4 7 230 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written con
109. 5 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Defect Id Treatment Status Work Category f Type Priority Sheet Completed Date Remarks Road ld Descr Location Schedule Labour Units Est Cost Act Cost 1200430 Wwi00207 377905 ri INTERIM 0601 12 BABYLON HILL R A NEAR YEOVIL POTH fi DOWN T ROAD o M 197 54 Target Date 12 AUG 2011 10 00 BOQ Items Item Code Description Dim 1 Dim2 Dim3 Quantity Unit Rate Cost zx BOQ Uplift Item DCC 3 RWH TOTAL SCHEME gt 34 000 01 BAKA WOL Uplift Item DCC 2 RWH TOTAL SCHEME 1 400 01 34 000 00 Add Item Figure 141 BOQ Items 3 11 4 BOQ Items This window is displayed when the BOQ Items button is pressed in the Work Order Lines window The BOQ items cannot be changed to reflect the actual values until the status of the line has been updated to COMPLETED and the completed date added or in the case of an Interim Payment the status code is changed to VALUATION For information on making an Interim Payment on a Works Order Line refer to the section Completing a Works Order Line with an Interim Payment above Should you want to add further items press the Create Record button in the toolbar This will enable you to add a new item Note 1 To avoid problems the Save button should be used when each BOQ item has been added 2 Once the work order has been instructed if the wrong BOQ has been ente
110. 7 Normal Computation Method Figure 157 shows a Bill of Quantities where an Item Code 29 01 001 has a cost of 100 00 A percentage Item has been associated with it because the bituminous material being used for the repair is of a special grade The Percentage Item selected has a rate of 10 thus the total cost of the repair will be increased by 10 00 to 110 00 If this work was to be carried out on a weekend and weekend work attracted a surcharge of 10 on the total cost of a repair a 2nd percentage item could be associated with the BOQ item to allow for this If the weekend surcharge only applied to the cost of the initial Item Code i e 900 the extra cost for weekend work would an extra 90 and the computation method used to calculate this would be NORMAL If however the weekend surcharge applies to the Initial Item Code and any other Percentage Items associated with BOQ Item the computation method used should be set to CUMULATIVE Figure 126 shows the same BOQ item with Product Option CUM PERC set to CUMULATIVE Version 4 7 183 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 B en le U Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT fg BOE Items Defect 450125 Item Code Description
111. 9 Locator Note When the system has been unable to generate a default shape for the Work Order Line for example the WOL is for a Group Of Groups the Get From Map button will still work but will not zoom when initially called It is up to the User to locate the area in which the work is to be carried out and then use Send Multiple Points to application from the Feature Edit Menu button to create a shape for the Work Order Line Version 4 7 85 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 23 Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 3 5 Works Orders Defects MAI3800 Maintenance Manager G Inventory Z3 Inspections Works Works Orders Cyclic Figure 90 Works Orders Defects Menu Option mm Orders Defects MAI3800 DORSET auth44te WARTESTORDBUS MAI v4 4 0 0 MAX Work Order DEFAULT 42 Auto Work Order For Defect 409344 created on 10 MAY 2011 Interim Payment Priority Road Type Tors Road Id ALL_SECTIONS J Scheme Type LR Register Register Status Ej e Status DRAFT Contract DEFAULT Dummy CONTRACT FOR INITIAL ESTIMATES Contractor DUMMY DUMMY CONTRACTOR Contact Contractor Score Originator SYS SYSTEM ADMINISTRAT
112. AI3848 Cost Centre Optional List These codes are maintained using Cost Centre Codes MAI3844 Maintenance Manager Administration Manual Job Number Required Default List If required enter the job number for this works order This field defaults to 00000 Remarks Optional Edit If required enter any additional remarks relating to the completed works order This can only be entered when the works order is complete Date Raised Required Default Enter the date upon which the works order was raised This field defaults to the current date An earlier date may be entered for retrospective works orders Target Complete Optional This is the target date for all the works contained within the work order This may be automatically populated based on the Date Raised and the Work Order Priority If the product option UPDWOTGT has been set to Y the user may update this date manually Date Authorised Optional This is populated with the system date time when the Works Order is Authorised via e The Works Order form MAI3800 Authorise or Instruct button e The Work Orders Authorisation form MAI3848 e The Works Order Work Tray When this field is populated following the selection of the Authorise button a pop up window will be displayed allowing the user to enter a date before the sysdate enabling the authorisation of a retrospective work order When this field is populated following the selection
113. ANAGER USER GUIDE A Be ntle y MANAGING INSPECTIONS Description Balance Cost Code LOCAL ACCIDENT A TER CARE sc 0 LOCAL ACCIDENT A TER CARE sc 500 270602314 LOCAL ACCIDENT AFTER CARE sc 1000 270302314 LOCAL ACCIDENT A gt TER CARE Sc 500 260502314 LOCAL ACCIDENT AFTER CARE Si 290602314 LOCAL ACCIDENT A TER CARE 290302314 LOCAL ACCIDENT A TER CARE Sc 2309 30 954 47 270302314 LOCAL ACCIDENT A TER CARE 3 300 35 628 8 270402314 Figure 34 Budgets Once a Budget has been selected the Number of Defects added to the Work Order will be displayed in a pop up dialogue Press Finish to create the Work Order se Works Order GIS DORSET nm4beta2 GBEXOR730 MAI v4 0 Scheme Type Wivefects Selected Contract 7 900 XI 1 of 1 defects selected Work Order XCH 770 Cancel Figure 35 Raise Work Order When the Finish button is pressed the Work Order Defects MAI3800 module will be called and the Work Order will be displayed The Map window will be automatically refreshed and the newly created Defects will be displayed Version 4 7 38 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE MANAGING INSPECTIONS k Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure faaJ
114. Areas Swathe Cut Areas b RPED Ri sk to pedestrians Areas Treat Vegetatit GA Grassed Areas b RPED Ri sk to pedestrians 4 Grassed areas Urban cut ec Hw Drain Gullies Catchpits b BLOK B ockage 4 Gulies Catchpits Empty ec Hw Drain Gullies Catchpits D sit Sitea 64 Guliies Catchpits Empty cP Hw Drain Grips b BLOK B ockage s Grips Recut ej Figure 220 Valid for Maintenance Rules 5 7 1 General Information This form allows you set up the rules that define when a cyclic maintenance activity will clear a defect that was loaded as a result of a regular or ad hoc inspection For example an inspection activity of GA Grassed Areas could result in a defect of type IWED Injurious Weed this in turn would be cleared when the cyclic maintenance activity 69 Grassed Areas Treat Vegetation is carried out on the sections A standard set of rules are supplied with the system these can be added to if required 5 7 20 Valid for Maintenance Rules Inspection Activity Required List Enter an inspection activity These activities are set up using Activities MAI1200 A D or S will be displayed in the adjacent field indicating whether the activity is used in detailed or safety inspections Defect Types Required List Enter a defect type These defects are set up using Defect Control Data MAI1300 Maintenance Activity Required List Enter a maintenance activity These acti
115. By Display Only This field is populated in one of a number of ways 1 A user with the appropriate permission selects the Authorise button A user with the appropriate permission selects the Instruct button this will authorise the work order as well as instructing it 3 Using Authorise Works Orders MAI3848 4 Using the work order Authorisation Worktray Product Option AUTH OWN must be set to Y in order for the same person to both Raise and Authorise a Works Order To Authorise a Works Order its total estimated cost must be within the range defined for the User in Users HIG1832 If the User has no limits set they may authorise any value of Works Order This field will be null on old work orders as the Authoriser was not recorded then Cost Centre Optional List These codes are maintained using Cost Centre Codes Job Number Required Default List If required enter the job number for this works order This field defaults to 00000 Remarks Optional Edit If required enter any additional remarks relating to the completed works order This can only be entered when the works order is complete Date Raised Required Default Enter the date upon which the works order was raised This field defaults to the current date An earlier date may be entered for retrospective works orders Target Complete Optional This is the overall target date for all the works contained within the work order This
116. Copy Works Order pop up Continue will create new copy of the Work Order or Work Order Line Cancel will return the user to the Work Order details with no changes made A work order line can only be copied if it a small scheme order 3 9 3 Adding Other Work to an Order The following procedure is used to add other work to a works order without the need to select defects this facility allows the user to create a works order for any other work that needs to be carried out Double click the mouse in the Road Id field this will display the gazetteer containing the road group selected in the Works Orders window Only sections contained in this road group can be selected for inclusion on the works order 1 Drill Down through the gazetteer and select the required road section 2 Using the list of values enter the Work Category Note that the current Budgetary position of the Work Category can be seen be double Clicking this field 3 Enter any Remarks required Select the BOQ Items button and add the required schedule items From this point on raising updating and completing an order for other work is the same as Works Orders Defects This includes full explanations of the fields in the remaining windows 3 9 4 Completing Defects when Carrying out Other Work If due to the nature of the work carried out the work on order has the effect of completing a number of defects that have been found as a result of inspections these defects will
117. Cyclic Maintenance Work MAI3804 Maintenance Manager amp Inventory c3 Inspections Works Works Orders Creation Interface Works Orders Cyclic Maintain Work Orders Contractor Interface Gang Crew Allocation Work Orders Authorisation View Cyclic Maintenance Cyclic Maintenance Schedules Figure 213 View Cyclic Maintenance Work Menu Option IA View Cyclic Maintenance Work DORSET nm4beta2 GBEXOR730 MAI v4 0 Description Schedule 2108 DMN Principal Rds Urban Grass Cutting Actual Cost Est Cost 13845 76 Road Type Road Id Road Desc Status HIER DMN P NORTH DISTRICT PRINCIPAL ROADS BUDGET INSTRUCTED SISS ALL All Standard Items Work Order coE T70015 Work Sheet Payment Id Check Batch Check Result BOQ Items Figure 214 View Cyclic Work 5 5 1 General Information This form allows you to view the job items quantities costs etc for a specified cyclic maintenance schedule Date Due Date Instructed Target Complete Date Completed Date Paid Check Date 01 OCT 2006 19 MAY 2006 Version 4 7 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc 266 EXOR w2 MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE E CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERS ADMIN Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure
118. D 1 F Inspection 1130697 Detailed DUM S YS 101089 Asset 1410933 GY Gully Work Order Line 475465 DRAFT 18596 BRAEMAR ROAD JCT BUCKINGHAN Document 256093 PHOT 255093 pothole jpg IMAGES 02 Nov 2010 Budget 060111 Budget 597000 Committed 12748 93 Actual 5551 53 E A Notice DCO091403 Minor Waiting to send BRAEMAR ROAD o s No 1 Repair Permanent MCA Ok Defect 361799 SELECTED MC POTH 2 2 o s No 1 pothole in Cay H Inspection 1130873 Detailed DUM S YS 101217 Enquiry 256110 WA COMP FRML CD pothole caused damage to c qme ett Fm i foh e PN rmt PST dm te Tren ue Pss rash S te ven pete tm Ahn AS tasses aotem Mele sh a mtn ite E Figure 152 Navigator Notice Summary This button is enabled if the TMA product is licensed and one or more notices have been sent for the work order The Work Order TMA Interface TMA3990 will be called and opened at the Work Order Lines tab TMA Interface This button is enabled if the TMA product is licensed and one or more work order lines are ticked as Registerable The Work Order TMA Interface TMA3990 will be called and opened at the TMA Noticing tab TMA Register This button is enabled if the TMA product is licensed and one or more notices have been sent for the work order The Works TMA1000 will be called which will display the TMA Works that have been created for the work order SWM Register The SWM
119. DAILY 61 23 MAY 2006 LANCSTEST 21 150 00 0 00 0 00 150 00 23 Figure 233 Query Payment Run Details 7 3 1 General Information This form allows you to view the details of past payment runs Version 4 7 287 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ince Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE e Sustaining Infrastructure PAYMENTS 7 3 2 Payment Run Details This window displays details of all previous payment runs To restrict the display to a selected run or runs press Enter Query enter some criteria to determine the payment runs you want to see followed by Execute Query The window is arranged in the form of an arithmetic expression allowing you to see how the payment amount was arrived at The fields used in this expression are Total Value Retentions VAT Total Payment Amount Contract Display Only Displays the unique ID of the contract for which this payment was run Payment Id Display Only Displays the unique system generated ID of the payment run Run Date Display Only Displays the date upon which the payment run took place Username Display only Displays the name of the user who requested the payment run Note that the payment run is requested through Payment Run
120. DENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc Sone 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERING REPORTS 6 4 Cyclic Maintenance Schedules MAI3960 Purpose This report displays the selected Cyclic Maintenance Schedule 6 4 1 Selection Parameters Admin Unit Required Default List Select an administrational unit to be used for this report The default is the Admin Unit assigned to the current User Road Id Optional List Gaz If required enter the Road Id from which to select Cyclic Maintenance from If this field is left blank all Road Group Types will be reported on Schedule Id Optional List Enter the Cyclic Maintenance Schedule Id to be reported on 6 4 2 Cyclic Maintenance Schedules MAI3960 LIVE 108 LIVE2198 NORTH PENNINE LINK GROUP MAD Past Cu Maintenance Schedules ShedcM Degg hed Lax Ou Cakuatiom sms A ALL STANDARD ITEMS bw WI Trequescy Per Your Works Order Ne 177 Dat inmanate Uit Comet Road Grove Ioas 1 10 URKEENHEAD DUALINO EASTHOUND FROM o0 Deergton Vno Ca Quarto Aci Quat Lam Updated UNDERTAKE REPAIR ITEM so 066 3HATL 008 Koad Mj 2900499 04 CTY GNDKY TIMON IDC TO C 94 KEAYGARTH len Cox Dente Uni Cals Quo Ade Qnty Len lode I LND
121. DER MANAGEMENT I Copy works Order m Copy Estimated Quantities F Continue Cancel Figure 98 Copy Works Order Line popup Continue will create new copy of the Work Order or Work Order Line Cancel will return the user to the Work Order details with no changes made A work order line can only be copied if it a small scheme order Summary Opens the Defects summary window and displays a summary for each of the works order lines on the currently selected Works Order To view a defect clearance works order line in detail select the desired line and press the Expand button on the form this will display the defect details using Defects MAI3806 In addition full information for the work order line can be viewed by selecting the Navigator button Figure 94 Version 4 7 102 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR P MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE f WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 3 5 4 Selection Criteria ie Selection Criteria Work Category Road Id 1 4 Asset Type Asset ref Id Asset Query Defect Priorities 1 2 3 4 5 6 Dereci types i 2 3 sf of Wexmeniypesi 2 3 at S ww sss cosd 2 3 al sf of Defec
122. DIT ALL to N If this option is set to N only the initial and final values of a field are recorded in the Audit trail per session per User and any intermediate changes are not be logged If Product Option AUDIT ALL is set to Y then all interim changes between saving changes to the selected fields are logged It should be noted that for some Works Orders the audit trail could be very large if this option is set to Y 3 12 2 Work Order When you enter this window the cursor sits in the Work Order description field waiting for you to enter a new works order If you wish to retrieve an existing works order press Enter Query enter your selection criteria then press Execute Query to retrieve the works order Whilst in this window you can view the Work Order Audit details by pressing the Expand button in the toolbar at any time Work Order Required List The method of works order number generation is set up in Product Options HIG9130 setting the WORREFGEN option There are three methods of generating the works order number 1 Manually entered by the user the system will check the number is unique 2 Contract Based the contract name will prefix a unique number 3 Admin unit based the admin unit number for the selected contract will prefix a unique number A list of existing works orders is only available in query mode When creating new Works Orders enter a description of the order in the adjacent field
123. Default Section Intervals Valid For Maintenance Rules Related Maintenance Activities Figure 219 Valid for Maintenance Rules Menu Option Version 4 7 271 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR PF MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Ss CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERS ADMIN Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure Valid For Maintenance Rules nm4beta2 GBE gt Inspection Activity Detailed Safety Defect Types Maintenance Activity Hw Drain Ditches D DRUB Deposited rubbish B6 Dies Cem EN Drain Ditches qu Flooding M Clean Di Hw Drain Ditches D oBsr Obstruction 6 Ditches Clean Di Hw Drain Ditches sir Sitea 6 Ditches Clean Di Hw Drain Ditches D WEED Weed growth 6 Ditches Clean FC Footways And Cycle Tracks b OVGV Overgrown by vegetation 71 Cleansing Apply Herbicide GA Grassed Areas b IVIS Inadequate visibility m Areas Visibility Cut GA Grassed Areas b IWED Injurious weed Grassed Areas Treat Vegetatic GA Grassed Areas b OVER overhanging overgrown Areas Visibility Cut GA Grassed Areas b OVER overhanging overgrown S Grassed Areas Swathe Cut F Kaa Areas b OVER overhanging overarown P Buen areas Urban cut A Grassed Areas b RPED Risk to pedestrians Grassed
124. Dim 1 Dim2 Dim3 Quantity Unit Rate Cost Add 220063 MCD Patch exist sufweg ma 200 Lys 29 0101 fma Mobile lane close adj verg 10 00 10 00 HOUR 10 00 100 00 pccisei F gt RWH Total scheme 0 00 1 4 1 0 1 00 PERCENT 10 00 10 00 pcr f gt RWH Total scheme 0 00 1 4 1 oo 1 00 PERCENT 10 00 11 00 C me ll a a in dL n am Je SES c m pr Figure 158 Cumulative Computation Method The initial Percentage Item has been calculated as a percentage of the cost of the BOQ item 29 01 001 i e 1096 of 100 00 equaling 10 The 2nd Percentage Item for Weekend Work has been calculated as a percentage of the sum of the initial BOQ Item 29 01 001 the initial Percentage Item i e 10 of 100 10 giving a total cost of 121 00 3 12 9 Adding a Percentage BOQ Item To add a Percentage Item to a Bill Of Quantities the Percentage Item must have added to the currently selected Contract If a different Contract is subsequently selected the Works Order can not be Instructed unless the Percentage Item has also been added to the newly selected Contract To add a Percentage Item do the following 1 Navigate to the BOQ Items window by clicking on the BOQ Items button on the Works Order Lines window 2 Select the BOQ Item to which the Percentage Item is to be added Note This item must have the Allow Percentage Item
125. E EE EEE R 126 3 6 3 Work Order Lines Tab ide nente eee THE IS niea ERE Ee IRL RE M ees Rede RES 130 3 7 Send Notice to Register TMA1800 sseseeeeeseeseeseeeee nennen 131 3 7 1 General Information ccccceccceceseceeseceeeneceeceeceaeeecaaeceeaeeceeneeesaeceeaaeceeneeceaeeeeaeceeaaeseenees 131 3 7 2 Upper Sectiofi Lh ater e ae Goes er rus Hie peu ee eate Eg eee ETE Ree E ape Eee 131 3 7 3 Work Details tab m 133 3 7 4 Contaci taD MEE 136 3 7 5 Co ordmates tab et iia aeaea ae E aai ENEA SENSE AAEE 137 3 7 6 Permit Conditions tab iii rte tre nire tea suas ions Ra ERR EER RRR ESE 138 3 7 7 Work Order Lines tab eee dieere re exe eee re eta een eere reed hber na a ete cue NEon 139 3 7 8 onodvjrid cq 140 3 7 9 lapidi E 141 3 7 10 Send to Register DUON s src esirinnas ipai a 142 3 8 Works Order Authorisation MAI3848 ecccecccecsseceenseceeneeceeeeeaeceeaaeceeaeeceaeeesaeceeaaeseeneeees 143 3 8 1 General Information oerte cuetsesciieedandersl edecvonesticevesancectebeesdersdeasacatesaucecevarees 144 3 8 2 Works Order Authorisation ceccecssccesseceeececeeeessaeceeaeeceeeeecaeceeaaecseneeceeeeeaeeneaaeceenees 144 3 8 3 Works Order Authorisation Worktray sese eene 144 3 9 Other Works MALTBSUO nnii tette Leere Ee Eee R HE e ea E Eee pae ee Eee Ree BE epe DET EOE De 146 3 9 1 General Informati n ES 146
126. ELECTED MC POTH 2 2 o s No 1 pothole in Cay H Inspection 1130873 Detailed DUM S YS 101217 Enquiry 256110 WA COMP FRML CD pothole caused damage to c qme ett Mm diues eI BMA Depart PT rere Tt ue Pss rash ei Mahadhi petet eanna a a p S Figure 94 Navigator window Notice Summary This button is enabled if the TMA product is licensed and one or more notices have been sent for the work order The Work Order TMA Interface TMA3990 will be called and opened at the Work Order Lines tab TMA Interface This button is enabled if the TMA product is licensed and one or more work order lines are ticked as Registerable The Work Order TMA Interface TMA3990 will be called and opened at the TMA Noticing tab TMA Register This button is enabled if the TMA product is licensed and one or more notices have been sent for the work order The Works TMA1000 will be called which will display the TMA Works that have been created for the work order SWM Register The SWM works entries in the street works register can be viewed using this button Figure 130 Copy This will copy the entire work order including all work order lines and associated BOQ items the following pop up window will be displayed allowing the user to copy the BOQ items and their associated estimated quantities or copy the BOQ items only without the estimated quantities Version 4 7 94 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The conte
127. ENT Start Date Required Enter the date the external activity is due to start Signed Off Date Optional Enter the date the activity has been completed or signed off Version 4 7 212 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc acu Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE e Sustaining Infrastructure WORKS ORDERING REPORTS 4 Works Ordering Reports This chapter provides examples and the required selection criteria for the Works Ordering and associated Reports The reports illustrated in this chapter are Work Order Unpriced MAI3485 Work Order Priced MAI3480 BOQ Work Order Defects MAI3800 Work Orders Detail MAI3500 Work Orders Summary MAI3505 Work Orders NMA Format MAI3909 Work Orders Enhanced Format MAI3919 Work Orders Strip Plan MAI5130 Review Raised Work Orders MAI3490 Defects Not Yet Instructed MAI3922 Summary of Defects Not Yet Instructed MAI3920 Instructed Work by Status MAI3924 Instructed Defects due for Completion MAI3926 Inventory Updates MAI3930 Work for Quality Inspection MAI3950 Quality Inspection Performance MAI3952 Admin Unit Performance MAI3956 4 1 Running Reports The majority of reports within highways by exor are accessed using a standard windo
128. ENT Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure Promoter IEEE amp DORSET COUNTY COUNCIL Street HARBOUR ROUNDABOUT X usRN 44000124 n District 001 xk DORSET COUNTY COUNCIL Authority DORSET Street Closed Works Ret DC0011267 Phases 1 Town WEYMOUTH m B Ext Ref D002 2345 Locality Nese Actual Works Ref Postcode Pene Send Notice lw Planned Work About To Start HRSWA Phase 1 of 1 Active PheseDeteis OlherPhaseDelais Permi History Se Ste Summary Coodndion Works Cat Major JE Phase Type Asset activity and reinstatement if necesse B X Promoter Contact PS Works Desc fone W Address isj Location Desc desc Start Date Duration End Date Estimated 03 MAR 2010 a 14 Days Working 22 MAR 2010 EU Latest X paes Is Challenge iI sj T Contractor Contact EJ Actual ai i Address Time Agreed S74 End Date T CWay Restrict None signing only 3 ignore Challenge Charge Category VVorks for road purposes on behalf of a Hways Auth j Iv Working Hours Str Reinst Type 7 Footway Closure Postcode mm Tel No 1 Excav Method Traffic Order Applies Cancel Status Parking Suspensions Special Designation s Est Insp Units 1 Act Insp Units I Works Restricted A A Project Ret E xliv Description 574 Daily Charge 000 Figure 130 TMA
129. ER CARE 290302314 ACCIDENT A TER CARE Sc 2309 30 954 47 270302314 ACCIDENT A TER CARE 3 300 35 628 8 270402314 Figure 61 Budgets Once a Budget has been selected the Number of Defects added to the Work Order will be displayed in a pop up dialogue Press Finish to create the Work Order Riise Works Order GIS DORSET nm4beta2 GBEXOR730 MAI v4 0 Scheme Type Wivefects Selected 1 of 1 defects selected Cancel Work Order XCH 770 Cancel Figure 62 Raise Work Order When the Finish button is pressed the Work Order Defects MAI3800 module will be called and the Work Order will be displayed Version 4 7 58 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc e 5 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS 2 10 View Defects MAI3810 Maintenance Manager Z3 Inventory Inspections Inspections by Group Inspections Defects View Defects View Defect History Figure 63 View Defects Menu Option View Defects mA13810 Road Type Date From Road Id Date To Road Desc Defect Status Priority Notify Activity SISS Recharge Road Sections Road Section Road Section Name es Select Defects Figure 64 View Defects 2 10 1 Gene
130. GING INSPECTIONS Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 2 11 Match Duplicate Defects MAI2730 E Maintenance Manager i Inventory Inspections Inspections Inspections by Group Defects View Defects Responses to Notices Match Duplicate Defects Unmatch Duplicate Defects Figure 66 Match Duplicate Defects Menu Option ie Match Duplicate Defects Link d 1200833905 Agency 1200 Linkcode B33908 Section 00520 Road Numer Length 2965 Description JCT C79 AFFPUDDLE TO JCT C80 WADDOCK CROSS Defect to be Superseded Defect Serial 450247 Length XSP m Inspection Date 11 MAR 2009 Defect Priority a4 Start Chain 189 Act Area Me Date Due 11 MAR 2009 Defect Type BFRT Desc Status AVAILABLE Superseding Defect Defect Serial 447081 Length XSP nm Inspection Date pm Defect Priority pa Start Chain 190 ActArea MC Date Due 10 FEB 2009 Defect Type BFRT Desc Status INSTRUCTED Supersede Figure 67 Match Duplicate Defects 2 11 1 General Information This form is used to identify defects that have been entered into highways by exor at the same location more than once This can occur as a result of two separate inspections being carried out on the same section of road identifying the same defect at different times Defects that have also been matched automatically following an inspection using a DCD by virtue of the values set in the form Defect Superseding Rules MAI4406 can also be viewed using this modul
131. GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS 2 12 2 Section Details When you enter this window the cursor sits in the Link ID field waiting for you to enter your selection criteria followed by Execute Query to retrieve details of the required section The following fields can be used with wildcards to query back existing section details Link ID Agency Linkcode Section Road Number Length Description When a road section has been retrieved all defects that have been superseded will be retrieved with their superseding defect select the Unmatch button to unmatch the selected defects Version 4 7 66 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc pies 34 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS 2 13 Delete Inspections MAI2470 SE Maintenance Manager ay Inventory A Inspections Inspections Inspections by Group Defects View Defects Responses to Notices Match Duplicate Defects Unmatch Duplicate Defects Delete Inspections Batch Setting of Repair Dates r Reports Figure 70 Delete Inspections Menu Option IBI Delete Inspections AX Inspection Id 1211695 Insp Batch Date Inspected D5 JAN 2009 Inspector lis JOHN STADDON Date Loaded 2nd Inspector
132. I3862 a work order line will be displayed for each asset If you want to remove a section from the works order position the cursor on the appropriate line and press Delete Record in the toolbar Pressing the Expand button whilst on a works order line will display View Cyclic Maintenance Work Once a Works Order has been instructed Works Order lines may not be added to the Works Order unless Product Option ADDINSTR is set to Y Once a Works Order has been printed using Print BOQ Work Order MAI3906 further Works Order lines may not be added to the Works Order unless Product Option ADDPRINT is set to Y Identifier Display Only Displays the road part section ID where this work is located Version 4 7 175 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 B etal fig VuFeptHictUre WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Descr Display Only Displays the full name of the road section Location This field will always be blank when dealing with cyclic works order lines Remarks Display Only Enter any remarks regarding the works order line prior to completing the works order line WOL Id Display Only Displays the work order lines internal Id number Defect Id This fiel
133. IERTARE REPAIR mu sm am Fb 198 Figure 224 Version 4 7 278 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 Be ntle y PAYMENTS 7 Payments This chapter describes the forms used to create maintain and review Payments following the completion of works orders or individual works order lines They are the following forms e Deselect Items For Payment MAI3842 e Payment Run MAI3840 e Query Payment Run Details MAI3940 List of Items for Payment MAI3942 The form descriptions provide you with detailed information about each Payment related form including e an overall description of the form e a detailed explanation of each field including available features such as List of Values default values and other characteristics e helpful information for using the form Version 4 7 279 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR PF MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 PAYMENTS Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 7 1 Deselect Items for Payment MAI3842 Maintenance Manager gt Inven
134. INISTRATOR RESET IS Authorised By sys SYSTEMADMINISTRATOR Cis Job Number ooo00 Cost Recharged Remarks HZ Date Raised 23 JAN 2007 Sub Total Target Complete TY Balancing Sum Last Printed 23 JAN 2007 Figure 144 Work Order Details This window is displayed when the WO Details button is selected in the Works Orders Contractor window All the information in this window is for information only Select Cancel to return to the Contractor Interface window Version 4 7 161 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR PF MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Ss WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 3 11 9 Flexible Attributes a EEN Flexible Attributes MAI3821 ISKINNER wolvesev GBEXOR920 MAI v4 2 1 0 Works Order Details Works Order no SSMS o Scheme Type Local Roads Attributes l TemTeWeMgasest aaa a E 8 Existing CAN Conditions I sm 3 O Road Speed mph jJ E CAA Width m 4 B X3 X33 3j No of Vehs in 3 mins Bs B Orr 1 5 Existing PED Conditions oo ooo X Footway Category dio R Footway idth m 4 Do Footway Category right Footway Width m Verge Cycleway
135. Inc int 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Status Display Only List Displays the current status of the works order line For more information on status codes please refer to the section Defect Status Codes in this manual Initially a works order line will have a status of DRAFT Once the work order has been instructed and saved the work order line will become INSTRUCTED As work on the Works Order Line progress s this Status will be changed either by the User in the case of Interim Payments or automatically by the system as is the case when a Works Order line is included on a Payment Run Note When updating the status code you must select Tab to move to the next field before entering any further data Note Any new work order lines added to a work order that is instructed will have the status of INSTRUCTED Completed Optional Enter the completion date of the works order line Est Cost Display Only This field displays the estimated cost of the repair This cost is calculated from the contract rates Note that if this field is blank there is no rate on the current contract for this job item and therefore the system is unable to calculate the cost of the job item and the works order can not be instructed Gang Required If Gang Allocation has been used to allocate a gang to the repair of this defect the gang id will be displayed Work Cat R
136. Infrastructure 0 x Defect Id 377907 Time Inspected jog 3 o Defect Status SELECTED Priority fi Superseded IN By Asset Type CvV Asset Ref Id Find Asset XSP E Start Chain 45 Location opposite house 4 Co ords X 372222 000 Defect Desc Y 87700 000 Special Instr mm Roadstud Type E Activity Mc Minor Carriageway Repairs Number Defect Type POTH_ Pothole SISS ALL Au Standard Items Asset Modification N No Notify Notice Id Recharge Date Printed Repairs fE wo Summary Print Per Imm M Tmp Figure 15 Create Work Order 2 2 9 Create Work Order Selecting the Create WO button will call form Raise Work Order MAI3801 This will create a work order for the selected defect record Version 4 7 18 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 6 Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS Raise Works Order GIS DORSET nmd4beta2 GBEXOR730 MAI v4 0 Scheme Type Contract 7 933 Routine Maintenance PS2 06 07 ACTUAL Work Order Cancel Figure 16 Raise Work Order The Raise Works Order form allows the required Scheme Type and Works Order Contract to be selected Scheme Type Required Default List
137. Item Sub Section The default value is defined using Product Option DEF_SISS Standard Items and Standard Item Sub Sections are maintained using MAI3886 Standard Item Sections and Sub Sections refer to the Maintenance Manager System Admin Guide Defect Type Required List Select the appropriate Defect Type from the list provided Only those Defect Types associated with the previously selected Activity will be available for selection Defects and Activities are associated using Defect Control Data MAI1300 refer to the Maintenance Manager System Admin Guide Priority Required List Select a Defect Priority from the list provided Only those Defect Priorities associated with the previously selected Activity will be available for selection The Priority selected will be used to generate a Target Date for the Defect Repair which is displayed in the bottom right hand corner of the Defect Details window Defect Priorities and Activities are associated using Defect Priorities MAI3812 refer to the Maintenance Manager System Admin Guide Location Description Optional If required enter a description for the Location of the Defect A maximum of 40 characters is allowed Defect Description Optional A description of the Defect may be entered if required A maximum of 240 characters is allowed Special Description Optional If required enter any additional instructions or comments relatin
138. Item if they are required for the specified item Each standard job item can have one or more dimensions associated with it depending on the nature of the work represented by the job item For example replacing damaged kerbing will have a single dimension representing the length of kerbing to be replaced whilst filling a pothole may have three dimensions representing the length width and depth of the pothole to be filled Consequently these three dimension fields are Required or Optional according to the needs of the job in question Note The message line will display a message explaining what unit of measurement should be used for each dimension field This message will be of the form Enter the Length Quantity Display Only Displays the calculated quantity of work based on the dimensions supplied in the previous fields The unit of this field is displayed in the Unit field described below Est Labour Display Only Displays the estimated labour costs if they have been entered against the selected schedule item in Standard Items MAI3888 Unit Display Only Displays the unit of measurement of this job item This unit relates to the Total Qty field described above Rate Display Only Displays the rate per unit for this work item as held on the contract under which this works order is being created If a rouge item is added the rate must also be added to the item in this field Cost Display Only If th
139. L ACCIDENT A TER CARE SC 500 270602314 LOCAL ACCIDENT AFTER CARE sc 1000 270302314 LOCAL ACCIDENT A gt TER CARE sc 500 260602314 LOCAL ACCIDENT AFTER CARE Si 290602314 LOCAL ACCIDENT A TER CARE 290302314 LOCAL ACCIDENT A TER CARE S 2309 30 270302314 LOCAL ACCIDENT A TER CARE S 300 35 270402314 200 x x Figure 9 Budgets Once a Budget has been selected the Number of Defects added to the Work Order will be displayed in a pop up dialogue Press Finish to create the Work Order orks Order GIS DORSET nm4beta2 GBEXOR730 MAI v4 0 Scheme Type Wivefects Selected Contract 7 900 XI 1 of 1 defects selected Cancel Work Order XCH 770 Cancel Figure 10 Raise Work Order When the Finish button is pressed the Work Order Defects MAI3800 module will be called and the Work Order will be displayed allowing the user to make changes as required 2 2 5 Activities A list of those activities that were carried out during the inspection will be displayed These activities will have been previously set up using Activities MAI1200 Maintenance Manager System Administrator Manual Code Required List Select a valid inspection activity from the List of Values A description will be displayed in the adjacent field Version 4 7 12 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature a
140. Last Updated D5 JAN 2009 Initiation Type PE Public Enquiry S D M Indicator p Weather Cond Surface Cond Road Section 1200B3081N 00305 Description SOMERSET COUNTY BOUNDARY TO JCT POUND LANE GILLINGHAM Start Chainage p End Chainage 5312 wes erects Activities Code Description Me MmeCmupey gm 000000 A WW Do Figure 71 Delete Inspection Version 4 7 67 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ox 23 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS 2 13 1 General Information This form will allow you to delete an inspection as well as all the defects that were identified during that inspection An inspection can be deleted if it was entered erroneously and nothing has happened to the contents of that inspection If any defects belonging to an Inspection have been selected on a Works Order or superseded by a subsequent inspection then the Inspection cannot be Deleted Use this module with caution because no history of the deletion is retained on the system 2 13 2 Delete Inspections On entry to this window the cursor sits in the Inspection Id field waiting for you to enter some selection criteria to identify the inspection to be delet
141. MENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc acu Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 6 Sustaining Infrastructure WORKS ORDERING REPORTS 4 4 2 BOQ Work Order Defects MAI3906 MAI3906 Print BOQ Work Order Defects Admin Unit DEMO COUNTY COUNCIL Contractor TCsoo1 Stewart amp Sons Engineering Contract STEWART I Bitmac Patching 2000 Work Order No STEWART I 3 WotrkSheetNo 1 Works Description Bitmac PAtching Area 21 North RoadId Road Group Road Description DEMOA12345 01 DEMO A01939 HIGH STREET FROM CHURCH LANE TO UPPER MILL STREET Location Small Scheme Desctiption No recorded defect Item D21011 CW FW Bitmac Patch 75 100mmm deep 1 00 80 00 80 00 SQM Item 1 PERCENT A Percent Item 0 00 0 00 PERCENT Signed Completion Date RoadId Road Group Road Description DEMOA12345 01 DEMOA12345 HIGH STREET FROM CHURCH LANE TO UPPER MILL STREET Location Small Scheme Description No recorded defect Item D21011 CW FW Bitmac Patch 75 100mmm deep 1 00 80 00 30 00 SQ M Item 1 PERCENT A Percent Item 0 00 0 00 PERCENT Completion Date Figure 187 Work Order Version 4 7 220 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature
142. Menu Option 582519 Insp Batch 81393 Date Inspected SYS SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR Date Loaded Last Updated NRM Safety Detailed FINE Road Surface Condition 000045 D OD020 f 8 MAY 2010 26 MAY 201 0 25 MAY 2010 D DRY A5 EDGWARE ROAD BENFOLD PL TO ST JOHN S WOOD RD Vv2 0 End Chainage 741 Number of Defects E Create WO Summary Description Me Minor Carriageway Repairs A EBE EE Set Batch Available 2 24 General Information Figure 4 Inspections This form can be used in a number of ways to suit your operational requirements If you are inspecting your network using Data Capture Devices DCD s Defect details associated repairs and bill of quantity items are entered on the DCD and downloaded onto the system This form will allow you to view inspection and defect details for the selected inspection and add additional bill of quantity items if required Bill of quantities can be automatically generated using Treatment Models MAI3814 Defects may also be raised against Asset items on a selected Road Section Version 4 7 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR l k Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE A Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS Ad h
143. Minor Carriageway Repairs Number Defect Type POTH Pothole SISS ALL All Standard Items Asset Modification N No Notify Notice Id Recharge Date Printed Summary Print Repairs Create WO I Per Imm M Tmp Figure 58 Edit Defect 2 9 6 Edit Defect The Edit Defects button will call the Defects window from form Inspections MAI3808 Updates to the defect repair BOQ items can be made if the status of the defect is set to the appropriate value le ni xi Defect Id 377907 Order By Defect Id Desc he Navigator Asset Carriageway View Asset Road Section imas woo oS XSP E Start Chain fs Inspector PRM Inspection Batch 101172 Road Desc BABYLON HILL R A NEAR YEOVIL Initiation Type NRM Inspection Id 1141343 Location DOWN T ROAD Priority 1 siss ALL Special Instr special instruction P1 defect Superseded N By Activity Me Minor Carriageway Repairs Number SS Roadstud Type IE Defect Type POTH Pothole x 3722220 Defect Desc Y 87700 0 Defect Status SELECTED Update Inv N No Recharge pan Date Inspected fit auG 2011 09 40 Notice Printed RENI Notify Date Recorded 15 AUG 2011 12 06 Notice Id Repair Category Temporary Perm Imm FM Temp Date Repair Due fiz auc 2011 Work Status prr Repair Desc PERMANENT REPAIR CAT 1 Date Instructed WorkOrder CLB TESTAB Treatment NEEMNENNMNEEEENNENEMBEBEBNMNWNBNN Target Complete 12 AUG 2011 10 00 Work Sheet pee m
144. NANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE WORKS ORDERING REPORTS 23 Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 4 13 2 Instructed Work by Status MAI3924 MICK MAI3924 Road Group LOCAL Priority 2 m Defect Id Type 280 POTH Defect Location Outside No 1 Action PERMANENT Total Cost Lab Units MICK List of Instructed Work by Status Admin Unit Demo County Council SISS ALL All Standard Items Road Section 0000000905 00010 FREEMANTLE ROAD MICKLEOVER Item H1001 TSM S CWay 1 day L out 7 H2346 ex re CGWC W C35 5m2 163 80 0 00 Figure 196 Due Date 18 JAN 2004 Recharge Quantity 1 00 1 00 Days to Due Date 142 XSP 4 Rate 155 95 7 85 Date 08 JUN 2004 Page 2 Date Instructed Date Inspected 05 JAN 2004 04 JAN 2004 St Chain 12 Cost 155 95 7 85 Version 4 7 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc 238 acu Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE ol Sustaining Infrastructure WORKS ORDERING REPORTS 4 14 Instructed Defects Due for Completion MAI3926 Purpose This report produces a list of all defects which are currently on Work Orders but have not yet been completed i e have a status of Instructed and which meet the required selection parameters The following information is displayed
145. NNNM Figure 126 Work Order Lines tab Id Display Only This will display the unique system generated work order line Id Description Display Only This will display a concatenation of Defect Id Defect Type Priority and Location Version 4 7 139 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc asi Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 1 Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 7 8 Error Stack Validation Results ErrorANarning Message mor Mandatory value s missing O OOOO A Warning Notice submitted late possible FPN Warning Works starting early need agreement to start before expiry of notice g e Additional Information Both ConditionType and ConditionText required when one is supplied Figure 127 Validation Results This works in the same way as the error stack in TMA1001 This will display the errors and warnings for the selected notice The highlights error will have a more descriptive text in the Additional Information window The errors and warnings are refreshed as the user moves from notice to notice or by the selection of the green refresh button Version 4 7 140 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are conf
146. NT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc int 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Schedule Display Only This field will display the cyclic maintenance schedule name For a defect clearance works order it will always be blank Status Required List Displays the current status of the works order line Initially a works order line will have a status of DRAFT As work on the Works Order Line progress s this Status will be changed either by the User in the case of Interim Payments or automatically by the system as is the case when a Works Order line is included on a Payment Run Note When updating the status code you must select Tab to move to the next field before entering any further data Note Any new work order lines added to a work order that is instructed will have the status of INSTRUCTED Completed Required Enter the completion date of the works order line Est Cost Display Only This field displays the estimated cost of the repair This cost is calculated from the contract rates Note that if this field is blank there is no rate on the current contract for this job item and therefore the system is unable to calculate the cost of the job item and the works order cannot be instru
147. Notice 3 8 Works Order Authorisation MAI3848 Maintenance Manager C Inventory Ld Inspections Works Works Orders Defects Works Orders Cyclic Maintain Work Orders Contractor Interface View Work Order Line History Gang Crew Allocation View Cyclic Maintenance Work Figure 131 Work Order Authorisation Menu Option Version 4 7 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT 143 The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR 5 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE aAa NEES WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Wvo Orders Authorisation MAI3848 DORSET maidev44 EXDL18 MAI v4 3 0 0 Work Order Contract Scheme Raised By Target Total Cost WOODSTOCK ROAD 7 915 E LF IL 3 SEP 2006 00 00 MA 3850 00 T DEC 770119 pick O TH BANKS RC 7 960E HI 02 AUG 2006 00 00 P_Y 36862 20 l DEC 770102 SUPPLY 10 CCTV SIGr 7 961 HI t7 JUL 2006 00 00 DOM 450 00 DEC 770126 IcALFHAYS BRIDGE si7981 HS 24 AUG 2006 00 00 SG 1597 03 DEC 770166 A338 GAP CLOSURES 7 987E SF 09 ocT 2006 00 00 R H 2794328 T DEC 770169 a338 GAP CLOSURES rere SF 10 ocT 2006 00 00 R_H 9627411 DEC 770197 C123 CHERRY ORCHA 7 960E HI 08 NOV 2006 00 00 N D 5570882 C XCH 7 70635 PARK GARDENS REt 815 E LF 26 SEP 2006 00 00 MA 1800 00 XCH 7 70636 GORDON WAY RESL 7 915 E LF 26 SEP
148. OR Cost Centre To be Authorised By Paul Moon Job Number 00000 Authorised By Remarks Date Raised 10 MAY 2011 15 10 Rechargeable Target Complete Casi Ree J Date Authorised Estimates Actuals Date Instructed Sub Total 363 00 Last Printed Balancing Sum 0 00 Date Received Total Cost 363 00 Date Completed Labour Units Defect 1 Scheme D Cyclic 0 Lines Standard Item Totals Contract Totals Additional Details J Flexible Attributes Navigator J Notice Summary TMA Interface TMAReaister 0 SWMRegister 0 Copy Print Authorise Instruct Figure 91 Work Order Defects 3 5 1 General Information When inspections are carried out on road sections it is possible that defects may be found on the inventory items being inspected These defects are recorded in the system along with the inspectors recommended actions For these actions to be carried out a works order must be raised When creating a defects works order you can select a defect or defects to be rectified and view the inspector s original schedule items required to rectify the defect At this point you can amend these schedule items adding new ones or removing existing items As this process is carried out the various totals and sub totals contained on the works order are updated instantly The Work Orders Defects form offers you the facility to carry out what if planning by constructing your works order gradually adding and removing
149. Order form allows the required Scheme Type and Works Order Contract to be selected Scheme Type Required Default List This is the Scheme Type for the Work Order The default value is determined by the value set for Product Option DEFSCHTYPL or DEFSCHTYPD depending on the System Flag set for the Section or Budget Allocation Group on which the Defect is raised The default value may only be updated if product option DEFSCHTYPU is set to Y Contract Required Default List This is the Contract used within the Work Order The default value is determined by the value set for product Option DUMCONCODE Once the appropriate Contract has been selected press the Next Button Work Order Default If Product Option WORREFGEN Is set to M manual the Work Order Number and Description should be entered If set to C Contract based or A Admin Unit based the work order number will be automatically generated when the Next gt button is pressed and a valid Budget is selected If Multiple Budgets exist for the defect Activity Scheme Type Section or Budget Allocation Group combinations a list will be displayed from which to select the required Budget Version 4 7 37 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR gt MAINTENANCE M
150. PE er beu TERR e niae 274 6 Cyclic Maintenance Works Ordering Reports essere nennen nennen 275 6 1 Running Reports ornnes este er EH ERE aaa UL FEL EE RR EIER NSE SEENA 275 6 2 BOQ Work Order Cyclic MAI3907 cessere nennen nnne nennen nter nnne 276 6 2 1 Selection Parameters oec oett e eere e her AUR EF EXPE XX Re EE E teque s eva oa adu en e eei ERE 276 6 3 Cyclic Maintenance Done MATIS032 sese enne en eren eren a 277 6 3 1 Selection ParaMEtErs i oce rtt ee ege ter RR Urea E E E ENE E oases ed ERR SERE XR Seeds 277 6 4 Cyclic Maintenance Schedules MAT3960 essere nenne nennen 278 6 4 1 selection Parameters ree vende e eh eR UH I RENE A exte GI e e EUST Wlaseaaneesanceoedaeaws 278 6 4 2 Cyclic Maintenance Schedules MAT3960 eese eee 278 PAV AMO TUS eed vee iid ee teret puit eei reete ipa PRU Pe Lenta p eu euet edu meti pierde Reel opo eR eo ste Dun PERDERE ud 279 7 1 Deselect Items for Payment MATIS8402 esses enemies 280 7 1 1 General INPOrMatiOM lt j sss adeccscwsdcvaxssagaccacencedeseobenncgsandeseasnsasucay vagedeseanccncd E AR EEE 281 7 1 2 Work Order Lines tee e titer t eie aee ae REL calves E e Ro iie dadas 281 7 2 Payment Run MAJT3840 iieii itt te terea deed top a rne E gb EER i aav EE 283 7 2 1 General InfOrmiatiOt eiecit petet ie tee ER edervonesticevssancectebensdersdeasacatesausevevances 283 7 2 2 Payment
151. R CARE Sc 00 270602314 ACCIDENT AFTER CARE sc 1000 270302314 ACCIDENT A gt TER CARE Sc 500 260502314 ACCIDENT AFTER CARE Si 290602314 ACCIDENT A TER CARE 290302314 ACCIDENT A TER CARE Sc 2309 30 954 47 270302314 ACCIDENT A TER CARE 3 300 35 628 8 270402314 X D x Figure 17 Budgets Once a Budget has been selected the Number of Defects added to the Work Order will be displayed in a pop up dialogue Press Finish to create the Work Order se Works Order GIS DORSET Qnm4beta2 GBEXOR730 MAI v4 0 Scheme Type Cancel Figure 18 Raise Work Order When the Finish button is pressed the Work Order Defects MAI3800 module will be called and the Work Order will be displayed allowing the use to make any changes required Version 4 7 20 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc Vds k Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE ZS Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS Repairs for Defect 377907 Dl x Category Temporary Status DRAFT Date Repair Due 12 AUG 2011 Desc PERMANENT REPAIR CAT 1 Date Instructed Treatment o Target Complete 12 AUG 2011 Work Order CLB TEST 48 Time Completed Hl Date Completed Work Sheet Payment Id Check Paid Check Batch Check Result Date Pai
152. R MANAGEMENT Main Works Order changes Works Order Line changes Bill Of Quantity changes e Payment detail changes The following information is displayed WOL Display Only The Defect Id or Works Order Line number will be displayed BOQ Display Only The BOQ Standard Item Code will be displayed Initials Display Only The initials of the User who made the change will be displayed Date Display Only The Date and Time on which the changes were made will be displayed Item Changed Display Only A brief description of the Item changed will be displayed Change New Value Display Only The new value of the changed item will be displayed Old Value Display Only The old value of the changed item will be displayed To close the Works Order Audit and return to the main Works Order form press the Close button on the window Version 4 7 187 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ia 5 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 12 13BOQ Details Fa BOG Items Defect 361563 Item Details Item Code 29 01 001 TMA Mobile lane close adj verge block working veh sign vehicle trailer Section Traffic Safety Management Sub Section A Stan
153. R USER GUIDE aae NEIES WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT e Must satisfy the normal validation that would be applied by the Works Orders form MAI3800 When a Budget change is performed the Actual Cost of the Works Order Line will be removed from the original Budget and added to the new Budget The top part of the form is query only The bottom part of the form is display only with the exception of Work Category Optional List Enter the amended budget for the selected work order line Version 4 7 199 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR PF MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 3 14 Gang Crew Allocation MAI3805 Maintenance Manager Z3 Inventory Z3 Inspections Works Works Orders Defects Works Orders Cyclic Maintain Work Orders Contractor Interface View Work Order Line History Gang Crew Allocation Work Orders Authorisation Figure 172 Gang Crew Allocation Menu Option emm Allocation MAI3805 DORSET dawson EXDL11 MAI v4 0 1 0 C Allocate a Gang Re Allocate a Gang Selection Criteria Road Type B Gang GANG 1 Qi Gang Type Y Category Tj Date Raised From Defect Priority FE Type E C Target Complete To Treatment d Siss Code E C
154. REN ERL LEE EO a sehen FE Pit EEUU dT eds 247 4 18 2 Admin Unit Performance MAI3956 oo eee ceseceseceseceseceeeeeseeseeeeeaeeeaeesaeecaaecsaesaeeaeees 248 5 Cyclic Maintenance Works Orders Admin eese eene eren 250 5 1 General Information eerte aaa ie X FUPCR REE NUR ERU ERE ENS EERE 250 5 2 CyclicMaintenance Inventory Rules MAI3626 essesseeeeeeeeeeren ener 253 5 2 1 General TnTOrmatlOli rice treten tetti rr s e eo Le eme tete EEEE ERE e rhe SENEO Sake TESES 254 5 2 2 Cyclic Maintenance Inventory Rules 0 eee eeseessecsecsseceseceseeeseeeeeeseeeseeeeneeeaeeeaeeeaaeenaes 254 5 3 Cyclic Maintenance Schedules MAT3860 sess eren enne 256 5 3 1 General Information 1 2 teinte te tere eei estare e eee e Eee pe e LET o eren E odas ceno comido 257 5 3 2 Cyclic Maintenance Schedules seeeeeeeeeeeeeee eene nennen 257 5 3 3 NSOISIUESUSUEETOUT TP MEM 259 5 3 4 Calculating the Work Quantity sese entente 260 5 3 5 Clearing Defects with Cyclic Maintenance Works Orders sees 261 5 3 6 The Next Step reden operae Petri ee rp c RH EE pra e toe Fete Lig eu eee Reese ap DEA EOR de 261 5 4 Cyclic Maintenance Schedules by Section MAT3862 sssseseseeeeeeeeen 262 5 4 1 General Information EE 263 5 4 2 Schedules Dy Road Section iiie cess terit leger ete rep tiep ee inguine da potu epe vet dea een 263
155. Run 5 e ei nO eto e E eter e m eir btts 283 7 2 3 Payment Run Report A eerie reet t ert to eee ieu bud Prep e pua eee etes 284 7 2 4 Payment Run Report B 5 ieu irn HEU ette i eee ELO ese ep PDA EOE de 285 7 2 5 Payment R n Report C ec etre D ER P idR E Re ER Ra ECRIRE S 286 7 3 Query Payment Run Details MAI3940 cessere enne nennen 287 7 3 1 General Informati Om Mm 287 7 3 2 Payment Run Detatls 5 satay tte dre dete tabe eri ein em DU us 288 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure INTRODUCTION 1 Introduction Maintenance Manager by EXOR is an application module that is used in conjunction with network manager by exor to manage the maintenance functions for a transportation network and its associated attributes maintenance manager provides complete control over the management and operation of routine cyclic and structural maintenance and allows the user to maintain financial control of maintenance contracts and budgets It aids in the implementation of policy standards and provides facilities for monitoring performance against these standards This ensures effective work management In addition maintenance manager allows for the implementation of inspection regimes and so provides a legal framework for defending liability claims Tools are available within maintenance manager to record and manage in a user defined manner information concerning e inspections planned
156. Signed for Client Time Comp 23 NOV 99 DESCRIPTION Emergency Repairs to Safety Fence Signs amp Manhole OF WORK Safety Fencing In Accordance With Term Highways Maintenance Contract Sub Total Balancing Sum Works Order Total em Link Id Section Defect Location Details eee 1 2900469 I 4 40 GREENHEAD DUALING EASTBOUND FROM B630 B630 JUNCTION OTHR Other XSP3 Chainl9 C302HALTWHISTLE E TO U7051 MELKRIDGE N TOWNFOOT JUNCTION OTHR Other XSP3 ChainlS Repair Description Details Unit Qy Est c e No Action FB Unknown 0 00 0 RENEW 4 BEAMS STRAIGHTEN POSTS Defect Id 3 SG No Action RENEW I BOLLARD SHELL Defect Id 4 Figure 185 Work Order Priced MAI3480 Part 1 NORTH PENNINE LINK GROUP Print Works Order Priced ltem Code Year 02401 1999 DTp Local Agency Road Group Expenditure Code 2900469 1 Works Order No 2 00003 Road Sections on Works Order 2 00003 Section Section Class All Purpose All Purpose Description GREENHEAD DUALING EASTBOUND FROM B630 C302HALTWHISTLE E TO U7051 MELKRIDGE N Figure 186 Work Order Priced MAI3480 Part 2 Version 4 7 218 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prio
157. Sruauraware WRRRNENNNI 1 SUPERSEDED superece enne WRRNRMRINI Figure 2 Defect Status Codes These status codes are generally maintained by the system administrator A default set is supplied with the system but they can be added to suit your organisational requirements When a new status code is added one or more of the following features may be applied Feature 1 Defects are initially created with this status This status will be set in Inspections MAI3808 or Load Bulk Inspections MAI2200 Feature 2 The defect is ready to be assigned to a work order This status will be set in Inspections MAI3808 and checked in Works Orders MAI3800 Version 4 7 4 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 23 Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS Feature 3 Feature 4 Feature 5 Feature 6 Feature 7 Feature 8 Feature 9 At least one repair on the defect has been assigned to a work order This status will be set in Works Orders MAI3800 All repairs for the defect have been completed This status will be set in Works Orders MAI3800 The defect may be manually amended or deleted Defects with these statuses may be amended to a different status pr
158. T The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 B en le Y Sustaining Infrastructure CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERS ADMIN A33 Grass Cutting Twice Yearly Schedule Contract Grass Cutting 47 50 km Works Order Grass Cutting 32 75km Verge C M Rules Grass Cutting Verge Factor 0 001 433 Grass Cutting 32 75km 47 50 1555 6 Inventory Works Order 32750m of Verge Network 433 Route length 44250m Figure 202 When a new schedule is created using Cyclic Maintenance Schedules MAI3860 the system will scan the network calculating how much inventory will be affected by the work to be done under the schedule This amount is available to view within the schedule You must then use Cyclic Maintenance Schedules By Section MAI3862 to determine for each road section within the scheduled road group exactly how much work you want to be carried out each time the schedule is run It is possible to simply accept the calculated quantity or you may choose to override this quantity and enter your own value This process may be done at group level depending on how the values are set up in Product Options HIG9130 setting the USECYCGRPD DoT roads or USECYCGRPL Local
159. THROCKLEY BYPASS MAIN CWY WESTBOUND E 300001 i EAPR IO d 19 PAPR IUM IE APR 086 Ried Groowe Road 1d Mio em S RROCKLEY BYPASS MAIN CWY EASTBOUND 140001 1 MISS IKAPR1996 TRAPR 1006 IAPR IOUM 18 APR 1996 Road Orcun Road id 4 10Asd L 54 A5 THROCKLEY BYPASS MAIN CWY FASTIOUND 100 00001 1 MI IR APR 198 MEAPR i 1996 19 hoai Road ig Sine oe Mae TIROCKLEY BYPASS MAIN CW EASTBOUND i01 00001 1 MISS IB APK 1995 IE APR 1996 19 APRIUMS 18 APR 1996 Rond id 451008 L6 A THROCKLEY BYPASS MAIN CWY LASTBOUND 102 340000 MISS IRAPRAO MeAPROIO 19 APR 1996 19 Roed Road id 451069 LR AM THROCKLEY BYPASS MAIN EASTBOUND Figure 201 Part 2 Version 4 7 249 eek Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE S AE EN CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERS ADMIN 5 Cyclic Maintenance Works Orders Admin This chapter describes the forms used to manage Cyclic Maintenance Works Orders This chapter contains the following forms Cyclic Maintenance Inventory Rules MAI3626 Cyclic Maintenance Schedules MAI3860 Cyclic Maintenance Schedules by Section MAI3862 View Cyclic Maintenance Work MAI3804 Maintain Maintenance Reports MAI3250 Valid for Maintenance Rules MAI3440 e Related Maintenance Activities MAI3628 The form descriptions provide you with detailed information about each Cyclic Maintenance Works Ordering form in highways by exor including e an overall description of the for
160. TMA Noticing Work Order Lines TMA Notices WOL TMA Works Ref USRN Street Name Phase End Date Last Notice Type New Notice Type Count Select Notice SALISGURYROAD O EN 7 A Eee m E DO EE 4 J r SS gu X ss m SS _ mu jen a WB ow TMA Works Description Y EAJ JB TEST 2 13 COPY Send To Register View TMA Works Work Order Lines TMA Notice WOL Id Location Road Id Description Defect Id Type Priority End Date Count Select WOL WESTBOUND DUAL CWAY START OF E v S 474204 1200430 E003 WESTBOUND DUAL CANAY START OF 1 v 474205 1200430 E 003 WESTBOUND DUAL CANAY START OF 1 v farza 4200430 E 003 WESTBOUND DUAL CANAY START OF f v m E m meus RESET E Nn e SS ag Figure 117 TMA Noticing tab These three fields will be automatically queried if form TMA Interface TMA3990 is called from the Work Ordering modules If called from the Menu the user will have to query back the required work order number e Work Order Version 4 7 126 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc acu Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 Bietaf Dto WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT e Description e Date Raised TMA Works Ref Display Only When the notice has been
161. The treatment code can be forced to be mandatory by setting the product option TRECODEMAN to Y Version 4 7 21 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR P MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 1 Be ntle y MANAGING INSPECTIONS Target Complete Display Only Displays the date by which this repair should be completed This date is entered when raising a works order Work Order Display Only Once a defect has been placed on a works order the works order number will be displayed Time Completed Optional When known enter the time of completion of the repair A time must be entered if the repair time mandatory field in Defect Priorities MAI3812 Maintenance Manager System Administrator Manual is set to Y Date Completed Optional When the repair has been completed the date will appear in this field If the Product Option REPCOMPDATE is set to Y defects may be manually completed by entering the date here The status of the defect will change to completed and will not be available for inclusion on a works order For additional information see Manually Completing a Defect For more information on Product Options please refer to the Product Options HIG9130 section in the Maintenance Manager System Administrat
162. This form is used to reschedule cyclic maintenance activities when work has been carried out on a section that has an affect on that activity For example removing old signs along a carriageway and replacing them with new signs could result on the regular activity of sign cleansing being rescheduled These activities are set up and maintained using Activities MAII1200 Maintenance Activity Required List Enter a maintenance activity This activity will have been previously linked to a works category using Item Code Breakdowns MAI1940 Prior to being selected for use when raising a works order Reschedule Activity Required List Enter the activity that is to be rescheduled when the above activity is carried out on a section Version 4 7 274 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR 5 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE prosiie deer bei CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERING REPORTS 6 Cyclic Maintenance Works Ordering Reports This chapter provides examples and the required selection criteria for the Cyclic Maintenance Works Ordering and associated Reports The reports illustrated in this chapter are BOQ Work Order Cyclic MAI3907 Cyclic Maintenance Done MAI5032 Cyclic Maintenance Activities MAI3105 Cyclic Ma
163. USER GUIDE MANAGING INSPECTIONS 23 Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure Unique 1200D11908 00105 Description LITTLEBREDY FARM ROAD JCT LONGLANDS LANE TO JCT SHEEP DOWN ROAD LITTLEBRED Y Bachid 101055 Defectid 361518 Target Date 26 NOV 2009 10 59 x Co ordinate 359314691 y Co ordinate 88716419 Next gt Finish Figure 30 Defect Created The following Defect Summary details are displayed Section Name and Description Inspection batch Id Defect Id Target Repair Date X and Y coordinates of the Defect To cancel the Defect creation process press Cancel no defect will be created Note Ifthe Cancel button is pressed the entire Defect creation process will be cancelled and no Defects will be created Version 4 7 35 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 Be n le d Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS XOEHBOQS 0000 Unique 1200D12706 00105 Description CLAPPENTAIL PARK LOOP OFF CLAPPENTAIL LANE SOUTH TO NORTH LYME REGIS Defect Id 377926 Rep Date Due 01 SEP 2011 16 05 Unit Quantity Dim 2 Dim 3 Cost Labour Quantity Rate Em s unm E MENU o o X om
164. Units for defect priorities the following additional rules apply e Allowed repair types defined in the Defect Priorities form MAI3812 for a defect are based on the Defect Activity and the Admin Unit of the associated Network e Validation of the Defect Priority will ensure that the value is valid for the Defect Activity and the Admin Unit of the associated Network e The calculation of the Repair due date will take the Admin Unit of the associated Network into account when identifying the appropriate Defect Priorities values to be used in the calculation e The Admin Unit of the associated Network will be used in the identification of the rules defined in Work Order Automation Rules form MAI3818 to determine if Work Orders should be automatically created for the details being processed 2 2 2 Inspections This window holds basic details of the inspection such as the date it was performed who carried it out the weather and road conditions at the time as well as the actual road section that was inspected The number of defects logged during the inspection will also be displayed in the Number of Defects box The Set Batch Available button can be used to set the status of all defects for this inspection to Available The default status for defects loaded onto the system can be set to something other than available until they have been reviewed after the download if required this is set up using Status Codes HIG9110 this is usually a
165. Version 4 7 166 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc acu Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 Prae SEEE WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Interim Payment Optional Enter Y to signify that the Works Order will be subject to Interim Payments on Part Completed Works Order lines This may be entered at any time during the life of the Works Order Priority Optional List Enter a Priority for the Works Order These will have been previously set up using Work Order Priorities MAIO312 In addition the contents of the WOR PRIORITY list of values maintained using Domains HIG9120 will be concatenated onto the list this is to cater for backward compatibility This will automatically populate the Target Date field below Road Type Required List Select the road type for the works order If budgets are to be used the road type must match the road types set in the Product Options HIG9130 for DoT roads BUDGRPTYPD for Local roads BUDGRPTYPL Road Id Required List When List is selected only groups of the type entered in the previous field will be displayed make your selection from this list without drilling down through the gazetteer Scheme Type Required Default List Select the scheme type under which this
166. Work Orders MAI3800 View through Locator 3 3 1 General Information When a work order has been created and saved the complete work order can be viewed through locator by selecting the Show Map E button when in the work order screen as shown below amp JSISJ amp IS esee e 63 SEET Fina Feature Scale 17 67 Mom 1 1767 44 25 H H 369630 8051 113126 67329 Active Layer WORK_ORDER_LINES Attribute Not Set Figure 77 Locator Show work order Version 4 7 77 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc pon 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT If the Li button is pressed from the Work Order Lines canvas then only then shape for the current Work Order Line will be highlighted in the Map SIS JS eos ejes e S z c d st ES Fina Feature QO10 Q Q C eo 5d D eS G v Q Y eS Scale 16 71 Micm 1 1671 41 84 H H 369713 04129 113218 01603 Active Layer WORK_ORDER_LINES Attribute Not Set Figure 78 Locator Show work order line Version 4 7 78 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are
167. Works Order lines and Schedule Items until the totals match your budget before confirming the Works Order and forwarding it to the contractor Works Orders must be raised within the limits imposed for the selected Budget i e once the Allocated Amount for a budget is reached no further Works Order Lines may be Version 4 7 86 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR P MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE S WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure raised against it In some circumstances a User may need to raise Works Orders which would exceed the Allocated amount for a Budget This can be done by granting the role OVER BUDGET to the User requiring to exceed the Budgetary limit Works Order lines that have no defects associated with them can also be added to a defect clearance works order this is covered in raising Works orders for Other Works below Once a Works Order has been instructed further Defects or Works Order lines that have no associated Defects may not be added to the Works Order unless Product Option ADDINSTR is set to Y Defects can however be removed from the Works Order any time before the order is completed Once a Works Order has been printed using Print BOQ Work Order MAI3906 further Defects or Works Or
168. a E EE 3 2 1 Defect Status Codes oen secet erret aE aea EE E E esed ver EE DEEE O EEA 4 2 2 Inspections MAIB 8083 ncini iiaei a a E E aa 6 2 2 1 General Informatio orerar aera aE E EERE E EEES 6 2 2 2 Inspections Ee RERREUEEEHERL ea ELDER ERES doe R CL asin Rist Hase IRL ER aati 7 2 2 3 Inspection SUmmaty eter erede Rene ntur Etpe EEEE EREEREER NEEE 9 2 2 4 Create Work Order 2e empire dieti agen eret He eee LEUR eg ede EORR d Edd 10 2 2 5 PSCULVIUIOS dM Lr 12 2 2 6 Dol e H 13 2 24 SUMAT de ables 17 2 2 8 Printe scean eiii oes Nie eee enitn de tiim costes 17 2 2 9 Create Work Order 5 erii ne t sense bbsddevves Siesuescuereveetaaginadtnasoededelasenstaeze 18 PN ED icu E RSN 21 2 2 11 BOOMS iio octies eene Ee Db EC eS ge e D EE EE 23 2 2 12 Manually Completing a Defect eesessesssesseeseeeeeeetne eene 25 2 3 Using Locator with Inspections and Defects ssssssseseeseeeeeeee ene een emen 26 2 3 1 i6 rio AB Lio wm SC 26 2 4 Create a Defect on Network at X Y using Locator seeseeseeseeeeeeeeren eene 27 2 5 Create a Defect on Assets using Locator eeeseessesseeeeeeee eene rennen 40 2 6 Create Defects on Assets at X Y using Locator eese nennen 43 2 7 Create a Small Scheme Work Order using Locator eene ene 45 2 8 Inspections by Group
169. abase the next step is to use Cyclic Maintenance Schedules By Section MAI3862 to apportion that work amongst the individual road sections that make up the schedule if the work orders are to be raised at section level and not at group level Version 4 7 261 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc Sone 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERS ADMIN 5 4 Cyclic Maintenance Schedules by Section MAI3862 a Maintenance Manager Z3 Inventory Z3 Inspections Works Works Orders Defects Works Orders Cyclic Maintain Work Orders Contractor Interface View Work Order Line History Gang Crew Allocation Work Orders Authorisation View Cyclic Maintenance VYork i i e Schedule Maintenance Report Figure 209 Cyclic Maintenance Schedules by Section Menu Option fe yclic Maintenance Schedules by Road Section DRD nm4hbeta2 GBEXOR 7 Jg Schedule Id B29 Name GRASS CUTTING Last Quantity Calculations Description Work Category 900000 DUMMY WORK CATEGORY FOR ALL ACTIVITIES siss G1 GRASS ENV Grass Cutting Tractor Frequency FRI Once per Year 0000000 Road Group Type SECR Start End R Road Group Id 1C1X End Date D Road Group Desc SECTOR 1C1X Works Order N
170. ace between these two dates will be selected for inclusion on the current works order Include Temp Optional Default Enter Y to include defects with temporary repairs in the search specified above The default value is Y XSP Optional List If required select a valid Cross Sectional Position XSP Only those defects located at the specified XSP will be selected for inclusion on the current works order Once you have entered enough selection criteria to select the defects you want to work with press the Continue button to start the search The system will search all outstanding defects to find those that match the criteria defined above When this search is complete the following window will be displayed showing all defects that match your search criteria Defects Summary Defect Id 1200D10214 00177 YARN BARTON 3RD SPUR OFF Y Number Of Defects Selected 0 00 Cancel Number Of Defects Selected With BOQs 0 00 Figure 100 Defect Summary Select the required defects by checking the check box on the right Select Set All Y to select all defects displayed Select Unset All X to unselect all defects As the defects are selected a running total of useful information is displayed along the bottom of the window Press the Cancel button to return to the Selection Criteria screen enabling you to refine your search criteria and ini
171. aintenance Schedules by Road Section Maintenance Report Cancel Work Orders Quality Inspection Results Figure 178 External Activities Menu Option Version 4 7 209 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ie 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE ieteiafag hito WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT external Activities Malt 280 DORSET dev1 024 exdl15 MAI v4 0 4 3 Code p Description new entrance to car park Organisation Code ee Address staionrad 0000000000000 Membership Figure 179 External Activity 3 17 1 General Information When activities are carried out on road sections by external organisation units they should be recorded within the system to enable engineers to assess the implications of any planned maintenance For example if the Gas Board is due to replace a main it is pointless to resurface the road first These activities will be flagged as external activities in the work order line description when a work order is raised 3 17 2 External Activity When you enter this form the cursor sits in the Code field waiting for you to enter your selection Press Execute Query to obtain existing information Code Optional Enter the external activity code that is to be set up This will be used t
172. alities U S Government it is provided with restricted rights This software and accompanying documentation are commercial computer software and commercial computer software documentation respectively pursuant to 48 C F R 12 212 and 227 7202 and restricted computer software pursuant to 48 C F R 52 227 19 a as applicable Use modification reproduction release performance display or disclosure of this software and accompanying documentation by the U S Government are subject to restrictions as set forth in this Agreement and pursuant to 48 C F R 12 212 52 227 19 227 7202 and 1852 227 86 as applicable Contractor Manufacturer is Bentley Systems Incorporated 685 Stockton Drive Exton PA 19341 0678 Unpublished rights reserved under the Copyright Laws of the United States and International treaties EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE DOCUMENT TRACKER 234 Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure Document Tracker Document Details File Prepared by Maintenance Manager User Guide V4 7 docx lan Skinner Manual Name Reviewed by Maintenance Manager User Guide Anne Hammond Version Approved for issue by 4 7 T C Stewart Date of Issue Product Manager March 2014 lan Skinner File Name Document Centre Exor Product Manuals 4 7 Product Manuals 4 7 completed documentation Maintenance Manager User Guide v4 7 docx Document Version Control Revis
173. all SISS Codes will be included Version 4 7 243 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE WORKS ORDERING REPORTS Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure Ss 4 16 2 Work for Quality Inspection MAI3950 LIVE2108 LIVE2108 NORTII PENNINE LINK GROUP Date 29 DEC 99 MAI3950 List of Work for Quality Inspection Page 12 Contractor Northumberland Contracting Contract 001 NPLG OPERATION amp MAINTENANCE NCC Baich No 21 Road Id Road Description Road Group 2900A69 1 32 B6319 JCT TO C229 HAYDON BRIDGE 2900A69 1 Defect Schedule Id 19 Works Order No 2 00033 Work Sheet No Item 1 UNDERTAKE REPAIR 0 00 0 00 0 00 Check Ind Check Code Comments Checked by Date Checked Contractor Northumberland Contracting Contract 001 NPLG OPERATION amp MAINTENANCE NCC Batch No 21 Road Id 2900A69 1 42 Road Description C284 ELRINGTON TO BUSH FARM Defect Schedule ld 916 Works Order No 2 00069 Work Sheet No Item 1 UNDERTAKE REPAIR 0 00 0 00 0 00 Check Ind Check Code Comments Checked by Date Checked Figure 198 Location OLD TYNE BRIDGE HAYDON BRI Date Completed 02 JUL 96 0 00 ITEM Road Group 2900A69 1 WEST OF BUSH FARM 11 SEP 96 Location Date Comnleted
174. and Y coordinates of the Item centroid position To continue the process of raising Defects against the selected Assets press the Next gt button or Cancel to abandon the operation The Defect Details window will be displayed allowing the defect details to be entered as described under Create a Defect on Network at X Y using Locator Version 4 7 42 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR 2 MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 1 Be ntle Y MANAGING INSPECTIONS 2 6 Create Defects on Assets at X Y using Locator Send X Y value to application Send Multiple Points to application Create Enquiry Create Enquiry On Asset Relocate Enquiry Create Defects On Assets Create Defects on Network at X Y H Figure 42 Feature Edit Menu This option allows the creation of multiple defects against a single selected asset Defects created using this option are associated with the selected asset but are located at the X Y position at which the User clicks and not at the centre of the selected asset as is the case when using the Create Defects On Assets option previously described This is useful when creating defects or Work Requests at known locations within a Park or Land Parcel or creating defects adjacent
175. ar Ja GEO JESS EAI c a Legen c WORK ORDER LINE ESU TYPE3 STREETS DEFECTS K Available Instructed Completed Ye oeraurt l DEFECTS ON BRIDG Available K instructes 7 Completed Koera TYPE 1 AND 2 STREI STRUCTURES STRUCTURES BCI iui 95 100 o0 94 89 Find Feature Crown copyright All rights reserved 10001934 Figure 36 Locator To view the full details of a Defect or set of Defects make the Defects Later the Active Layer using the Layer Control Tool select the required Defects as described earlier and call the Defects MAI3806 module from the Select To list at the bottom of the Locator Map window This will call the Defects module and display full details of the selected Defects Version 4 7 39 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR 2 MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE e Be ntle y MANAGING INSPECTIONS 2 5 Create a Defect on Assets using Locator Send X Y value to application Send Multiple Points to application Create Enquiry Create Enquiry On Asset Relocate Enquiry Create Defects On Asset at X Y Create Defects on Network at X Y Figure 37 Feature Edit Menu This option allows a single Defect to be create
176. are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ipie 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 12 14Standard Item Totals e Standard Item Totals Estimated Estimated Actual Actual ltem Code Item Name i Quantity Cost Quantity Figure 162 Standard Item Totals This window is displayed when the Standard Item Totals button is selected in the Works Orders Defects window Itis a display only window which shows all of the Standard Items currently on this Works Order as well as the total quantities and costs both estimated and actual across the whole works order Note that the Actual fields are only displayed after a works order line has been completed or an Interim payment made and will therefore initially be empty If the contractor has added additional items to the order the estimated values will be empty with the actual values being populated Version 4 7 189 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ia 5 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE ietciafag fetta WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 12 15Contractor Totals I contract Totals YTD YTD Order Total Average Previous Minimum Max
177. ast Valuation 3 5 21 Completing a Works Order When completing a works order it is possible to update the schedule items to reflect the actual cost of repairing the defect A works order can be partially completed by completing individual works order lines or fully completed by completing the whole works order the limitation to completing the full works order by selecting the Completed button is that the costs of each individual line can not be amended to reflect the actual costs of the work To enter the actual cost of a works order line follow this procedure 1 Change the status of the works order line to COMPLETED 2 Enter the completed date 3 Update the dimensions in the BOQ Items window to the actual dimensions 4 Add any further BOQ items if required 5 Save the changes Once the changes have been saved no further changes can be made to that works order line Once all works order lines are completed the works order will be completed Version 4 7 121 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc cdd Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Ss Siaesialeg hito WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT This status can change to COMPLETED in one of two ways they are as follows The Complete button is selected in the Works Orders Defects window This wi
178. ate Inspected to be included on the report Only those Defect Records before this date will be included in the report Version 4 7 241 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc acu Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE e Sustaining Infrastructure WORKS ORDERING REPORTS 4 16 Work for Quality Inspection MAI3950 Purpose This report produces a random batch of completed Work Order Lines for a Work Quality Audit which meet the required selection parameters When the Work Audit is carried out the results are updated using Quality Inspection Results MAI3820 Once a Work Order line is selected in a batch it cannot be re selected in subsequent Quality Inspection batches The following information is displayed Batch Number Road Id and Description Road Group Defect Schedule Id Defect Location Works Order No Work Sheet No Date Completed BOQ Items and dimensions Check Result Place holder Check Code Place holder Comments Place holder Checked by Place holder Date Checked Place holder 4 16 1 Selection Parameters Admin Unit Required Default List Select an administrational unit to be used for this report The default is the Admin Unit assigned to the current User Road Type Optional List If required
179. ate of the defect repair boq items if the status of the defect is set to an appropriate value The Create WO button will allow the defect to be placed onto a work order when reviewing the defect details The Navigator button opens Navigator which allows the user to view and retrieve data associated with a defect record an example of this is shown below Details on the use of navigator can be found in the Query and Navigator User Manual Navigation Style g Defect 363139 COMPLETED MC OTHR 1 PUXEY LANE STURMINSTER N Enquiry 255905 CO COMP FRML CD PUXEY LANE STURMINSTER NEVVTON Inspection 1137819 Safety PE SYS Repair Permanent McA d Work Order Line 474480 COMPLETED 16784 PUXEY LANE STURMINSTER Q Budget 060111 Budget 1000000 Committed 2245 87 amp ctual 10610 5 Work Order JB TEST 2 60 DORSET JB TEST 2 50 LR JB TEST 2 JE TOC WEE e T em e Af tmo Agosto Mr rrr PE rrr EARN NIRE n d Order By Optional List This will allow the ordering of the query by the criteria selected 2 9 3 Repair The repair details for the selected defect will be displayed if the check boxes indicate that more than one repair exists for the selected defect select the repair category field followed by the Next or Previous buttons to view the additional repairs 2 9 4 BOQ Items The bill of quantity items for the selected repair will be displayed These BOQ items will have been gene
180. ated Works Work Orders Contractor MAI3802 Gang Crew Allocation MAI3805 Cancel Work Orders MAI3610 Quality Inspection Results MAI3820 e Maintain External Activities MAI1280 The form descriptions provide you with detailed information about each Works Ordering form in highways by exor including e an overall description of the form a detailed explanation of each field including available features such as List of Values default values and other characteristics e helpful information for using the form The following list identifies some of the Works Orders reports A complete list can be found in the Works Order Reports section of this manual e Print Work Orders Detail MAI3500 e Print Work Orders Summary MAI3505 e Print Work Orders Strip Plan MAI5130 3 1 Prerequisites Before considering Works Orders you should ensure that Budgets and Contract details have been entered successfully Maintenance Manager System Administration Manual Works orders can be created at any time once the highway road network is in place 1 Network Manager manual Version 4 7 75 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 1 Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 2 Using Locator
181. ategory of each street 3 5 23 1 4 Registerable and notifiable works There is a difference between Registerable works and notifiable works The difference is not great in practice as far as street works are concerned but Registerable works are those which should be registered under s 53 of NRSWA which includes some highway authority road works and notifiable works are those which require notices under s 54 55 and 57 of NRSWA which are utility street works 3 5 23 1 5 Bar holes Bar holes are used to detect and monitor gas leaks When bar holes are carried out and it is known that no further street works are required such as when a gas leak is reported but none detected a registration should be sent within 10 days once final monitoring checks have been established The bar holes will count as a single excavation and reinstatement for registration purposes An immediate i e emergency notice must be sent within two hours of the commencement of any other Registerable street works activity i e excavation or any other activity defined in 5 8 2 associated with the bar holes In this latter case these bar holes will not count as further excavations and reinstatements for the purposes of registrations All bar holes must be reinstated and registered when work on site is complete 3 5 24 Raising a Notice from Maintenance Manager Maintenance Manager allows Work Items to be sent to the Street Works Register using the TMA Interface bu
182. automatically once the notice has been successfully sent to the register Version 4 7 132 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR PF MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Ss WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 3 7 3 Work Details tab Work Detais Conads Coordinates 71 05 Work Order Lines Recipient Org 1245 DORSET COUNTY COUNCIL Recipient District 001 DORSET COUNTY COUNCIL Works Category Minor No of Phases h Cay Restrict Type None signing only JS PLANNED PATCHING PRIOR TO SURFACE DRESSING Works Description eaters Location Descriptiont FLEET STREET BEAMINSTER Bt Ret ARNSTMMMOA sss Estimated Start Date 23 JAN 2009 T Estimated End Date 29 JAN 2009 T Actual Stat Date T ActualEndDete ssl Start Time Estimated Insp Units f Actual Insp Units Works Restricted L Parking Suspensions E Working Hours Footway Closure a Notes Default duration for this works category is 3 working days Earliest defect completion date 19 JAN 1998 has passed thefore end date defaulted to current date Figure 121 Work Details tab Recipient Org Dist Display Only This will display the primary recipient of the given notice type based on th
183. ayed in Work Orders Defects MAI3800 in both the work order line and the selection criteria windows and Work Order Contractor Interface MAI3802 in the work order lines window Each appropriate schedule of rates item can have a Gang Work Type associated with it using Standard Items MAI3888 This allows the grouping of item according to the type of work associated with a defect The association of the gang work type will aid in the selection criteria of the works orders when locating defects Gang Work Types are set up in Domains HIG9120 in the GANG WORK TYPE domain Gangs are set up in Domains HIG9120 in the GANG domain This form can be used in 2 modes depending on the checkbox selected 1 Allocate a Gang checkbox this gives the user the ability to restrict the work order lines retrieved using the selection criteria select the lines required then allocate a gang to those lines 2 Re allocate a Gang checkbox this substitutes the Status field with the Gang field allowing the user to retrieve work order lines already allocated to a gang select the lines required then re allocate them to another gang The lines retrieved can be further restricted by the selection of other criteria 3 14 2 Selection Criteria These fields are used to restrict the work order lines retrieved in the work order lines block the more fields entered the more restrictions will be applied Making no selections in this block will retrieve all unallocated
184. be automatically refreshed when the work order is re queried Status Display Only This field will display a status code derived from the various status codes of the work order lines to indicate the overall status of the work order Status codes can be viewed in form Status Codes HIG9110 Work Order Status codes control the work ordering processes and should not be added to or modified without direct consultation with exor Contract Required List Select a valid contract under which this work will be carried out Contracts are set up using Contracts MAI3880 Only Contracts with a status of ACTIVE will be displayed If you have set up a dummy contract using Product Options HIG9130 and setting the DUMCONCODE option this contract can be selected this will allow you to fully define the work order before assigning it to a contract Once you have specified the relevant Bill of Quantity items for this work order press the Contract Totals button to view a list of suitable contracts If product Option WORREFGEN is set to either C for Contract Based Works Order Reference Number generation or A for Administration Unit Works Order Reference Number Generation and the initial Contract selected is changed the Works Order will be Cancelled and an exact copy made with the new reference number being generated The original Works Order will have Cancelled appended to the start of it s description Contractor Display Only
185. be displayed for the user to select the desired theme The form will then display a pop up window prompting the User to select a Geometry type for the new Work Order Line shape Version 4 7 79 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc iod 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT e Geometry Type Selection Continue Cancel Figure 80 Geometry Type Selection Once a Geometry Type has been selected and the Continue button selected Locator will be called in Multi Point mode with the map zoomed to the current Work Order Line shape um ator NM0572 DORSET quartz exdl15 ma TOI IS ee J bs C ra ree v All Items no location restriction Name Description T Entire stat 7 Search For Scale 16 71 Mom 1 1671 41 94 Hoet 36953822882 113239 3705 Active Layer WORK ORDER LINES Attribute Not Set Figure 81 Locator Work order line selection To define the new shape for the Work Order Line select Send Multiple Points to application from the Feature Edit Menu button in the Map as shown below Version 4 7 80 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document i
186. cepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc cdd Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 sedato WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT The List of Values will only contain those items that have the BOQ Percent Uplift set to Y in Standard Items MAI3888 WOL Uplift Item Optional List Enter the Work Order Line uplift item this item will uplift the entire work order line The List of Values will only contain those items that have the WOL Percent Uplift set to Y in Standard Items MAI3888 Note When a Repair having either BOQ or WOL Percent Uplift Item Codes assigned is added to a Work Order a check is made against the Contract for that work order to determine if the Standard Item Code has been assigned as a Contract Item and that the contract will allow for Percentage Uplifts If not the user will be prevented from saving or Instructing the Work Order 3 12 6 Percentage Uplifting of the value of an individual work order line Entering a BOQ uplift item to a work order line will uplift the value of the work order line by applying the percentage uplift only to those BOQ items that have been flagged as Allow Percent Items Y in Standard Items MAI3888 In addition if the entire work order line needs a percentage uplift entering a WOL Uplift item to the work order line will apply the uplift to the
187. chedule item was added on completion Select the Cancel button to return to the previous window BOQ Items are set up and maintained using Standard Items MAI3888 e Defect Summary Acty Defect Defect Defect Date Road Id Road Name Area Type Status Priority Location Inspected g008C142 0 00004 CHAPEL LANE BONDS LANE TO NE FC POTH AVAILABLE M _ 123456789012345678901234567600123 16 JAN 2007 5012206650 00002 HILLINGDON ROAD STANDEN HALL FC POTH COMPLETED W 15 JAN 2007 5012206640 00004 FELL VIEW FELL VIEW CUL DE SA FC POTH suPERsEDED Ww 15 JAN 2007 5012206630 00004 UNDERLEY STREET MARSDENROA FC POTH SUPERSEDED 15 JAN 2007 5012208620 00006 MARSDEN ROAD REEDLEY DRIVE TFC POTH SUPERSEDED 15 JAN 2007 40036120 0 00002 CALDER AVENUE BERRY LANE TO FC POTH AVAILABLE 15 JAN 2007 40036041 0 00002 HIGHER ROAD KING STREET TO FOIFC POTH AVAILABLE 15 JAN 2007 5012206610 00004 MARSDEN ROAD MARSDEN ROAD T FC POTH SUPERSEDED 15 JAN 2007 5012206600 00002 BORROWDALE CLOSE BORROWDA FC POTH SUPERSEDED 15 JAN 2007 40035122 0 00002 WHEATLEY DRIVE GREEN LANE TO FC POTH SUPERSEDED 15 JAN 2007 2006506480 00002 THE DRIVE FULWOOD HALL LANE TFC POTH COMPLETED 15 JAN 2007 2006C356 0 00003 JEPPS LANE FORSET GROVE TO BMC POTH INSTRUCTED 15 JAN 2007 50124646 0 00004 BURNLEY ROAD LCC BDY TO RAILVFC POTH_ AVAILABLE location 15 JAN 2007 2006C356 0 00005 JEPPS LANE FORSET GROVE TO BAMC POTH
188. ck in the Invoice field and enter the appropriate value Press Save on the menu toolbar to save the changes If the Works Order Line has had a number of Interim Payments made against it this is a good way to track the payments made to date Press the Close button to return to the Works Order Line window 3 12 20Making Interim Payments Interim payments can be made on part of an individual Works Order Line if needed This may used where the work ordered on a Works Order line may take a long period of time to complete or is of very high value As work proceeds the Contractor may require payment for the work he has completed to date Interim payments allow the Standard Items quantities to be amended to show the actual amount of work done to date or for new Standard Items to be added Once the actual quantities have been added the Works Order Line can then be included in a payment run As the work progresses further this Interim Payment process can be repeated until the work is Completed and the Final Payment is made If an Interim Payment is made on a Works Order Line raised to repair a defect the defect status will be set to STR MAIN the Status Code with feature 6 allowed A Works Order cannot be completed until all the Works Order Lines on the Works Order are Completed Interim payments can only be made on Works Orders that have the Interim Payment flag set to Y This flag can be changed at any time To make an Interim Payment foll
189. ckbox remains checked for those work order lines that remain against the notice so the notices can be generated e If itis the only WOL against the Notice and the WOL has more than one Notices against it then a warning is issued WOL has more than 1 USRN s deselecting this WOL will not create any notice against it The check box get deselected and also deselects this WOL from other TMA Notices in the form and the Select Notice check box becomes non selectable for this WOL so no notice can be generated E Show Map when the user has highlights a notice in the top half of the form they may select the Show Map button to display the USRN that has been selected Version 4 7 129 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR PF MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Ss WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 3 6 3 Work Order Lines Tab o Order TMA Interface TMA3990 DORSET quartz exdl15 MAI v4 0 5 0 Work Order Work Order DEF AULT S Description DORSET DEF AULT B Date Raised 21 FEB 2009 e Work Order Lines Work Order Lines TMA Notice WOL Id Location Road Id Description Defect Id Type Priority End Date Count 474375 opposite lic 34 1200C129 0012 JCT U C ROAD HOLDITCH TO SOMERSET 361531 POTH 21 o 4 justheforete
190. comes to payment the Works Order or Works Order Line is held because actual values of the work are in excess of the allowable differences between estimated values and actual values the actual values may need to be re entered This is carried out with the following procedure Retrieve the completed works order that needs amending Move to the relevant works order line Change the status back to INSTRUCTED Save the change x cd im This will result in the actual quantities and costs for the selected works order line being removed the completed dates will be cleared in both the selected works order line and the main works order window and the actual costs will be updated in the works order window Costs will be returned to Committed from Actuals within Budgets Follow the procedure for completing a Works Order to enter the amended actual values Version 4 7 197 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR y 8 MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 B en le d Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 13 Works Order Line Budget Reallocation MAI3620 Maintenance Manager a gt Inventory gt Inspections Cg Works LJ Contracts C Interfaces Financial Deselect Items for Payment D D D s Figure 170 Work Order
191. cted Gang Required If Gang Allocation has been used to allocate a gang to the repair of this defect the gang id will be displayed Work Cat Required The work category for the selected defect will be displayed If budgets are being used a commitment will be made against this Item code The current position of the Budget can be displayed by double clicking this field as shown below The current value of work committed the actual value of work carried and the overall balance will be displayed for each Budget The Upper Limit of the Budget will also be displayed Description Budget Committed Actual Balance CostCode Year ATLAS jb test3 0 1375 0 1375 2008 ATLAS jb test 2 1000 2600 75 1875 2008 2315 ATLAS jb test 1000 750 250 2006 2315 Test Budget 5 500000 15137 385 484468 2006 2315 ATLAS test 2 250000 0 2050 247950 2006 2315 Budget Test 200000 250 0 199750 2006 2315 Test Budget 2 200000 8075 95 23659 5 168264 55 2006 2315 ot 1nnnn INRA AT 3204 89731 A3 2nnf 2315 ar Figure 97 Work Category Repaired Display Only The date and time of the defect repair will be displayed Version 4 7 99 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR P MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE j WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT
192. ction Description Schedule of Rate Item Code Schedule of Rate Description Unit Rate Quantity Estimated Value of Works Order Line including any percentage discount 4 7 1 Selection Parameters Confirmed Works Order No Required Enter the Works Order Number to be reported on Version 4 7 225 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc E gj Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Missi tare WORKS ORDERING REPORTS 4 7 2 Work Orders NMA MAI3909 DORSET DORSET COUNTY COUNCIL Date 21 MAY 2009 MAI3909 Print Works Order NMA Page 1 Contractor County Routine Maintenance Contractor Agent DORSET COUNTY COUNCIL Contract 8 902 C Work Order 902C 2 Job Number 00000 Work Category Scheme Type LR Order Te t Stu 101 Description Commence By Ext of Time CI l4 Programme N Complete By Rev ComplBy Risk Assessment N Def Corr Period Completed On 07 MAY 2008 Method Statement N Commence On Interim Pay Y Special CDM ON Quality Acc Defect Id 361499 Description Location Special Cost Code Work Category 070131 Section 1200A353 P 00934 Description SWANNERY BRIDGE KING S R A TO WESTHAM R A WEYMOUIH SOR Item Description Unit Rate Quantity Amount 29 01 001 TMA Mobile lane close ad
193. cument including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 B en le d Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS 2 2 12 Manually Completing a Defect If a defect has been completed because of some other work that has been carried out on the highway it can be manually completed on the system as follows Using either Defects MAI3806 or View Defects by Section MAI3810 locate the defect and select the Edit Defect button This will take you to Inspections MAI3808 where the defect details can then be modified 1 In the Repairs for Defects window enter the Date Completed 2 Select Save 3 The Status Reason pop up will appear where a reason for the status change should be entered Reason For Status Change Defect completed as part of a scheme Figure 21 Status change 4 Select Save The defect status will automatically be updated to Completed The history of changes made to the defect status can be viewed using Audit Details HIG1505 Rules for the audit should be set up by the system administrator in form Audit Details HIG1500 Refer to the Audit Manager manual for further details Note The above procedure can only be carried out if the Product Option REPCOMPDATE is set to Y Do not change the status of the defect to completed manually
194. d Defects BOQ Items Per Imm M Tmp Figure 19 Repairs Button 2 2 10 Repairs This window is displayed when the Repairs button is selected To return to the defects window select the Defects button Category Required Default List Select the defect category Permanent Temporary or Immediate A repair category will only be available for the selected activity and defect if it has been previously set up using Defect Priorities MAI3812 Maintenance Manager System Administrator Manual Status Display Only Displays the current status of the repair This status is the status of the works order line and is maintained by Works Orders Defects MAI3800 and Payment Run MAI3840 Date Repair Due Display Only Displays the date by which the repair should be completed This is calculated by the system based on the date of inspection and the defect priority Desc Optional If required enter a text description of the repair to be carried out Date Instructed Display Only When this defect has been instructed added to a works order the date of instruction will appear in this field Treatment Optional List Select the treatment to be used to rectify this defect A description will be displayed in the adjacent field Valid treatment codes will have been previously associated to activities and defects using Treatment Data MAI1315 Maintenance Manager System Administrator Manual
195. d against an Asset If multiple Assets are selected a separate Defect will be created for each When Defects are created using this option the spatial position of the Defect is derived from the centroid of the associated Asset The figures below show examples of Defects raised against Point Line and Polygon Assets respectively Defects are shown as Red Stars Point feature Bus Stop circled Defect positioned at same X Y position as feature Figure 38 Point Feature Version 4 7 40 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR gt o MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 Be ntle y MANAGING INSPECTIONS Line feature Lane highlighted in Green Defect positioned at mid point of line Figure 39 Line Feature Polygon feature Building Unit Defect positioned at center of Polygon Figure 40 Polygon Feature To create a defect on an asset the asset s in question must firstly be selected This can be done using the Locator Search functionality or by using the Navigation and Feature Selection tools available within the Map window If a Locator Search is used to select and zoom to the required asset s the Asset Layer will automatically be made the Active Layer When selecting an asset directly from the Map window the appropriate Asse
196. d by Date 16 APR 96 i To Authorised by Date Completed 23 NOV 99 Time Completed Mhrs 7days 28days Other Completed by Date 23 NOV 99 Signed for Contractor p a cc 1 Signed for Client uz DESCRIPTION Emergency Repairs to Safety Fence Signs amp Manhole 2 m OF WORK E i i Works Order Total item ink Chainage ltem TM lo m Link Section du End XSP Type Description Unit 4 469 1 fio 19 03 No Action defect descr 0 2 A69 ps 15 03 No Action defect descr 0 Figure 183 Part 2 LIVE2108 LIVE2 108 NORTH PENNINE LINK GROUP aC 1999 MAD485 Print Works Order Unoriced t DTp Local Agency LINK JobCode item Code Year Works Order No Dip 2900A69 1 020401 1999 200003 Description Road Sections on Works Order 2 00003 Section Section Class 10 All Purpose GREENHEAD DUALING EASTBOUND FROM B630 i iM All Purpose CM2HALTWHISTLE E TO U7051 MELKRIDGE N j Figure 184 Part 3 Version 4 7 216 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc acu Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE e Sustaining Infrastructure WORKS ORDERING REPORTS 4 3 Work Order Priced MAI3480 Purpose This option produces a 2 part report The first provides a Priced Works Order and includes the following
197. d changes are displayed can be determined by setting a value in the Order By field In addition work order auditing may be carried out using Audit Manager see the Audit Manager User Guide The type of audited changes displayed can be determined by clicking the appropriate check box in the Show Changes portion of the window as shown below Show Changes C Work Order C Work Order Line BOQ C Payments The changes displayed can be restricted to the following areas e Main Works Order changes e Works Order Line changes Version 4 7 111 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Ss Sastalaleg Vutrestiicture WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT e Bill Of Quantity changes e Payment detail changes The following information is displayed WOL Display Only The Defect Id or Works Order Line number will be displayed BOQ Display Only The BOQ Standard Item Code will be displayed Initials Display Only The initials of the User who made the change will be displayed Date Display Only The Date and Time on which the changes were made will be displayed Item Changed Display Only A brief description of the Item changed will be displayed Change New Value Display Only Th
198. d concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE ol Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Payment Id Payment Value Date Paid Invoice 221 47 50 23 JAN 2007 TDS18J 44 4 Figure 113 Invoices 3 5 18 Invoices Once a Works Order Line or Part of a Works Order Line in the case of an Interim payment has been included in payment run the Invoice details can be displayed by pressing the Invoices button on the Works Order Line window The Payment Id Payment Value and Date Paid will be displayed To add the Invoice number click in the Invoice field and enter the appropriate value Press Save on the menu toolbar to save the changes If the Works Order Line has had a number of Interim Payments made against it this is a good way to track the payments made to date Press the Close button to return to the Works Order Line window 3 5 19 Making Interim Payments Interim payments can be made on part of an individual Works Order Line if needed This may used where the work ordered on a Works Order line may take a long period of time to complete or is of very high value As work proceeds the Contractor may require payment for the work he has completed to date Interim payments allow the Standard Items quantities to be amended to show the actual amount of work done to date o
199. d concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc pc 5 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustalning Mifrastrictire WORKS ORDERING REPORTS 4 18 2 Admin Unit Performance MAI3956 LIVE2108 LIVED be NORTH PENNINI LINK GROUP Dee 29 DEC IO MALI Admin Unit Performance Repon Pace d Bni Period To lt Within 09 1Dos f HipDws Lele Des Gromer an Work wiin Bosi Grow Prem Target Late Laie Lex 1805 Taal Wrines of Tins 0900459 L No 4 4 5 53 Me n 75 09 24 0 0 o 0 5 o o HE t o 0 0 n 28 0 351 i 1 0 0 n 1 426 ET 4 4 5 im MI i 55 2900459 i 5 10 1 167 19 DE 21 n 0 o o 2 o 9 22 o 0 0 o 23 12 a M 4 1919 n u Los xs 15 n 1738 to i585 1900449 2 i 101 m E E sue 168 5 21 0 o o 1 1 o 23 9 0 o o orn 1091 4 m 10 1289 1611 m 633 A 10 1 AT HI Is J 91 I 46 15 11 1 0 o o 2 o 100 23 a 0 2 3 o 0 u n 1s 3 M ie i m6 Jda e w aM 1494 245 40 6 Foe All 7 0 222 22 1 o 0 o i2 Semen 33 E E M 4 ns ne tar o 0 0 o 0 0 0 4n m s5 n 1629 801 ee 166 Figure 200 Part 1 Version 4 7 248 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 Be n le
200. d to completed the completion date of the works order line must be entered Gang Optional List Enter the Gang that was use to carry out the work Gangs are enabled by setting the Product Option GANGENABLE to Y The list of values is maintained in Domains HIG9120 and update the GANG domain Work Cat Display Only The work category for the selected defect will be displayed Remarks Display Only Edit Enter any remarks regarding the works order line will be displayed Act Cost Display Only This field will display the actual cost of repairing this defect As the actual cost is only known once the defect has been repaired and the status updated to COMPLETED or PART PAID in the case of an Interim payment this field will initially be blank Target Date Display Only This field will display the target date and time for the work order line The date and time displayed here will depend on how the system administrator has set the system to behave with regard to target dates See the target date for work order lines Figure 96 For information on making an Interim Payment refer to the section Completing a Works Order Line with an Interim Payment above Version 4 7 156 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR
201. d will always be blank when dealing with cyclic works order lines Defect Type This field will always be blank when dealing with cyclic works order lines Defect Priority This field will always be blank when dealing with cyclic works order lines Asset Ref Display Only If this work order is as a result of a schedule where the By Asset flag set to Y in the Cyclic Maintenance By Road Section Form MAI3862 the Asset Ref will be displayed Asset Id Display Only If this work order is as a result of a schedule where the By Asset flag set to Y in the Cyclic Maintenance By Road Section Form MAI3862 the Asset Id will be displayed Treatment This field will always be blank when dealing with cyclic works order lines Sheet This field will always be blank when dealing with cyclic works order lines Lab Units Display Only Displays the number of labour units estimated to rectify this defect This is derived from the contract under which this works order is being raised If the Labour Units field is blank check that the current job item appears on the contract Schedule Display Only This field will display the cyclic maintenance schedule number Version 4 7 176 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley
202. dard Items Description Mobile Lane Closure for Chapter 8 2006 Plan MLC1 but using a block vehicle and one other vehicle or trailer mounted sign behind the working vehicle one lane closed adjacent to verge of all purpose unrestricted dual two lane carriageway Unit Min Quantity Max Quantity Lab Unit Factor Est Lab Units HOUR 0 00 99999999 99 Boq Details Dimension 1 Dimension 2 Dimension 3 Quantity Rate Cost Estimates 10 qo 0 1803 Actuals nri SS a eS Last Valuation Value Status Date Entered Paid Figure 161 BOQ Details This window can be called by pressing the Expand button in the menu toolbar when a BOQ item is selected It is useful when entering quantities because if the items are banded this window will show the minimum and maximum allowed values Details of the estimated and actual values are also displayed If the Works Order Line on which the selected BOQ item is on is part of an Interim Payment the Last Valuation cost Status and the Date the Valuation was entered or the payment made will be displayed When entering a Valuation for an Interim Payment the Minimum Quantity limit for the Standard Item is overridden but the Maximum Quantity limit is retained Select Cancel to return to the BOQ Items window Version 4 7 188 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts
203. dard job items which do not appear on the current contract for this works order These items can be identified as the Rate field will be empty indicating that there is no known unit rate for this item in the selected contract In this situation the software will not be able to calculate the Total Qty for this item and can therefore not cost the works order correctly This can be used effectively when comparing multiple contracts the contract selected when raising the works order may not be the contract suitable once all the schedule items have been entered To circumvent this situation you must do one of the following actions e Replace the job item with an item which appears on the current contract e Replace the job item with a Rogue Item e Select a different contract e Add the missing item to the current contract As a general rule the works order can only be issued and printed when all the items on it have a rate either from the contract or as rogue items Version 4 7 110 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc pon 34 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 5 10 Works Order Audit IB Works Order Audit Work Order ATLAS 1 35 Order by Initials Date Item Changed Change O
204. der Line History Gang Crew Allocation Work Orders Authorisation View Cyclic Maintenance Work Cyclic Maintenance Schedules Cyclic Maintenance Schedules by Road Section Maint Report Quality Inspection Results Figure 174 Cancel Works Orders Menu Option Version 4 7 204 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR 5 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT fd Cancel Work Orders MAI3610 Work Order AEDAILY 1 grass cutting first cut Road Type LINK Road Id 3008F45199 Scheme Type LR Contract AEDAILY area east daily action response team Contractor DART Daily action response team Originator SYS SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR Cost Centre Authorised By Job Number 00000 Cost Recharged Contractor Score Remarks Date Raised 04 DEC 2006 Estimates Actuals Target Complete 13 DEC 2006 Sub Total Date Instructed Balancing Sum Last Printed Total Cost Date Completed Labour Units Cancel Works Order ll Figure 175 Cancel Work Order 3 15 1 General Information This option is the only means of cancelling a works order Works Orders are also marked as Cancelled if the selected Contract is changed on the Works Order form When a works order is cancelled it can be viewed
205. der lines that have no associated Defects may not be added to the Works Order unless Product Option ADDPRINT is set to Y Changes made to a Works Order its associated Work Order lines or Bill of Quantity Items may be viewed using the Audit facility within a Works Order The Audit window may be called by pressing the Expand button on the main Works Ordering form It is possible to define what items in a Works Order are to be Audited by selecting the required fields using form Works Order Audit Maintenance MAI3803 The size of the Audit log trail can be restricted by setting Product Option AUDIT ALL to N If this option is set to N only the initial and final values of a field are recorded in the Audit trail per session per User and any intermediate changes are not logged If Product Option AUDIT ALL is set to Y then all interim changes between saving changes to the selected fields are logged It should be noted that for some Works Orders the audit trail could be very large if this option is set to Y 3 5 20 Work Order When you enter this window the cursor sits in the Work Order description field waiting for you to enter a new works order If you wish to retrieve an existing works order press Enter Query enter your selection criteria then press Execute Query to retrieve the works order Whilst in this window you can view the Work Order Audit details by pressing the Expand button in the toolbar at any time Work Orde
206. e Version 4 7 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc 62 vieil Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE e Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS 2 11 2 Section Details When you enter this window the cursor sits in the Link ID field waiting for you to enter your selection criteria followed by Execute Query to retrieve details of the required section The following fields can be used with wildcards to query back existing section details Link ID Agency Linkcode Section Road Number Length Description 2 11 3 Defect to be Superseded All available defects on the selected road section will be queried back if you are manually superseding a defect you will probably know the defect id of the defect to be superseded Select Enter Query enter the defect id in the Defect Serial Number field followed by Execute Query to retrieve the defect The following information will be displayed Defect Serial Number Length of the Defect Cross Sectional Position of the Defect Inspection Date Defect Priority Start Chainage Activity Area Repair Date Due Defect Type Description Defect Status 2 11 4 Superseding Defect All available and instructed defects for the selected road section will be queried back once again if
207. e Next Notice Type notice The user can then make changes and view errors and warnings prior to sending to the Register 2 Ifa notice has already been sent they can select the View TMA Works button to view Works TMA1000 Y X Select all and deselect all can be used to select the notices if required When the Checkbox is selected the following validation is carried out e Ifa notice is selected the system will search for all TMA Notices against the work order line and marks all notices associated with the work order line as selected e Ifa notice is selected that has multiple work order lines then all the notices against those work order lines will be selected TMA Works Description Display Only The Works Description that had been entered and edited using Send Notice to Register TMA1800 will be displayed WOL Id Display Only The unique system generated work order line Id will be displayed Location Display Only The defect location will be displayed if the selected work order line is a defect clearance line Road Id Display Only The road id for the selected work order line will be displayed Description Display Only The road section description for the work order line will be displayed Defect Id Display Only For defect clearance work order lines the defect Id will be displayed Type Display Only For defect clearance work orders the defect type code will be displayed for exam
208. e When this button is selected a pop up window is displayed allowing the user to enter a date that is prior to the sysdate enabling the creation of retrospective work orders Note A user will only be able to authorise a work order if they have been given the appropriate permission by the system administrator using Maintenance Manager User Data MAIA410 When the User attempts to Authorise a Works Order the Date Authorised field is used to determine the total value of Works Orders already Authorised by the User on the same day If the value of the current Works Order would lead to the User s Daily Authorisation Limit see the Max value per Day field in Maintenance Manager User Data MAI4410 being exceeded an error will be displayed and the current Works Order will not be Authorised Instruct When this button is selected a pop up window is displayed containing the current date and time sysdate this allows the user to enter a date that is prior to the sysdate enabling the creation of retrospective work orders Version 4 7 95 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc acu Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 Biedafg hits WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT If the work order has not been authorised this will also authorise the work order provided
209. e Reports Details of the maintenance carried out on the selected section will be displayed Date Work Done Required Enter the date the maintenance activity took place Inspector s Initials Optional List Select the initials of the inspector s St Chain Required Default Enter the start number of the chain This field defaults to zero End Chain Required Default Enter the end number of the chain This field defaults to the end of the section 5 6 4 Activities The activities carried out will be displayed Activity Area Required List Enter a valid activity are for the cyclic maintenance work that has been carried out Description Display Only The corresponding description for the activity area will be displayed Version 4 7 270 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR E MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 B en le d Sustaining Infrastructure CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERS ADMIN 5 7 Valid for Maintenance Rules MAI3440 8 Maintenance Manager amp Inventory c3 Inspections 3 Works Z3 Contracts Z3 Interfaces a Reference Inventory gt Inspections a Maintenance Activities Activity Groups Local Activity Frequencies Default Section Intervals Calculation
210. e USRN that the notice is for Note For 0200 and 0210 notices the primary recipient of the notice is derived from the street ASD If there are a number of interested parties in the street copy recipients are identified and included on the notice but not shown on the form Note For other notice types the primary and copy recipients of the opening 0200 0210 notice are identified and those are the ones included on the notice As before copy recipients may be included on the notice but not shown on the form Works Category Default List For Initial notices this will display the default works category as set up in the Defaults button This can be amended if required if changed it will update the estimated start date field For other notices it is the current value from the works phase Number of Phases Default Version 4 7 133 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR P MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 2 WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure For Initial notices this will display the default value as set up in the Defaults button This can be amended if required For other notices it is the current value from the works phase Works Description Default For Initial notices this will display
211. e distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ion 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure PAYMENTS Apply V A T Y N Optional List Enter Y to apply VAT to all the job item costs Select the Process Payment Run button to carry out the payment run The following three reports will be produced 7 2 5 Payment Run Report A HIG2204 Demo 2204 Payment Run Id 9 Payment Date 28 NOV 2000 MAI3840A Payment Run ort Page 1 Docket No 10 Admin Unit Demo 2204 Contract Id DSO1 Internal DLO Contractor Contractor DEC Exor Contractor W Order Defect Id Road Id Description Charge Code Sheet Schedule Id Location Schedule Name SISS Quantity Units Comp Date This Rate Payment 1 115 103 0012400012 01 opposite l c 22 3ALL 000004 28 MAR 2000 2946 90 damaged asset ALL OLO001 29 HOURS 7 60 220 40 OMO001 1 ITEM 13 30 13 30 000001 12 ITEM 14 25 171 00 OPooo1 12 ITEM 211 85 2542 20 1 116 105 0012400012 01 opposite l c 33 3ALL 000004 28 MAR 2000 812250 damaged ALL OL0001 44 HOURS 7 60 334 40 OM0001 t ITEM 13 30 13 30 000001 55 ITEM 1425 78335 PODO 33 ITEM 211 85 6991 05 1 117 107 0012400012 01 3ALL 000004 28 MAR 2000 9688 10 damaged ALL OLO001 13 HOURS 7 60 98 80 OMO0001 1 ITEM 13 30 13 30 000001 3 ITEM 14 25 4275 OPooo1 45 ITEM 211 85 9533 25 1 121 42 0016400016 02 3ALL 000004 30 MAR 2000 300 00 ALL A22222 44 Hours 4 50 198 00 P11111 12 m 8 50 102 00 1 12
212. e new value of the changed item will be displayed Old Value Display Only The old value of the changed item will be displayed To close the Works Order Audit and return to the main Works Order form press the Close button on the window Audit Manager can now be used to audit the changes to a work order work order line or BOQ items Version 4 7 112 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ia 5 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 5 11 BOQ Details a BOQ Items Defect 361563 Item Details Item Code 29 01 001 TMA Mobile lane close adj verge block working veh sign vehicle trailer Section Traffic Safety Management Sub Section AlI Standard Items Description Mobile Lane Closure for Chapter 8 2006 Plan MLC1 but using a block vehicle and one other vehicle or trailer mounted sign behind the working vehicle one lane closed adjacent to verge of all purpose unrestricted dual two lane carriageway Unit Min Quantity Max Quantity Lab Unit Factor Est Lab Units HOUR 0 00 99999999 99 Bog Details Dimension 1 Dimension 2 Dimension 3 Quantity Rate Cost Estimates 1 o 19503 Actuals EE EE T DERE ee ERR
213. e order is not issued the estimated cost will be displayed if the order is complete the estimated costs are copied and will be displayed as actual costs Details of both the estimated and actual costs and quantities can be viewed for each item by selecting the Expand button from the toolbar Add Check Box If this item is to attract a percentage increase or decrease using a Percentage Item tick this box Note that only Standard Job Items which have the Allow Percentage Flag flag set to Y in Standard Items MAI3888 can have a Percentage Item associated with them For information on adding Percentage Items to a Works Order line refer to the section Adding Percentage Items to a Works Order Line below BOQ Uplift Item Optional List Enter the BOQ uplift item this item will uplift all the BOQ items that have the Allow Percent Items field set to Y in Standard Items MAI3888 Version 4 7 107 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR P MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE S WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure The List of Values will only contain those items that have the BOQ Percent Uplift set to Y in Standard Items MAI3888 WOL Uplift Item Optional List Enter
214. e use of dummy sections each section may be used to represent one of your Depots 3 10 1 Creating Dummy Sections It is important that prior to adding dummy sections to your road network that you first discuss the implications of doing so with your Network Manager or Systems Administrator you may wish to discuss numbering and naming conventions so you do not accidentally use the dummy network for anything other that it was intended The following procedure details a method of creating dummy sections for use in works ordering additional road group types road groups and gazetteer entries can be made if required Each road section starts and ends with a Node a new dummy node will need to be created for use with the dummy sections This is carried out using Nodes NMOIOI Create a new dummy section give the link and section meaningful descriptions This is carried out using Elements NM0105 Create a new road group of type TOP this will ensure the new sections can be accessed through the gazetteer add the new sections to that group This is carried out using Groups of Sections NM0110 A works order can now be raised against the new TOP group defined above Other work can now be added to the order Version 4 7 150 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent
215. e user has returned points that do not match the selected Geometry Type and error will be raised and the Work Order Line shape will not be updated for example e If the user selected Point and returns more than one point from the map the following error will be raised Version 4 7 82 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc oe 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sistalning Mifrastrictire WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Cannot create Point Please select a single point from the map to create a Point Figure 84 Error Message e If the user selects Line and only returns one point from the map the following error will be raised Cannot create Line Please select two or more points from the map to create a Line Figure 85 Error Message e Ifthe User selects Polygon and returns less than 3 points from the map the following error will be raised Cannot create Polygon Please select three or more points from the map to create a Polygon Figure 86 Error Message e Finally if the user selects Polygon and the points returned lead to a self intersecting Polygon for example Version 4 7 83 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary i
216. e will change when the defect is placed on a works order that is subject to contract rates as opposed to the standard rates entered using Standard Items MAI3888 Maintenance System Administration Manual Act Cost Display Only Displays the actual cost for the job This will be blank until the defect is placed on a works order the work is completed ant the contractor has entered the actual dimensions of the work BOQ Uplift Item Optional List Enter the BOQ uplift item this item will uplift all the BOQ items that have the Allow Percent Items field set to Y in Standard Items MAI3888 The List of Values will only contain those items that have the BOQ Percent Uplift set to Y in Standard Items MAI3888 WOL Uplift Item Optional List Enter the Work Order Line uplift item this item will uplift the entire work order line The List of Values will only contain those items that have the WOL Percent Uplift set to Y in Standard Items MATI3888 Note When a Repair having either BOQ or WOL Percent Uplift Item Codes assigned is added to a Work Order a check is made against the Contract for that work order to determine if the Standard Item Code has been assigned as a Contract Item and that the contract will allow for Percentage Uplifts If not the user will be prevented from saving or Instructing the Work Order Version 4 7 24 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this do
217. eate a small scheme work order on the network firstly navigate to the appropriate map extent using the Locator Search facilities the Map window Navigation tools or a combination of both Using the Layer Control Tool make the network layer the active layer Layer Control Toot J Apply individual Changes immediately AMONT v E Layer Name Acive Visible rt I E E E Figure 45 Layer Control Tool Using the Feature Selection menu select the sections to be added to the small scheme work order Rae CoP S Select By Rectangle Select By Polygon Select Nearest Feature Figure 46 Feature Selection Menu Version 4 7 45 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc E gj Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS The Confirm Selection window will appear in the map window Select OK to continue amp amp d amp amp O 20 SO c ES t E Fina Feature Z Essting 352163 eases 122556 96 Nortring 56439 fasse 132000 Butter 200 e Search Description searen For s n 2 n lE P iz p f oc Farm ms peen ee o2 memo onea HHHH 351628 27044 9572227817 Active Layer LIVE NETWORK L At
218. ed Enter your selection criteria and press Execute Query to retrieve the inspection s Press Delete Record to delete the inspection details Note that once deleted an inspection cannot be undeleted As such care should be exercised when using this form Version 4 7 68 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR 2 MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE e Be ntle y MANAGING INSPECTIONS 2 14 Batch Setting of Repair Dates MAI2775 E Maintenance Manager HE Inventory HE Inspections Inspections Inspections by Group Defects View Defects Responses to Notices Match Duplicate Defects Unmatch Duplicate Defects Delete Inspections Batch Setting of Repair Dat Gr Reports Figure 72 Batch Setting of Repair Dates Menu Option I ERIT Setting of Repair Dates MAI2775 Link Id 000009999 Agency 0000 Linkcode 09999 Section 00001 Local Dtp L Exclude Defects between Start Chain End Chain Defects Category 2 Advisory Roadstuds Defect Type Figure 73 Batch Setting of Repair Dates Version 4 7 69 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written cons
219. ed enter the earliest Date Inspected to be included on the report Only those Defect Records recorded after this date will be included in the report To Date Optional If required enter the latest Date Inspected to be included on the report Only those Defect Records before this date will be included in the report Defect Type Optional List If required enter the Defect Type to be included on the report If this field is left blank all defect types will be included Defect Priority Optional List If required enter the defect priority to be reported on If this field is left blank all defect priorities will be included To report on multiple Defect Priorities press the Create Record button on the toolbar SISS Optional List Version 4 7 235 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR 5 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sasa tania on WORKS ORDERING REPORTS If required enter the Standard Item Sub Section SISS to be reported on If this field is left blank all SISS Codes will be included To include multiple SISS codes press the Create Record button on the toolbar Item Code Optional List If required enter the Item code to be reported on If this field is left blank all Item Codes will
220. eeaeecaaecaeenaeenaeenatens 76 3 2 1 General Information ere eee tee rem eee re ep Garde a NEEE Ea ER a EEEE 76 3 3 Work Orders MAI3800 View through Locator seen eene TI 3 3 1 General Information reeec eee etae eee re inse oe ee teta tna pente eae eoe n etaed ae or ea edu TI 3 4 Work Orders MAI3800 Edit Default WOL Shape eene 79 3 4 1 General Informati edic erre red e YRRRS CHEER SERERE yedensenunce SERT CARA EEE S Pe RE dS 79 3 5 Works Orders Defects MAIB3800 essessssssessesseeeeeeeennr enne ennemi nr enne ennt nnne 86 3 5 1 General Information eet cores tpe neas dre yere eue os gua rea esee ves ius ESEESE EEE ENEE Pan 86 3 5 2 Work Order i ice eee IRE cates RARE L HEREIN ER ERA RRRES ERE ERR TRE ERR TEES NERIS ENG Tee 87 3 5 3 Work Order Lines ci EUM 97 3 5 4 Selection OVISUERTR IRI DLL TL ILE 103 3 5 5 segue A 106 3 5 6 Percentage Uplifting of the value of an individual work order line 108 3 5 7 Adding Individual Percentage Items to a BOQ Item eee 108 3 5 8 Adding a Percentage BOQ Item sese nene nnne 109 3 5 9 Adding Non Contract Items to a Works Order eee 110 EXOR E MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 Be ntle y TABLE OF CONTENTS 33 10 Works Order AUI oer ert rer assein enne brian hn eee e E nE ih
221. efects situated in the specified roads will be selected for inclusion on the current works order Version 4 7 103 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR P MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 6 WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure Asset Type Optional List If required enter an Type of Asset defect shave been raised against The list of values will only display asset items for the selected Road Group Asset Ref Optional Enter the Asset Reference of the Item to be selected Id Optional Enter the Asset Id of the item to be selected Defect Priorities 1 6 Optional List If required select up to 6 defect priority codes Only those defects with matching priority codes will be selected for inclusion on this works order Defect Types 1 6 Optional List If required select up to 6 defect types Only those defects with matching defect types will be selected for inclusion on this works order Treatment Types 1 6 Optional List If required select up to 6 treatment type codes Only those defects with matching treatment type codes will be selected for inclusion on this works order SISS Codes 1 6 Optional List If required select up to 6 Standard Item Sub Section SISS cod
222. elates to the Total Qty field described above Rate Display Only Displays the rate per unit for this work item as held on the contract under which this works order is being created If a rouge item is added the rate must also be added to the item Cost Display Only If the order is not issued the estimated cost will be displayed if the order is complete the actual cost will be displayed Details of both the estimated and actual costs and quantities can be viewed for each item by selecting the Expand button from the toolbar Add Check Box If this item is to attract a percentage increase or decrease using a Percentage Item tick this box Note that only Standard Job Items which have the Allow Percentage Flag flag set to Y in Standard Items MAI3888 can have a Percentage Item associated with them For information on adding Percentage Items to a Works Order line refer to the section Adding Percentage Items to a Works Order Line below Total Est Labour Display Only Displays the total estimated labour costs for the cyclic works Total Cost Display Only Displays the total cost of the cyclic works BOQ Uplift Item Optional List Enter the BOQ uplift item this item will uplift all the BOQ items that have the Allow Percent Items field set to Y in Standard Items MAI3888 Version 4 7 181 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and con
223. em as set up using Standard Items MAI3888 Maintenance System Administration Manual an error message will result press Expand to view the allowable quantity range Unit Display Only Displays the unit of measurement used for costing this standard job item Rate Display Only Displays the standard cost per unit of this job item Version 4 7 23 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR P MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Ss MANAGING INSPECTIONS Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure Note When a Rogue Item is being added to a Bill Of Quantities the Rate field becomes Mandatory You should insert the rate per unit for this rogue item Also the Item Description field can be amended from the standard Rogue Item description to a more meaningful item description for this particular job Lab Units Display Only Displays the calculated amount of labour units for this job This figure is calculated as the quantity multiplied by the labour multiplier held against the standard job item This multiplier can be viewed and amended via Standard Items MAI3888 Maintenance System Administration Manual Est Cost Display Only Displays the estimated cost for the job based on the quantity and the rate per unit This valu
224. eme Type Work Order Description Estimated Cost of Work Order Actual Cost of Work Order Date Instructed Date Completed Date Last Printed Raised By Number of Defects Total Estimated Cost of all qualifying Work Orders Total Actual Cost of all qualifying Work Orders 4 6 1 Selection Parameters Admin Unit Required Default List Select an administrational unit to be used for this report The default is the Admin Unit assigned to the current User Road Id Required List Gaz Enter the Road Group or individual Road Section Id to be reported on From Date Optional If required enter the earliest Date Raised to be included on the report Only those Works Orders raised after this date will be included in the report To Date Optional If required enter the latest Date Raised to be included on the report Only those Work Orders raised before this date will be included in the report Scheme Type Required List Enter the Works Order Scheme type to be reported on Cyclical Maintenance Onl Required Default List Enter Y to only include Cyclical Maintenance Work Orders only or N to include both Cyclic and Defect Clearance Work Orders The default value is N Version 4 7 223 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written
225. ent of Bentley Inc Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE e Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS 2 14 1 General Information This form is used to initiate permanent repair procedures for defective advisory roadstuds 2 14 2 Section Retrieve the section on which the defective roadstuds have occurred using the following fields Link ID Agency Linkcode Section Local DTp Exclude Defects Between St Chain Optional Enter the start chainage number from which defects should be excluded If end chainage is entered then start chainage must be entered too End Chain Optional Enter the end chainage number up to which defects should be excluded If start chainage is entered then end chainage must be entered too 2 14 3 Defects The details of the defective roadstuds found can be flagged for exclusion or inclusion in the permanent repair program Category 2 Defect Type Query Only Use this field to retrieve the Category 2 defect code for the defective roadstuds Advisory Roadstuds St Chain Query Only Use this field to retrieve the start chainage for advisory roadstuds Location Desc Display Only The location of the advisory roadstuds will be displayed XSP Query Only When you query this field the cross sectional position of the defective roadstuds will be displayed Number Query Only When you query this field the number of defective roadstuds for the section will be
226. ent to an Inspection being carried out on the Road a Check Box will be displayed adjacent to the Road Section field as shown below Version 4 7 8 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR gt MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 B en le Y Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS Road Section DEMOA16251 06 v Closed Figure 5 Road Section Note that a Road Section cannot be closed if there are outstanding Defects associated with it Description Display Only Displays the full road section name Wildcards may be used If you enter GIANTS 96 followed by List this will retrieve all road sections and road groups with GIANTS in the description This is very useful if you have set your gazetteer up in inspection areas routes or zones because you do not have to remember which group each section is in Start Chainage Required Default Enter the chainage at which the inspection commenced This will default to the start of the section End Chainage Required Default Enter the chainage at which the inspection terminated This will default to the end of the section Number of Defects Display Only The number of Defects Logged during this inspection will be displayed 2 2 3 Inspection Summary
227. equired The work category for the selected work will be displayed If budgets are being used a commitment will be made against this Item code The current position of the Budget can be displayed by double clicking this field as shown below The current value of work committed the actual value of work carried and the overall balance will be displayed for each Budget The Upper Limit of the Budget will also be displayed Code Description Budget Committed Balance CostCode Year Agency 999944 ATLAS jb test 3 0 1375 1375 2006 2315 I 999955 ATLAS jb test2 1000 2600 76 1675 2006 2315 999966 ATLAS jb test 1000 750 250 2006 2315 999988 TestBudget5 500000 15137 395 484468 2006 2315 999996 ATLAS test2 250000 0 2050 247950 2006 2315 999997 BudgetTest 200000 250 0 199750 2006 2315 999998 Test Budget 2 200000 8075 95 23659 5 168264 55 2006 2315 999999 Test Budget annann Inn437 3204 89731 fia 200A 2315 Figure 154 Work Category Repaired Display Only The date and time of the defect repair will be displayed Act Cost Display Only Version 4 7 177 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR P MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 1 WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure This field will display t
228. es Balancing Sum Display Only If the contractor to which this works order has been assigned uses Discount Groups MAI3624 Maintenance Manager Administration Manual then a percentage discount is applied to the total estimated works order cost The pre discount total is displayed in the Sub Total field above The balancing sum field contains the calculated value of the discount Estimates Total Cost Display Only This field contains the sum of the Estimated Sub Total and Estimated Balancing Sum fields above If the contractor has no discount groups in place then the Sub Total and Total Cost fields will be the same If a discount group structure is in place then this field will show the works order cost after the discount has been applied Estimates Labour Units Display Only If labour units have been entered in Standard Items MAI3888 the total labour requirements for carrying out the work will be displayed here Actuals Sub Total Display Only As the works order is being completed the actual works order line values are accumulated into this field This figure does not take into account any discount arrangements in place with the contractor Actuals Balancing Sum Display Only Version 4 7 171 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent o
229. es Only those defects with matching SISS codes will be selected for inclusion on this works order Gang Work Type 1 6 Optional List If required select up to 6 gang work types Only those defects that contain SOR items that have been linked to the selected gang work types will be retrieved SOR items are linked to Gang work types using Standard Items MAI3888 Defect Id Optional If required enter the unique defect ID to identify an individual defect to be included on the current works order Item Code Optional List If required select the standard job item code representing a particular item of work All defects which have this job item logged as the suggested repair will be selected for inclusion on the current works order Note that wildcards may be used in the item code Include Perm Optional Default Enter Y to include defects with permanent repairs in the search specified above The default value is Y Inspections between and Optional Version 4 7 104 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE ol Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT If required enter two dates representing a date range Only those defects resulting from inspections taking pl
230. eseeeseeee eene een rennen nennen nennen nene 237 413 1 Selection Parametets oe eee Ree Ea ii eres FALLI ETE IR ES 237 4 13 2 Instructed Work by Status MAI3924 ooo eeseceseceseceseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeaaeeaaecsaecsaecaeees 238 4 14 Instructed Defects Due for Completion MAI3926 cssssseseeeeeeneren eene enne 239 4141 Selection Parameters cis aeree ettet re etae eee es ree pee ete ee eerte Pare a ede rires eines 239 4 14 2 Instructed Defects due for Completion seen rene enne 240 4 15 Inventory Updates MAI3930 sssseessesseeeeeeeeeene eee eene nennen eren nne nr entente nenne 241 4151 Selection Parametets eere Pe Hee Ee ERR tete rede ees E eee Edu e ERO Vade 241 4 16 Work for Quality Inspection MAI3 950 0 cee eeceeceeseeeeeeseeeeaeeeaeecsaeceaeceaeeeaeesseeeseeeneeeeeeeees 242 4 16 1 Selection Parameters ccccccecccecsseceeseceeceeceeeeesaeceeaaeceeneeceaeeeeaaeceeaaeceeneeesaeeeeaaeceeaeeeaes 242 4 16 2 Work for Quality Inspection MAI3950 0 eee eeeceseceseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeeaeecaaecaecsaeenaeee 244 4 17 Quality Inspection Performance MAI3952 sssseesseeeeeeeeeeeeen een een rennen nennen nennen 245 417 Selection Parameters uec ere teer rte rt pene Feeder ANE teen ne eee ent epi en ee eo Eod eee dne i ai 245 4 18 Admin Unit Performance MAI3956 ssssssseseeseeeseeeeeee eee eene ener eren entren nennen 247 418 1 Selection Parametets eee Re RHET Pee
231. eturn you to the form and display the new co ordinates Version 4 7 137 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc rit 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustalning Mifrastrictire WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 7 6 Permit Conditions tab Werk Details Contacts Coordinates Permit Conditions Werk Order Lines Date Constraints Work Methodology Consultation and Publicity Environmental E Local Time Constraints Out of Hours Work Material and Plant Storage Road Occupation Dimensions Traffic Space Dimensions Road Closure Light Signals and Shuttle Working Traffic Management Changes E aaan se X Condition Text kome text Figure 125 Permit Conditions tab On entering this tab all checkboxes will be un ticked and the condition text will be null Version 4 7 138 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc asi Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 6l Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 7 7 Work Order Lines tab Description 24444 100604 PMCK 2 2 BAKER CROSS WOOTTON FITZPAINE NEED
232. ew all available fields Order By Optional List These two fields allow the ordering of the work order lines details New Gang Optional List Enter the gang to which the selected lines are to be Allocated Re allocated followed by the Assign Gang button Gang Labour Units Display Only This is the Total Labour Units of ALL work order lines assigned to the selected gang where the Work Order Line status is Instructed This is used to display the total Labour Units for all outstanding work allocated to a Gang Total Selected Labour Units Display Only This is the Total Sum of Labour Units of the selected WO Lines in the Work Order Lines block of the form The Gang Labour Units and Total Labour Units summary fields are to allow the assignment of Work Orders to a gang based upon the number of Labour Units a Gang can complete in a standard working day Version 4 7 203 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 B en le y i Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 15 Cancel Works Orders MAI3610 Maintenance Manager gt Inventory C3 Inspections Works Works Orders Defects Works Orders Cyclic Maintain VVork Orders Contractor Interface View Work Or
233. ew the order using Works Orders Contractor Interface MAI3802 and for the work order to be picked up by the CIM interface Last Printed Display Only When the works order is printed the date of printing is displayed here If the works order is reprinted at any time this field is updated to reflect the last printing date This field is part of the works ordering audit trail so each time it is printed an audit is maintained Once a works order has been printed changes to the works order lines are not allowed unless the Product Option ADDPRINT is set to Y Version 4 7 91 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR P MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure Date Received Display Only When a contractor accesses the works order using Works Orders Contractor Interface MAI3802 this date will be populated the id of the user who viewed the work order displayed in the adjacent field Date Completed Display Only When all of the lines on the works order are completed this field will display the date of completion Once the works order is completed and saved no further changes can be made to the works order To complete a works order without completing each indi
234. exible Attributes Programme Details Standard Item Totals Complete Figure 139 Contractor Interface 3 11 1 General Information This form is designed to allow the contractor to log on to the system enter the actual values of the repair and complete the works orders that have been issued Version 4 7 151 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ipie Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Ss e ea ieas WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Works Orders can be built up over a period of time therefore Works Orders will only be visible in this window under the following conditions e The works order has been authorised by entering initials in the Authorised by field e The works order has been instructed by entering a date in the Date Instructed field 3 11 2 Work Orders When you enter this window there will be no orders visible select Execute Query to retrieve all available orders To print the selected Works Order select the Print button in the menu toolbar To view additional information on the selected works order select the Expand button on the toolbar Gang Display Only List This allows the selection work that has been assigned to an individual gang This is only available in query mode when the GANGENABLE product optio
235. ey MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 Bieciaf Dita WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Notice Type Default Update List The notice type will default to the value displayed in TMA Interface TMA3990 The list of values will present the relevant notice types Notice or Permit from the following 0200 Initial Notice 0210 PAA Major Permit Application Non Major 0300 Confirmation Notice 0310 Permit Application 0400 Actual Start Date 0600 Works Stop Choice of Notice Checkbox List This will be ticked if there is more than one notice type that can be sent For example 1 The street is on a permit and a NRSWA regime and an 0200 0210 needs to be picked 2 There is a choice between sending an 0300 or jumping straight to a 0400 Promoter Org District Default Update List This will default to the current users org district as defined in My Districts NSG0130 This can be updated if required Works Reference Default This will display the Work Order Number as selected in TMA Interface TMA3990 Selected Checkbox This will automatically be ticked unless another user is updating the record in the TMA This will be selected followed by the Send to Register button to send the notices to the register This cannot be selected once the Dealt With checkbox has been selected Dealt With Checkbox This will automatically be unticked unless another user is updating the record in the TMA This will be checked
236. ey TMA notice against each affected USRN throughout the life cycle of the works This module can be called in a number of ways Using fastpath and the module Id TMA3990 By the selection of the TMA Interface button form within the Work Ordering Modules MAI3800 and MAIB800a e Directly from the Menu as shown below the user will have to query back the work order number required 3 6 1 1 Roles Each user that needs to use the Work Order TMA Interface will need a role assigned to give them access to Work Order Defects MAI3800 Send Notice to Register TMA1800 and TMA Interface TMA3990 The module role TMA_USER that includes TMA1800 and TMA3990 is created as standard when TMA is implemented Users will therefore need the role of TMA_USER assigning Refer to your System Administrator to assign the appropriate role 3 6 1 2 User Organisation and District Each user that needs to use the Work Order TMA Interface will need to have a default org district assigned using Organisations and Districts NSG0120 This default will be assigned to a works in Send Notice to Register TMAT1800 Refer to your System Administrator to assign the appropriate organisation and district 3 6 2 TMA Noticing Tab M Work Order TMA Interfac e TMA3990 DORSET quartz exd 15 MAI v4 0 5 0 Work Order Work Order RSE Description JB TEST 2 13 COPY Date Raised 20 JAN 2009
237. f Bentley Inc acu Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Ss Siaesialeg Witness WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT If the contractor to which this works order has been assigned uses Discount Groups MAI3624 Maintenance Manager Administration Manual then a percentage discount is applied to the total actual works order cost as displayed in the field above The pre discount total is displayed in the Sub Total field above The balancing sum field contains the calculated value of the discount Actuals Total Cost Display Only This field contains the sum of the Actual Sub Total and Actual Balancing Sum fields above If the contractor has no discount groups in place then the Sub Total and Total Cost fields will be the same If a discount group structure is in place then this field will show the works order cost after the discount has been applied Defect 0 Scheme 0 Cyclic 8l Figure 151 Work Order Content Summary These three fields are displayed at the bottom of the main works order window and indicate the number and type of work order lines that are contained within the work order A number of buttons have been defined on this window for use when raising a works order they are as follows Schedules Opens the Schedules window and allows the user to add works order lines Standard Item Totals Opens the standard item totals window and displays the estimated and actual costs and quantities for each standard item in the works order
238. ffer from the gully emptying route and the winter maintenance gritting route will differ from both the above The group types that can be used in cyclic maintenance schedules are set up in Product Options HIG9130 setting the CYCGRPTYPD DoT roads or CYCGRPTYPL Local roads options to be a list of the required group types in the form GRIT GULY GRAS etc Schedules may only be set up against groups of these types These group types and associated groups are set up using the modules contained in the Network Manager volume The link between the job item and the inventory type is created using Cyclic Maintenance Inventory Rules MAI3626 and must be done before any schedules can be created using the inventory on the road sections 5 3 2 Cyclic Maintenance Schedules On entering this window the cursor sits in the Name field waiting for you to enter a new schedule To view existing schedules select Enter Query enter your selection criteria followed by Execute Query Schedule Id Default A unique system generated schedule id will be displayed Name Required Enter a descriptive name for this schedule Last Qty Calculations Display Only Displays the date that the quantity of work required was calculated for this schedule This calculation is initiated by pressing the Calculate Quantities button Version 4 7 257 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts a
239. for information only Any documents that are to be held against a work order will be held using Document Manager Version 4 7 193 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ia 5 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE iiedaf NEES WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 12 18A dditional Details Quality Finance Additional Details Quality Finance M aat at da a a eer iene da fa fia of erat uM ALM Planning Support Quality Finance Continue Defect Correction Period a Revised Completion Extention of Time Defect Correction Quality Acceptable B Not Lowest Cost contains specialist work Percent Item Computation Certifled Complete Contractor Certified Complete Client Final Price Variation Late Costs Late Cost Certified Revised Cost Agreed By Date Contractor Agreed By Client Figure 168 Additional details Quality Finance This window is displayed when the Additional Details button is selected in the Works Orders window All the fields within this window with the exception of Not Lowest Cost and Percent Item Computation are optional for additional information only and will be included for reference on works order prints Not Lowest Cost Display Only If the Cheapest qualifying Contracto
240. from the toolbar Schedules with the By Asset flag set to Y cannot be queried in this form All of the fields in this window are for information and are therefore display only Road Sections 328 Road Section Description rssuosos 76 ELSMEREHTST GINAHIRKRDITOENDATNOA8 0000000000 7035U0506 17 PRIVATE AV1 GALWAY PK TO END 7T035F0505 21 VIONVILLE CRT FP1 7035F0505_23 VIONVILLE PK FP 1 7035F0505_26 VIONVILLE WAY FP 1 7035F0505_25 VIONVILLE CL FP1 Schedule Items Figure 211 Road Sections 5 4 3 Road Sections This window displays a list of all the road sections that make up the road group to which this schedule applies Highlight the required section and press the Schedule Items button see the schedule details that apply to the selected road section Version 4 7 263 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc piod Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE ol Sustaining Infrastructure CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERS ADMIN K Schedule items 329 7035U0505_75 OPA Calculated Actual Last Ilem Code pean E Quantitv Quantity Updated Ce DO O SET Figure 212 Schedule Items 5 4 4 Schedule Items Having created the schedule and made the system calculate its suggested quan
241. g Total Cost 8808 Date Completed e Check Batch lm BOQ Uplift Item DCC 963 RWH Total scheme gt 34 000 01 Check Date Check Result WOL Uplift Item pcc RWH Total scheme 1 400 01 34 000 00 Date Paid Payment Id BOQ Items ltem Code Description Dim 1 Dim2 Dim3 Quantity Unit Rate Cost ponto TMB Mobile lane closure adjcenre 10 tofo o 1603 1 summa Print 3 fes von dit Defect Figure 59 Create Work Order 2 9 7 Create Work Order Selecting the Create WO button will call form Raise Work Order MAI3801 Version 4 7 56 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 6 Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS Raise Works Order GIS DORSET nmd4beta2 GBEXOR730 MAI v4 0 Scheme Type Contract 7 933 Routine Maintenance PS2 06 07 ACTUAL Work Order Cancel Figure 60 Raise Work Order The Raise Works Order form allows the required Scheme Type and Works Order Contract to be selected Scheme Type Required Default List This is the Scheme Type for the Work Order The default value is determined by the value set for Product Option DEFSCHTYPL or DEFSCHTYPD depending on the System Flag set for the
242. g to the defect A maximum of 254 characters is allowed XSP Required List If the system has been set to record defects by XSP enter the cross sectional position of the defect This together with the Chainage and Location fields enables the defect to be located exactly within the section Notify Optional List If the defect is notifiable select a valid organisation to be notified of the defect The responses to any notification are maintained in Responses to Notices MAI3816 Recharge Optional List If the defect is rechargeable select a valid organisation to be recharged Action Modification Optional List An Asset Modification Flag may be set for the Defect Repair This allows an indicator to be set to signify that the affected Asset has been Replaced Renewed or Repaired for example This is useful when carrying out Asset Valuations The list of Asset Modification Flags is maintained using Domains HIG1920 and updating Domain name ASSET MODIFICATION refer to the General System Admin Guide for information relating to System Domains Version 4 7 32 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ibis 23 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS F
243. ge to COMPLETED in one of two ways they are as follows 1 Select the Complete button on the initial window this will not allow the update of BOQ items Change the status of the works order line to COMPLETED Enter the completed date Update the dimensions in the BOQ Items window to the actual dimensions Add any further BOQ items if required Save the changes Once the changes have been saved no further changes can be made to that works order line or its BOQ items The following button has been defined on this window for use when completing a works order BOQ Items Opens the BOQ Items window where BOQ items can be added to or modified on the selected works order line As the works order line passes through the payments cycle the status will be updated automatically The product option STATVAL controls the contents of the list of values if it is set to Y ACTIONED can be selected from the list of values Also if set to Y and the current status is ACTIONED UNAPPROVED INTERIM or PART PAID then the status can be changed to VALUATION Version 4 7 155 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Ss B etal fig tistrei WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Comp Date Required If the status is change
244. h Works Order Line selected for inclusion on the Works Order Initially all the lines will be blank work order lines are added to this window following the procedure below If you want to remove a line from the Works Order position the cursor on the appropriate line and press the Delete Record button in the toolbar The line and its associated schedule items will then be removed from the Works Order Should you want to add further lines select the Create Record button in the toolbar and follow the procedure below again Once the Works Order has been instructed lines may not be added to the Works Order Lines lines can however be removed from the Works Order any time before the order is completed by selecting Delete Record Copy Line This will create a copy of the selected works order line and associated BOQ items the following pop up window will be displayed allowing the user to copy the BOQ items and their associated estimated quantities or copy the BOQ items only without the estimated quantities Version 4 7 148 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 W etalafig VureptHict re WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Bllcopy works Order E Copy Estimated Quantities Continue Cancel Figure 137
245. h the work order numbering convention the description of the new work order will contain the number of the original order with the word COPY appended Details are entered into the Work Order window in the same way as they are entered for defect clearance work orders this is covered in detail in Works Orders Defects Version 4 7 147 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc cdi E Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT M 3 9 2 Work Order Lines W Detects DEFAULTI42 Defect Id Treatment Status Work Category TypefPriority Sheet Completed Repaired Asset Ref Labour Units Est Cost Act Cost Identifier Descr Location Remarks WOL Id Asset Id Schedule Invoice Registerable Register Status EE Target Date D7 JUN 2011 00 00 D CC IEEE lt 5 LO ee eee Registerable Register Status Target Date Registerable Register Status Target Date Iv BOQ Items View Notices Get From Map Copy Line Select Defects TMA Interface Invoices Summary Figure 136 Work Order Lines This window is displayed when the Lines button is selected in the Works Orders window It contains details of eac
246. have their own set of saved parameters O p Load Parameters Previously saved parameters for the selected report can be loaded directly into the GRI You will be prompted to enter a file name if you have a number of saved parameters double clicking the field will result in a list of saved parameters being displayed 6 2 BOQ Work Order Cyclic MAI3907 Purpose This report produces a detailed Cyclic Maintenance Work Order which includes any Bill of Quantity items specified for Work Order Lines on the Selected Works Order You may choose to print Labour Units and or target repair dates for each Work Order Line using the appropriate Selection Parameters You may also choose to print only the Work Order only a Control Sheet for the Work Order or both 6 2 1 Selection Parameters Work Order No Required List Enter the Works Order Number to be reported on Work Sheet No Optional To reprint part of an already printed Work Order enter the Work Sheet Number to be reprinted This appears near the top of each Sheet Print Lab Units Y N Required Default List Enter Y to include the number of Labour Units needed to complete a Bill of Quantity Item on a Works Order Line or N to not include Labour Units The default value is N Wrks ord Ctrl sht Both Required Default List Enter W to print only the Work Order C to print only the Control Sheet for a Work Order or B to print both Version 4 7
247. he Expand button will take you to Maintain Work Orders MAI3800 and display the full work order details Contract Display Only List Displays the number of the contract List is only available in query mode Road Id Desc Display Only Displays the section ID and description of the road section to which this works order relates Remarks Display Only The remarks on the work order line will be displayed Defect Id Display Only Displays the unique ID of the defect which this works order was rectifying Schedule Display Only For cyclic maintenance works orders this field displays the ID of the schedule under which this works order was created Orig Initials Display Only The Originators initials from the work order will be displayed Work Order Display Only Displays the reference number of this works order Work Sheet Display Only Version 4 7 281 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE e Sustaining Infrastructure PAYMENTS Displays the serial number of the worksheet Orig Name Display Only The Originators name will be displayed Check Result Display Only If a quality inspection has been carried out against this work order the result of the in
248. he actual cost of carrying out the work As the actual cost is only known once the defect has been repaired and the Status updated to COMPLETED or an Interim Payment has been made and the Status updated to PART PAID this field will initially be blank Invoice Display Only This is a payment Invoice flag used within the Financial Payment process Valid values are Null No invoices have been processed or the status is instructed O Atleast one outstanding records remains in the payments table H Atleast one held record remains in the payments table B Both held and outstanding records remain in the payments table A Only approved records remain in the payments table Once a Works Order Line has been included in a Payment Run the Invoice details can be viewed by pressing the Invoice button on the window Once the changes have been saved no further changes can be made to that works order line Registerable Checkbox This tick box is used to indicate whether an individual line should be registered with TMA If this is checked the Registerable tick box at the work order level will be updated automatically if not already checked Register Status Display Only This Line level Register Status field indicates the Noticing Status of the individual work order line The status of this field depends on the following logic e Nothing Registered The WOL has been ticked as Registerable but no Notices have been sent for it e O
249. he actual quantities have been entered at section level Last Updated Display Only Displays the date that this line of the schedule was last recalculated or manually updated 5 3 4 Calculating the Work Quantity When the schedule items are first added to the schedule the Calculated Quantity field will be blank Once you have completed the definition of the schedule press the Calculate Quantities button This will cause the system to scan through the network and its associated inventory looking for inventory items on the road sections relating to this schedule which will be affected by the jobs contained within the schedule It is therefore possible for the system to calculate how much work running this schedule will create This is then displayed in the Calculated Quantity field If the sections do not contain the required inventory items the calculated quantity field will be blank it can be updated here if the product option USECYCGRPL or USECYCGRPD are set to Y If not the actual quantities are added to individual sections using Cyclic Maintenance Schedules By Section the actual quantities will be populated with the calculated quantities remaining 0 Note This calculation may take some time This will depend largely on the complexity of your road network as well as the amount of inventory held against it Version 4 7 260 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are co
250. he works order as described above the search will recover that defect again Whilst in this window you can view full details of a defect by pressing the Expand button in the toolbar at any time Once a Works Order has been instructed further Defects or Works Order lines that have no associated Defects may not be added to the Works Order unless Product Option ADDINSTR is set to Y Defects can however be removed from the Works Order any time before the order is completed Once a Works Order has been printed using Print BOQ Work Order MAI3906 further Defects or Works Order lines that have no associated Defects may not be added to the Works Order unless Product Option ADDPRINT is set to Y Each works order line displays a summary of the defect information the following field descriptions apply to defect clearance works orders only Version 4 7 97 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 B etal fig VuFeptHict re WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Identifier Display Only Displays the road Id where this works is located Descr Display Only Displays the full name of the road section Location Optional Displays the text describing the location of the current defect If required th
251. hen estimated end date to today Version 4 7 134 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Ss Saetalaleg VuFePtHictUT WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT estimated start date to today Else start date today end date start date plus the default duration Estimated End Date Default This will default to the earliest start date for the individual work order lines or the target date for the work order This can be updated Actual Start Date Default For Initial notices this will be null This can be updated For other notices it s the current value from the works phase If that value is null and you ve instructed TMA Interface TMA3990 to send an Actual Start Notice then the value will get defaulted to the estimated start date Actual End Date Default For Initial notices this will be null This can be updated For other notices it s the current value from the works phase If that value is null and you ve instructed TMA Interface TMA3990 to send an Actual Start Notice then the value will get defaulted to the estimated end date Estimated Insp Units Default For Initial notices this will display the default value as set up in the Defaults button This can be amended if
252. hese BOQ items apply to ALL Defects created within the current selection however these may be amended for individual defects later in the defect creation process BOQ Uplift Item Optional List Enter the BOQ uplift item this item will uplift all the BOQ items that have the Allow Percent Items field set to Y in Standard Items MAI3888 The List of Values will only contain those items that have the BOQ Percent Uplift set to Y in Standard Items MAI3888 WOL Uplift Item Optional List Enter the Work Order Line uplift item this item will uplift the entire work order line The List of Values will only contain those items that have the WOL Percent Uplift set to Y in Standard Items MAI3888 Note When a Repair having either BOQ or WOL Percent Uplift Item Codes assigned is added to a Work Order a check is made against the Contract for that work order to determine if the Standard Item Code has been assigned as a Contract Item and that the contract will allow for Percentage Uplifts If not the user will be prevented from saving or Instructing the Work Order To continue creating the Defects press Next gt Version 4 7 34 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER
253. his work was to be carried out on a weekend and weekend work attracted a surcharge of 10 on the total cost of a repair a 2nd percentage item could be associated with the BOQ item to allow for this If the weekend surcharge only applied to the cost of the initial Item Code i e 100 the extra cost for weekend work would an extra 10 and the computation method used to calculate this would be NORMAL If however the weekend surcharge applies to the Initial Item Code and any other Percentage Items associated with BOQ Item the computation method used should be set to CUMULATIVE Figure 103 shows the same BOQ item with Product Option CUM PERC set to CUMULATIVE E BOQ Items Defect 45012 5 Item Code Description Dim 1 Dim2 Dim3 Quantity Unit Rate Cost Add 29020653 MCD Patch exist sufweg mal 200 20 soM oo me 29 0101 fma Mobile lane close adj verg 10 00 10 00 HOUR 10 00 100 00 C pccr 1 gt RWH Total scheme 0 00 1 4 100 oo PERcENT 1000 10 00 C J D J ts pcc set gt RWH Total scheme 0 00 1A 1 00 1 00 PERCENT 10 00 11 00 C a ea m a II Sa Es Figure 103 Cumulative Computation Method The initial Percentage Item has been calculated as a percentage of the cost of the BOQ item 29 01 001 i e 1096 of 100 00 equaling 10 The 2nd Percentage Item for Weeke
254. idential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc cdd Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Ss deaf hito WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT This may be used for the following reason For example if a defect has been found at the end of the working day that should be repaired within 24hours by the time the defect is loaded placed onto a work order the following day instructed and passed to the contractor several hours may have passed and the contractor may not physically have time to repair the defect based on the time the defect was found This option resets the work order line target date based on the time the associated work order was instructed and sent to the contractor if the CIM interface is used and hence does not skew the KPI s in a way to disadvantage the contractor A number of buttons have been defined on this window for use when raising a works order they are as follows BOQ Items Opens the BOQ Items window where BOQ items can be added to or removed from the selected works order line Figure 101 Select Defects Opens the Selection Criteria window and allows the user to select the defects that are to be included on the works order Figure 99 View Notices This button is enabled when one or more streetwork notices have been sent for the currently selected work order line The Work Order TMA Interface TMA3990 is called in read only mode and is na
255. idential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc iod 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 7 9 Defaults button O BEEM ate et Ax Promoter EEE DORSET COUNTY COUNCIL District loos Highway Authority Promoter Contact xj Contractor Contact Works Category Minor Cay Restrict Type None signing only M No of Phases 1 Estimated Insp Units GEN Works Restricted Working Hours E Parking Suspensions a Footway Closure Apply Defaults Close Window Figure 128 Defaults button The Defaults button will display the defaults window These defaults are set for the selected set of notices in the current session To permanently change the defaults for the system you will need to speak with Support because the following table will need updating TMA_SEND_TO_REGISTER_GATEWAYS The Apply Defaults button will cycle through all the notice records selected and update the relevant attributes with the default values set Version 4 7 141 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 6 Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT
256. ields are only displayed after a works order line has been completed or an Interim payment made and will therefore initially be empty If the contractor has added additional items to the order the estimated values will be empty with the actual values being populated Select Cancel to return to the Works Orders Contractor window Version 4 7 164 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 23 Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 3 12 Works Order Cyclic MAI3800a Maintenance Manager Z3 Inventory Inspections Works Works Orders Defects ks Orders Cyclic Maintain Work Orders Contractor Interface Figure 148 Work Order Cyclic Menu Option Dg rk Orders Cyclic MAI3800A DORSET maidev44 EXDL18 MAI v4 3 0 0 Work Order xcH 881263 Grass Cutting Flail Cutting Monthly Payment December 2007 Classified Interim Payment a Priority Road Type HIER Road Id cuc Scheme Type Register Register Status Status INSTRUCTED Contract 18 939 ROUTINE MAINT XCH 07 08 ACTUAL Contractor RMg CHRISTCHURCH ROUTINE MAINTENANCE CONT Contact Contractor Score Originator MA Mark Adams Cost Centre To be Authorised By Job Number poco Authorised
257. igure 155 Select Schedules Button This window allows you to select the schedule to be used to generate this works order The schedule must have been predefined using Cyclic Maintenance Schedules MAI3860 and Cyclic Maintenance Schedules by Section MAI3862 Schedule Id Required List Select the schedule that you wish to use to generate this works orders lines A description will be displayed in the adjacent field Date Due Required Enter a date by which the work must be completed This can be printed on the works order if required Two buttons have been defined on this window for use when raising a works order they are as follows Continue The system will generate the works order lines and their associated BOQ items A works order line will be created for each road section within the schedule Cancel Return to the Selection Criteria window without returning any works order lines Version 4 7 179 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 12 5 BOQ Items Item Code Description Quantity Quantity Est Labour Unit Rate Cost Add 96 ENS During Normal Working Hours wo xo em Teor ma m
258. imated Balancing Sum fields above If the contractor has no discount groups in place then the Sub Total and Total Cost fields will be the same If a discount group structure is in place then this field will show the works order cost after the discount has been applied Estimates Labour Units Display Only If labour units have been entered in Standard Items MAI3888 the total labour requirements for carrying out the work will be displayed here Actuals Sub Total Display Only As the works order is being completed the actual works order line values are accumulated into this field This figure does not take into account any discount arrangements in place with the contractor Version 4 7 92 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc acu Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Ss Biaesialeg Witness WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Actuals Balancing Sum Display Only If the contractor to which this works order has been assigned uses Discount Groups then a percentage discount is applied to the total actual works order cost as displayed in the field above The pre discount total is displayed in the Sub Total field above The balancing sum field contains the calculated value of the discount Actuals Total Cost Display Only This field
259. imum Contract Code Description Lines Cost Score Orders Value Value BURCDAILY _ bumley core daily action respon 1000 sms zww ATLAS_1 Atlas test contract 1 100 0 967 50 24950 ATLAS 3 ATLAS test contract 3 100 0 967 50 5401 0 10000000 ATLAS 2 ATLAS test contract 2 100 0 2012 40 0 10000000 BURN TESTS Burnley Test Contract 5 100 0 2089 80 1522 zu T RE Figure 163 Contractor Totals This window is displayed when the Contractor Totals button is selected in the Works Orders Defects window Itis a display only window which shows all contracts which can satisfy some or all of the work defined on the Works Order For each contract the window shows the percentage of the order lined that the contract has priced and can therefore complete as well as the total cost where that contract is to be used If available the window will also show the average score achieved by that contractor over the past year to date as well as the total value of orders placed with that contractor in the year to date If the Contractor has had a financial limit on Works Order values that may be issued to him imposed in Contractors MAI3881 the Minimum and Maximum values will be displayed To select an alternative contract for use on this works order highlight the required contract then select the Select Contract button If product Option WORREFGEN is set to either C for Contract Based Works Order Reference Number generation or A for Ad
260. in All the following fields can be used in combination to further restrict the defects retrieved when the Select Defects button is selected Date From Optional Enter the date from which you wish to search for defects This field can be used in conjunction with the next field for searching for defects in a date range Date To Optional Enter the date to which you wish to search for defects Defect Status Optional List Enter a defect status code Activity Optional List Enter an inspection activity code Priority Optional List Enter a defect priority code SISS Optional List Enter a Standard Item Sub Section code Notify Optional List Enter a notifiable organisation Version 4 7 60 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE MANAGING INSPECTIONS 23 Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure Recharge Optional List Enter a rechargeable organisation Once the required selection criteria has been entered there are 2 options available Selecting the Select Defects button will display all defects meeting the criteria entered for all road sections in the selected road group these defects will initially be displayed as a summary select the Detail
261. in Budgets Follow the procedure for completing a Works Order to enter the amended actual values 3 5 23 Raising a Notice In the Street Works Register Some activities in the highway require information to be sent to the local Street Works Register The Traffic Management Act TMA will introduce new responsibilities on Highway Authorities for those activities that are Registerable The following is an extract from the TMA code of practice issued under consultation 3 5 23 1 Registerable Works 3 5 23 1 1 Works as designated in 3 5 23 1 2 have to be recorded on the Register Street works notified by undertakers in accordance with the provisions laid down in the regulations and chapter 6 of this Code of Practice shall be recorded in the register by the street authority Any works which are not notified in accordance with the provisions in the NRSWA as set out in Chapter 6 are unlikely to be picked up by the street authority and included on the Register It is therefore self evident that as far as street works are concerned only those works which are notifiable will in fact be Registerable and although strictly speaking the two definitions are not legally the same to all intents and purposes they are the same thing in practice However NRSWA does not require local authority road works to be notified in the same way although they do need to be registered Therefore how a local authority registers its own works is a matter for it to decide but
262. ines and associated Bills of Quantities At this point you can amend these job items adding new ones or removing existing items As this process is carried out the various totals and sub totals contained on the works order are updated instantly The Work Order Cyclic MAI3800 form offers you the facility to carry out what if planning by constructing your works order gradually adding and removing works order lines until the totals match your budget before confirming the works order and forwarding it to the contractor Once a Works Order has been instructed further Works Order lines may not be added to the Works Order unless Product Option ADDINSTR is set to Y Defects can however be removed from the Works Order any time before the order is completed Once a Works Order has been printed using Print BOQ Work Order MAI3906 further Defects or Works Order lines that have no associated Defects may not be added to the Works Order unless Product Option ADDPRINT is set to Y Changes made to a Works Order its associated Work Order lines or Bill of Quantity Items may be view using the Audit facility within a Works Order The Audit window may be called by pressing the Expand button on the main Works Ordering form It is possible to define what items in a Works Order are to be Audited by selecting the required fields using form Works Order Audit Maintenance MAI3803 The size of the Audit log trail can be restricted by setting Product Option AU
263. information on each Works Order Line Works Order Line Number Link Id Road Section Number Road Section Description Defect Type XSP and Chainage of Defect Inspection Activity Treatment Type Repair Description Defect Id Unit Quantity Estimated Rate for Works Order Line e Estimated Value of Works Order Line The Second part provides a summary of the Road Sections on the Selected Works Order and includes the following information Agency Code Link Code Road Section Number Section Class Road Section Description 4 3 1 Selection Parameters Works Order No Required Enter the Works Order Number to be reported on Version 4 7 217 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE WORKS ORDERING REPORTS Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure E LIVE2108 MAD480 Print Works Yer 1999 Item Code DTp Local Agency Road Group 020401 DTp j 2900469 TO BE COMPLETED IN hrs 28days 3 months Other Raised by Information Management Date Authorised by Dave Pearson Completed by Date NORTH PENNINE LINK GROUP Order Priced Works Order No 2 00003 16 APR 96 To Northumberland Contracting Date Comp 23 NOV 99 Signed for Contractor
264. intenance Manager Ho Inventory Inspections Inspections Inspections by Group Defects View Defects Responses to Notices Match Duplicate Defects Figure 74 Responses to Notices Menu Option Responses to Notices Notifiable Org WATER Water Authority Notice Id f Date Printed 19 MAY 2009 Respond By 17 JUN 2009 Admin Unit Ps2 Parish Maintenance South 2 Defects Defect Date Resp Response Accepted Defect Id Type Raised Road Section Id Type Date By Org Pothole 450281 POTH f 9 MAY 2008 fi 200633905 00520 es A S a Eua JN Defects Figure 75 Response to Notices 2 15 1 General Information If when carrying out an inspection an inspector suspects a defect found is the responsibility of an external organisation he will enter the details in the notify field in Inspections MAI3808 A letter is then sent to the notifiable organisation stating that you believe the defect found is their responsibility Version 4 7 72 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 6 Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS This form is provided to allow the responses to defect notifications to be registered as they are received from notifiable organisation
265. intenance Schedules MAI3960 6 1 Running Reports The majority of reports within highways by exor are accessed using a standard window called the Generic Reporting Interface GRI Whilst the selection criteria for each report will change from report to report the way the reports are run viewed and printed remains constant Below is an example of the Generic Reporting Interface Ta List of Defects Not Yet Instructed Admin Unit Road Type Road Id Date Inspected From Date Inspected To Defect Type Defect Priority SISS Item Code xSP Ea L Ee L L ES ESUS L dL Figure 223 GRI The title of the report is displayed at the top of the window There are three buttons down the left hand side they are as follows g Run report When the selection criteria has been entered this will run the report and place the output in the report previewer Version 4 7 275 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc eek Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE S MURDER CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERING REPORTS Save Parameters The Parameters for reports that have to be constantly re run or have complex selection criteria can be saved to a file and re used You will be prompted to enter a file name Each user can
266. ion Date By Chapter Page Description 4 0 2 0 25 October 2007 IES General revisions for release 4 0 2 0 4 0 5 2 February 2009 AH All General revisions for release 4 0 5 2 4 1 October 2009 AH All General revisions for release 4 1 4 3 November 2010 IS All Changes for 4 3 release including General changes to defects form Changes to Defects and Inspections for creating a work order changes to Defects and Work Orders to include Navigator button Changes to work orders to include flexible attributes 4 4 May 2011 IS All Inspections x y co ordinates now updateable Copy work order work order line enhanced Work order Authorisation enhanced Work order line Target Date added Work Order Line Budget re allocation MAI3620 added 4 5 Sept 2011 IS Various BOQ and WOL Uplifts added to defects Inspections and work ordering Work order target complete date updated 4 6 Oct 2012 IS Various Document reviewed and updated for 4 6 release 4 character xsp changes made 4 6 1 Feb 2013 IS Various Updated to include Admin Unit changes to defect priorities 4 7 Mar 2014 BA IS All Re formatted into Bentley template P175 Cyclic maintenance work order details updated to reflect asset based work orders Additional Minor changes EXOR P MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 6 TABLE OF CONTENTS Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure Table of Contents 1 Urrutia ERE HQ 1 2 Managing Inspections eee croi eos Diet EEE Fei aN STE Gung
267. is field may be entered for the selected work order line this will not affect the defect record but may be of use for small scheme work orders and if the work order line is to have a notice created against it Remarks Optional Add additional text as required access to this field is restricted to those work order lines with a status of INSTRUCTED When a work order line has been copied some text to that affect will be placed in this field WOL Id Display Only Displays the work order lines internal Id number Defect Id Display Only Displays the unique defect reference number for the current defect Defect Type Display Only Displays the code representing the type of defect Defect Priority Display Only Displays the priority code for the current defect Asset Ref Display Only If the Selected defect has been raised against an Asset item the Asset Reference will be displayed Asset Id Display Only If the Selected defect has been raised against an Asset item the Asset Id will be displayed Treatment Optional List If required select a treatment code to rectify the current defect Sheet Optional List The defects work sheet number will be displayed Labour Units Display Only Displays the number of labour units estimated to rectify this defect This is derived from the contract under which this works order is being raised Version 4 7 98 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEME
268. item from the List of Values This represents a job of work which will appear as such on the works orders generated for this schedule If an item is added and it has no associated inventory rules a warning message will be displayed If you want the system to calculate the quantities automatically delete the item that displayed the warning message go back to Cyclic Maintenance Inventory Rules add the required rule then re enter Description Display Only The full description of the standard job item will be displayed Unit Display Only Displays the unit of measurement of this job item Calculated Quantity Display Only This field will display the amount of work to be done as calculated by the system each time this schedule is used This calculation is a one off batch process see below and is initiated once the entire schedule has been defined As such it will initially be blank The calculated quantity will be copied into the actual quantity field Actual Quantity Optional Display Only This field will display the actual amount of work to be done each time a works order is generated for this schedule if USECYCGRPL or USECYCGRPD is set to Y the actual quantity can be updated if set to N it can not be updated here it must be updated at section level using Cyclic Maintenance Schedule By Section Once it has been updated using Cyclic Maintenance Schedule By Section this field becomes display only because t
269. j verge block working veh HOUR 179 08 0 10 17 91 sign vehicle trailer Sub Total 17 91 VOP 0 00 9 V O P 0 00 Overall Total 17 91 Figure 189 Version 4 7 226 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc acu Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE e Sustaining Infrastructure WORKS ORDERING REPORTS 4 8 Work Order Enhanced MAI3919 Purpose This option produces a 2 part report This report produces an enhanced version of Print Work Order that includes extra fields and layout changes The first provides contract details and includes the following information The following information is displayed Contractor Work Order Number Work Order Description Date Issued Date Instructed Estimated Values of the Work Order Actual Values of the Work Order econd part provides details of each work order line and includes the following information 999909606 The Repair Due Date Road Name Link and Section Number Defect Chainage Defect XSP Defect Id Defect Priority Defect Description Defect Location Repair Treatment BOQ Item Code BOQ Description Quantity Unit Rate Estimated Value of Works Order Line including any percentage discount 4 8 Selection Parameters Draft Report Required List Enter the either
270. ks this check box will need to be checked Once checked the Register Status field will become populated and the TMA Interface button will become active Any work order lines subsequently added to the work order will have to be ticked manually If unchecked all work order lines that have not had a notice generated will be deselected Register Status Display Only This field will display the current register status of the works order lines Current statuses are e N Nothing to Register One or more works order lines have been ticked as Registerable but no notices have been sent for any of them e O Outstanding one or more of the works order lines have been ticked as Registerable and at least one notice has been sent for at least one of them Only work order lines that have a status of INSTRUCTED can be sent to the register e C Complete All work order lines that have been ticked as Registerable have had a 0600 notice sent At this point the View Register button will be displayed Version 4 7 88 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR P MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE j WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure e The Refresh button will refresh the status in the active form The status will
271. l Details Window Version 4 7 191 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR PF MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Ss WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 3 12 16Work Order Flexible Attributes S EEN Flexible Attributes MAI3821 ISKINNER wolvesev GBEXOR920 MAI v4 2 1 0 Works Order Details Works Order no SSMS o Scheme Type Local Roads Attributes l TemTeWeMgasest aaa a E 8 Existing CAN Conditions I sm 3 O Road Speed mph jJ E CAA Width m 4 B X3 X33 3j No of Vehs in 3 mins Bs B Orr 1 5 Existing PED Conditions oo ooo X Footway Category dio R Footway idth m 4 Do Footway Category right Footway Width m Verge Cycleway No of Peds in 3 mins lie lie ne e oe elie n fre in e po p Figure 166 Flexible Attributes Each different type of work order may potentially require a different set of information to be held against it To facilitate this the work order flexible attributes can be linked to individual scheme type This allows the customer to define a set of attributes that are specific for a small scheme
272. l Safety Commence By Actual Commencement Date Defect Correction Period Defect Correction Date Quality Acceptable Extention of Time Revised Completion Date Pr Ed ed E Ed B NI Final Price Variation 96 Continue Figure 146 Programme Details This window is displayed when the Programme Details button is selected in the Works Orders Contractors window All the information in this window is for information only Select Continue to return to the Works Orders Contractors window Version 4 7 163 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 B en le Y Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 11 11Standard Item Totals Standard Item Totals Estimated Actual Actual 2901001 TMA Mobile lane close adj verge bloclHOUR 300 DAY Dayworks ITEM 0 00 C Cancel Figure 147 Stamdard Items This window is displayed when the Standard Item Totals button is selected in the Works Orders Contractor window Itis a display only window which shows all of the Standard Items currently on this Works Order as well as the total quantities and costs both estimated and actual across the whole works order Note that the Actual f
273. lay Only Displays the full name of the road section Location Display Only Displays the text describing the location of the defect Defect Id Display Only Version 4 7 154 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR P MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE S WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure Displays the unique defect reference number for the defect Defect Type Display Only Displays the code representing the type of defect Defect Priority Display Only Displays the priority code for the current defect Schedule Display Only This field will display the cyclic maintenance schedule name Treatment Display Only If required select a treatment code to rectify the current defect Sheet Display Only The defects work sheet number will be displayed Labour Units Display Only Displays the number of labour units estimated to rectify this defect This is derived from the contract under which this works order is being raised Status Required List Displays the current status of the works order line Initially a works order line will have a status of DRAFT Once the work order has been instructed and saved the work order line will become INSTRUCTED This status will chan
274. ld value SYS 05 12 2006 16 21 50 Completed By l 4 1 vs 2706152111 Estimate Cost 81 B SYS 05 12 2006 16 21 11 Authorised by SYS SYSTEM ADMINIS SYS SYSTEM 25485 svs 05712 2006 16 20 51 F CREATED pu es zaw erea 91063 Bmcoo01 sys 05 12 2006 16 20 09 F CREATED 91063 svs 05712 2006 16 20 01 F CREATED svs 05 12 2006 16 19 34 Authorised by SYS SYSTEM ADMINIS 1 vs 0521202006 16 19 34 Originator SYS SYSTEM ADMINIS SYS 05 12 2006 16 19 34 Work Order Number ATLAS 1 35 RE DES Show Changes fe All C Work Order C Work Order Line BOQ C Payments Figure 104 Work Order Audit The Works Order Audit shows the changes made to the fields on the Works Order which have been selected in form Works Order Audit Maintenance MAI3803 and can be called by pressing the Expand button on the menu toolbar form the main Works Order window The size of the Audit log trail can be restricted by setting Product Option AUDIT ALL to N If this option is set to N only the initial and final values of a field are recorded in the Audit trail per session per User and any intermediate changes are not be logged If Product Option AUDIT ALL is set to Y then all changes to the selected fields are logged It should be noted that for some Works Orders the audit trail could be very large if this option is set to Y The Order in which Audite
275. le lane closure adj cen reserve Plan MLC1 but block O00 qem oo D J j NNNM NN NN DC EE RN RR EC eC E BOQ Uplift Item DCC 963 RWH TOTAL SCHEME gt 34 000 01 WOL Uplift Item DCC 2 RWH TOTAL SCHEME 1 400 01 34 000 00 Figure 20 BOQ Items Button 2 2 11 BOQ Items This window contains the details of the individual work items required to rectify the current repair The BOQ items may be populated automatically using Treatment Models MAI3814 Maintenance Manager System Administrator Manual Item Code Required List Select the item code representing the standard job item to be used to rectify the current defect The description for the item will be displayed in the field below Dim 1 3 Required Some or all of the three dimension fields should be completed for each job item The fields to be completed will vary depending on the dimensions required for each job item A typical example would be a patch repair which would require two dimensions to be completed for length and width A pothole on the other hand would require three dimensions length width and depth The message line will display a line of text explaining the unit of measurement to be used in each case Total Qty Display Only Displays the total quantity of work to be done based on the values entered in the three Dimension fields above If the total quantity is outside the allowable range specified for the standard it
276. lexible Defect Attributes Optional If any Attributes length height width number etc have been defined for the selected Defect Type using Defect Control Data MAI1300 these will be displayed at the bottom of the Defect Details window There may be up to 4 of these attributes for each defect type o Repair Detalls 0 Permanent Temporary Immediate MV Create Permanent Repair Treatment EMA Emergency Call out Date Repair Due 01 SEP 2011 16 05 Description Unit Quantity Dim 2 Dim 3 Quantity Rate Cost Labour _ __ _ _ pot T w ow o om EN D nd a R BOG Uplift Item DCC 1 RWH TOTAL SCHEME 0 00 1 400 00 WOL Uplift Item Cf 2 RWH TOTAL SCHEME 1 400 01 34 000 00 Cancel lt Back Next gt Figure 29 Repair Details The Repair Details window allows the user to enter details for one or more repair for the defect There are three tabs one for each repair type A repair type will only be available for the selected activity and defect if it has been previously set up using Defect Priorities MAI3812 Maintenance Manager System Administrator Manual Create Repair Optional Checkbox Tick the checkbox on each tab to indicate that a repair of that type should be created If data is entered into any of the fields the checkbox will be ticked automatically The Permanent Repair will default to ticked Treatment Optional List If required
277. ll complete all works order lines in the current works order the completed date will also be entered in the next field If this method is used changes cannot be made to the actual values of the BOQ items The User changes the individual work order line to completed manually and enters a date in the next field At this point changes can be made to the actual values of the BOQ items these changes must be made before saving the changes As the works order line passes through the payments cycle the status will be updated automatically 3 5 22 Changing a Completed Works Order Once a Works Order or Works Order Line is complete no changes can be made to the value of the order If however when it comes to payment the Works Order or Works Order Line is held because actual values of the work are in excess of the allowable differences between estimated values and actual values the actual values may need to be re entered This is carried out with the following procedure Retrieve the completed works order that needs amending Move to the relevant works order line Change the status back to INSTRUCTED Save the change DO ps This will result in the actual quantities and costs for the selected works order line being removed the completed dates will be cleared in both the selected works order line and the main works order window and the actual costs will be updated in the works order window Costs will be returned to Committed from Actuals with
278. lled from TMA Interface TMA3990 it will automatically query back the details of the candidate notices that the user asked to be produced If no notices were selected in TMA Interface TMA3990 then the message No records to process will appear when the form starts Once the alert box has been dismissed the form will exit and you will return to where you came from 3 7 2 Upper Section Choice of Dealt Notice Type Notice Promoter District Works Reference Selected With ies e e E S FS es xps j pmwms v T 43210008 amp Japams GREEN 0210 Xk PAA Major Permit Applic 1245 X nos DCO0083890 v n 43200248 WOOTTON LANE TO BAKERS CROSS 0210 ptm mm ine PAA Major Permit Applic 7 Boos X pcooesest v or SE i i rr m ES INN s ai 2 a m mi Record 1 of 3 x Figure 120 Upper Section This section of the form will display all the notices that were selected in Work Order TMA Interface TMA3990 USRN Display Only This will display the USRN and Street Name as selected in TMA Interface TMA3990 when called from TMA3990 the street cannot be updated When Called from Enquiries DOCO0150 the street can be changed Version 4 7 131 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ipie Bentl
279. luded on the report Only those Work Order Lines quality inspected after this date will be included in the report Quality Inspected To Optional If required enter the latest date of Quality Inspection to be included on the report Only those Work Order Lines quality inspected before this date will be included in the report Version 4 7 245 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE WORKS ORDERING REPORTS Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure E 2108 LIVED bts Due I DHCO ppp ue S ES Supervisor Numher of No of Repairs Nyroter S Passed Number s orderne Sumter Faded Code lTrosquctira Checked Plano Thorderione Veiled ADM 2 2 i 9 00 0 600 5000 Totals 1 1 l 50 00 e 0 00 i 0 00 Tax Recair Comotetmd 2 s Checked 300 06 Figure 199 Quality Inspection Performance MAI3952 Version 4 7 246 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc acu Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE e Sustaining Infrastructure WORKS ORDERING REPORTS 4 18 Admin Unit Performance MAI3956 Purpose This report pro
280. lue of the current Works Order would lead to the User s Daily Authorisation Limit see the Max value per Day field in Maintenance Manager User Data MAIA410 being exceeded an error will be displayed and the current Works Order will not be Authorised Instruct Complete When this button is selected a pop up window is displayed containing the current date and time sysdate this allows the user to enter a date that is prior to the sysdate enabling the creation of retrospective work orders If the work order has not been authorised this will also authorise the work order provided the user has the appropriate permissions see the Authorise button for details Once the Date Instructed has been saved the button will change to read Complete Work order lines can be added to an instructed works order if the Product Option ADDINSTR is set to Y Completes all works order lines once this button has been selected and the date entered no changes can be made to the works order To make changes to the actual BOQ values Works Order lines should be completed individually using the following process 1 Change the work order line status code to COMPLETE 2 Update all the BOQ items for the work order lines to reflect the actual values 3 Save the changes Version 4 7 174 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not
281. m o n UU mE TiS noo mu Add Item e mnn mE Total Est Labour BOQ Total Cost 1381 40 BOQ Uplift Item DCC 1 RWH TOTAL SCHEME 0 00 1 400 00 BOQ Uplift Tota 13 81 WOL Uplift Item DCC 2 RWH TOTAL SCHEME 1 400 01 34 000 0C WOL Uplift Total 27 90 WOL Total Cost 1423 12 Figure 156 BOQ Items This window is displayed when the BOQ Items button is pressed in the Schedules window This window enables you to select the schedule items to carry out the work specified in the Schedules window To add items press the Create Record button in the toolbar This will enable you to add a new item Note To avoid problems the Save button should be used when each BOQ item has been added Once the work order has been instructed if the wrong BOQ has been entered or the band has changed prior to the entry of the actual values the incorrect BOQ item should be zeroed it cannot be deleted as it has been used in the definition of the estimated values before entering the correct item Item Code Required List Select a valid standard job item to represent a task to be carried out by the contractor On an Instructed works order any items added must exist on the selected contract Description Display Only Displays the description of the standard job item Note that for Rogue Items this field becomes updateable to allow you to describe the Rogue Item in greater detail
282. m e a detailed explanation of each field including available features such as List of Values default values and other characteristics e helpful information for using the form 5 1 General Information The Cyclic Maintenance system allows the generation of cyclic works orders to perform regular maintenance tasks These works orders are automatically generated on request and are complete down to the level of the individual job items and quantities required To be used effectively the cyclic maintenance system requires that the road network be defined and all the relevant inventory be loaded against it These activities are covered in the Network Manager and Asset Manager manuals respectively If however the inventory on the system is inaccurate or the type required for the cyclic activity does not exist on the required sections cyclic maintenance can be carried out on these sections although it is a slightly more manual task The cyclic maintenance system uses the network and inventory data to ascertain how much work there is to be done of a certain type For example the cyclic operation of Grass Cutting requires the knowledge of what length of grass verge exists along the relevant roads Once this quantity has been calculated the system can raise a cyclic works order to action a specific length of Grass cutting As this item will exist on a contract this work can be costed and budgeted for Version 4 7 250 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMEN
283. m is overridden but the Maximum Quantity limit is retained Select Cancel to return to the BOQ Items window 3 11 7 Invoices Payment ld Payment Value Date Paid Invoice 221 47 50 23 JAN 2007 Tost 8J 44 e Figure 143 Invoices Once a Works Order Line or Part of a Works Order Line in the case of an Interim payment has been included in payment run the Invoice details can be displayed by pressing the Invoices button on the Works Order Line window The Payment Id Payment Value and Date Paid will be displayed To add the Invoice number click in the Invoice field and enter the appropriate value Press Save on the menu toolbar to save the changes If the Works Order Line has had a number of Interim Payments made against it this is a good way to track the payments made to date Press the Close button to return to the Works Order Line window Version 4 7 160 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 B en le y i Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 11 8 Works Order Details i ERITXIST TH Work Order LANCSTESTATLAS 1407 000000000000 Scheme Type LR Contract ATLAS 1 Mlastestconrat Contractor DART Daily actionresponseteam sss Originator sys SYSTEM ADM
284. may be populated in one of two ways 1 Automatically populated based on the Date Raised and the Work Order Priority 2 The latest Target date of all the associated work order lines on the work order Note This date will be overridden if work order lines are subsequently added that have a later Target Date Note Ifthe product option UPDWOTGT is set to Y the date is to be updated manually ignoring any dates that are automatically populated Date Authorised Optional This is populated with the system date time when the Works Order is Authorised via e The Works Order form MAI3800 Authorise or Instruct button e The Work Orders Authorisation form MAI3848 e The Works Order Work Tray When this field is populated following the selection of the Authorise button a pop up window will be displayed allowing the user to enter a date before the sysdate enabling the authorisation of a retrospective work order Version 4 7 90 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR 5 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Biedafg Devo WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT When this field is populated following the selection of the Instruct button the date will be the same date as the instructed date this also allows the user to enter a date prior to
285. ministration Unit Works Order Reference Number Generation and the initial Contract selected is changed the Works Order will Cancelled and an exact copy made with the new reference number being generated The Works Order will have Cancelled appended to the start of its description To return to the Works Order form without selecting a Contractor press the Cancel button If the Value of the Works Order is outside the limits set for the Contractor a warning will be displayed a shown below Version 4 7 190 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR PF MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure The contractor selected is outside the bounds set Do you wish to continue Figure 164 Outside limit To select the Contractor and override the warning press OK otherwise press Cancel to select an alternative Contractor If the Contractor selected is not the cheapest Contractor a window will appear requesting a reason as to why the cheapest Contractor was not selected Enter the reason and press OK to continue with the selection e Reason for not choosing cheapest contract Cheapest Contractor not available OK Figure 165 Reason This will be displayed in the Additiona
286. ms Once all works order lines are completed the works order will be completed 3 11 6 BOQ Details B BOO Items Defect 226958 In j Item Code Item Name 100 0060 Take from store and erect information board on free standing frame Unit Min Quantity Max Quantity Lab Unit Factor Est Lab Units nr 0 00 9999999 99 Dimension 1 Dimension 2 Dimension 3 Quantity Estimates 1 00 1 00 Rate Cost Actuals Last Valuation EE Status SN Date Entered Paid Figure 142 BOQ Details This window can be called by pressing the Expand button in the menu toolbar when a BOQ item is selected It is useful when entering quantities because if the items are banded this window will show the minimum and maximum allowed values Version 4 7 159 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc e Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustelalag Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Details of the estimated and actual values are also displayed If the Works Order Line on which the selected BOQ item is on is part of an Interim Payment the Last Valuation cost Status and the Date the Valuation was entered or the payment made will be displayed When entering a Valuation for an Interim Payment the Minimum Quantity limit for the Standard Ite
287. n be overridden by adding the required value into the Percent Item Computation field in the Program details window This will set the Computation method for any subsequent Percentage Items added to a BOQ for a Works Order line on the current Works Order to the value entered This allows for different Computation methods to be used without the need to edit the Product Option value Version 4 7 182 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Note that these Values Normal and Cumulative are defined in Status Codes HIG9110 and Domain Code PERC ITEM COMP 3 12 8 Computation Method g BOQ Items Defect 450125 Item Code Description Dim 1 Dim2 Dim3 Quantity Unit Rate Cost Add 96 Qemaaoes MCD Patch exist sufweg m 200 20 saM oo oo ris 91001 TMA Mobile lane close adj verg 10 00 1000 HouR 1000 10000 C pcc set f gt RWH Total scheme 0 00 1 4 1 0 1 00 PERCENT 10 oo 10 00 Dcc 1 gt RWH Total scheme 0 00 1 4 1 00 1 00 PERCENT 10 00 10 00 C O O O y l D el Or tC Ca SSS ia F a a BS r eoa a m Figure 15
288. n is set to Y Work Order Display Only List The work order numbers will be displayed List is available in query mode only Road Type Display Only The road type will be displayed Road Id Display Only The road Id will be displayed Date Instructed Display Only The date the order was instructed will be displayed Date Completed Display Only When the works order is completed the date complete will be displayed When querying back works orders this field can be used to query back all orders that have not been completed using the query where facility using the following procedure e Select Enter Query enter a in the Date Completed field e Select Execute Query the query where window will be displayed e Enter ais null into the query where window e Select Execute Query again to retrieve all works orders without a date completed Total Cost Display Only The total actual cost of the completed works order will be displayed Status Display Only The status of the order will be displayed Version 4 7 152 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc acu Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 eiea WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT As the works order line passes through the payments cycle the s
289. n nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc owl 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustelaiag Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT RJSISJ amp IS esee NE ce d a esse CS Fina Feature Q QO Scale 16 71 M cm 1 1671 41 84 369544 05771 113292 97457 Active Layer WORK ORDER LINES Attribute Not Set Figure 87 Locator Redefine shape polygon error e Then the following error will be raised Version 4 7 84 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR gt MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 Be n le y Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Error Creating Shape Polygon boundary crosses itself Figure 88 Error Message e f no errors are raised by the form then the new shape has been generated and updated in the shape table However it has not yet been committed To save the changes the user must select Save e Once the change has been committed the new shape can viewed be by pressing the Show Map button E ISI eS es elas e i Jan co o ess F Fina Feature Scale 14 12 M cm 1 1412 35 35 369543 17527 113304 36243 Active Layer WORK ORDER LINES Attribute Not Set Figure 8
290. n the menu toolbar when the BOQ item is selected 3 12 21Completing a Works Order Line with an Interim Payment In order for a Works Order to be completed all Works Order Lines on it must be completed If a Works Order Line has had an Interim Payment made on it it must also be set to Complete If any further work has been done since the last Valuation the Works Order Line Status should be changed to COMPLETED and the Actual quantity of work done to date entered this should be the cumulative amount of all work done otherwise the Works Order Line will keep the same Actual amounts as for the last Valuation When the Works Order Line is Completed and is included in the next payment run no payment will be made if the Actual quantities have not been changed since the last Valuation 3 12 22Completing a Works Order When completing a works order it is possible to update the schedule items to reflect the actual cost of repairing the defect A works order can be partially completed by completing individual works order lines or fully completed by completing the whole works order the limitation to completing the full works order by selecting the Completed button is that the costs of each individual line can not be amended to reflect the actual costs of the work To enter the actual cost of a works order line follow this procedure 1 Change the status of the works order line to COMPLETED 2 Enter the completed date 3 Update the dimensions in the
291. ncluding system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc piod 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Siscalaing nitaste WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT ARRREPHOS ORES r ECCE Geeteay e a reae petecsonasses cron ates nase j create erectis onner Scale 16 71 Miem 1 1671 41 84 Jt tte 369702 96329 113249 39402 Active Layer WORK_ORDER_LINES Attribute Not Set Figure 82 Locator Re define work order line shape To return a point shape just double click the Map at the desired point To return a Line or a Polygon click the required points on the map then double click the last point to finish Version 4 7 81 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc acu Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 6 Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 4R amp JSISJ amp IS esee e SNE 9 co a esse Fna eare OA Scale 16 71 Micm 1 1671 41 84 H H 369493 77665 113334 3761 Active Layer WORK_ORDER_LINES Attribute Not Set Figure 83 Locator Re define work order line shape Once a double click is detected by the map the point s will be returned to MAI3800 If th
292. nd Cumulative are defined in Status Codes HIG9110 and Domain Code PERC ITEM COMP Version 4 7 108 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR P MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 6 WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure fil 809 Items Defect 450125 Unit Rate Cost Add 2Baw oof ow ra 10 00 HOUR 10 00 100 00 1 00 PERCENT 10 00 1 00 PERCENT 10 00 10 00 Item Code Description Dim 1 Dim2 Dim3 pomowosj McD Petehexetsufwcg mal 200 29 01 01 fma Mobile lane close adj verg 10 00 Dccr 61 gt RWH Total scheme 0 00 1 4 1 00 Dcci 1 gt RWH Total scheme 0 00 1 4 1 00 Quantity Cmm fs rm G A E e Eis z CU ltt NM mM Ne andis ER E SM v Xd v Figure 102 Normal Computation Method Computation Method Figure 102 shows a Bill of Quantities where an Item Code 29 01 001 has a cost of 100 00 A percentage Item has been associated with it because the bituminous material being used for the repair is of a special grade The Percentage Item selected has a rate of 10 thus the total cost of the repair will be increased by 10 00 to 110 00 If t
293. nd Work has been calculated as a percentage of the sum of the initial BOQ Item 29 01 001 the initial Percentage Item i e 10 of 100 10 giving a total cost of 121 00 3 5 8 Adding a Percentage BOQ Item To add a Percentage Item to a Bill of Quantities the Percentage Item must have added to the currently selected Contract If a different Contract is subsequently selected the Works Order cannot be Instructed unless the Percentage Item has also been added to the newly selected Contract Version 4 7 109 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR w2 MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE S WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure To add a Percentage Item do the following Navigate to the BOQ Items window by clicking on the BOQ Items button on the Works Order Lines window Select the BOQ Item to which the Percentage Item is to be added Note that this item must have the Allow Percentage Item filed set to Y in Standard Items MAI3888 Check the Add box for the selected Item on the right of the window Click on the Add Item button on the BOQ Items window A list of valid Percentage Items will be displayed Select the required percentage item from the List The selected percentage item will be added to the
294. nd are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc vis EA Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE e Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS 2 2 6 Defects Wi vefects on Inspection 53 Defect Id 54 Time Inspected oo A Defect Status COMPLETED Priority Superseded N By Asset Type CW Asset Ref Id 452 Find Asset XSP Start Chain Location fogt Co ords X 536713 903 Defect Desc Cracking and slight depression in ped X N 177054 081 Special Instr Roadstud Type Activity MC Minor Carriageway Repairs Area Defect Type Lock Localised cracking SISS ALL All Standard Items Asset Modification N fy Noticed 0 Recharge 0 o NoticePrinted Summary Print Repairs Create wo Per Imm Tmp Iv Figure 11 Defects on Inspection This window will be displayed when the Defects button is selected Defect Id Display Only A system generated number that uniquely identifies this defect will be displayed Time Inspected Optional If known enter the time that the inspection took place A time must be entered if the repair time mandatory field in Defect Priorities MAI3812 Maintenance Manager System Administrator Manual is set to Y Defect Status Required Default Upon creation of a defect the status will generally default to AVAILABLE this will enable the defect to be included on works
295. nd on Map 4 F 1 00 25 FEB 10 P NW A30 GT SW RD EB L1 OPP LC 15 JUST BEFORE JW A312 POTHOLE ITH HRA 3 p p a 1 25 FEB 10 P NW A30 GT SW RD WB JW GIRLING WAY LOOSCE MHC 1X NEW MHC AND PATCH SURROUND o amp a E a 1 0 00 25 FEB10 P NE A10 BROAD LANE JW HANOVER RD POTHOLE PATCH WITH HRA 3 gn 1 0 00 25 FEB 10 P NE A10 BRUCE GROVE SB BY JW CHURCH LANE OPP LC TR48 MHC ROCKING L amp R amp PATCH SURR HIGHWAYS www exorcorp com SRevision3 7 Page 10 Figure 133 Work Order Autorisation Worktray Full details of the work order authorisation worktray can be found in the Information Manager User Guide Version 4 7 145 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ie 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Fae NEIES WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 9 Other Works MAI3800 Bo Orders Defects MAI3800 DORSET auth44te WARTESTORDBO3 MAI v4 4 0 0 Work Order DEFAULT 42 Auto Work Order For Defect 409344 created on 10 MAY 2011 Interim Payment Priority Road Type TOPS Road Id ALL SECTIONS Scheme Type LR Register Register Status el Status DRAFT Contract DEFAULT DUMMY CONTRACT FOR INITIAL ESTIMATES Contractor DUMMY DUMMY CONTRACTOR Contact Contractor Score Originator SYS SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR Cost Ce
296. ne 120012800012 ICT U C ROAD HOLDITCH TO SOMERSET 361552 POTH ft Po azas77 near jet with c128 1200010102700 JCT C129 NEAR BROOM TO DEVON COUI 361533 POTH 2 1 p 474378 1200C129 0012 JCT U C ROAD HOLDITCH TO SOMERSET 361534 POTH 21 0 E sse ome a E igo ns ies iui ie t w 3 R View Works Order TMA Hotices Works Ref Description Status Comments Street Name USRN Trx Date Select A mice o Oe oOo B pem pa je a pre xe eser li immer Bn E P s est s peppers w View TMA Works WEE E B EH Figure 118 Work Order Lines tab This tab shows the information in the reverse way to that of the TMA Noticing tab If this module is called directly from the menu this will be the default tab the user will be presented with All of the fields within this tab are Display only with the exception of Select Checkbox This checkbox is selected followed by View TMA Works to take the user to Works TMA1000 to display the works details for the selected notice View Works Order Button If this module has been called from the menu this will display Works Orders MAI3800 MAI3800A Version 4 7 130 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent
297. ne tus 190 3 12 16 Work Order Flexible Attributes eessessseseseeseeeeee eene enne enne enne 192 3 12 17 Additional Details Planning Support eese 193 3 12 18 Additional Details Quality Finance eese nennen 194 3 12 19 IT VOICES 195 3 12 20 Making Interim Payments aconse aiii ii i 195 3 12 21 Completing a Works Order Line with an Interim Payment esses 196 3 12 22 Completing a Works Order eese eene nennen 196 3 12 23 Changing a Completed Works Order eee 197 3 13 Works Order Line Budget Reallocation MAI3620 sese 198 EXOR E MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 Be ntle y TABLE OF CONTENTS 3 13 1 General Information essssesesssseeeeee eene enne enne nnne eese ne nnne t nnne enne enne nnn 198 3 14 Gang Crew Allocation MA 3805 4 1rnecnseseee leti e tree tetra ei Brent e Do eo poe ee epe do Ee de 200 3 14 1 General nformiatiOn cicero teet a Aa h eter Ra EUR ahh ee ERE Ra RAAEN 201 3 14 2 Selection Crier ay inni e oett Le eti d redi PERLE code Rede 201 3 14 3 Work Order Lies eere ette eee eir Ee Lo ERE Ea CHEER Hd S LH EEES 203 3 15 Cancel Works Orders MAI3610 sssesssssseseseseeeeee seen ener ennt sten nenne en nennen nnns 204 3151 General lIntormatiOR 1 rdiet nete nho e
298. neral Information This module is designed to allow you to retrieve and view defects with their associated repairs and BOQ Items by selecting one or more defect details within a query for example you may wish to view all available priority 1 defects To query defects back by road section or road group it is recommended that you use View Defects MAI3810 2 9 2 Defects The majority of the defects fields are query only allowing you to enter specific criteria when retrieving defect details The details of individual defects will be displayed to view a summary of the defects retrieved following your query press the Summary button this will display a summary of the defects Version 4 7 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc 53 iion 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS If the Defect has been raised against an Asset press the View Asset button to view the Asset Details This will call the Asset Maintenance NM0590 module refer to the Asset Manager User Admin Guide To obtain a print of the defect details select the Print button this will run Print Defect Details MAI3902 The Edit Defect button will call the defects window from Inspections MAI3808 allowing the upd
299. nfidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc meses 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE AE EN CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERS ADMIN 5 3 5 Clearing Defects with Cyclic Maintenance Works Orders A cyclic maintenance activity that is linked to a works order can clear defects if the regular inspection activity and associated defect found is linked to the cyclic activity For example An inspection activity of GA Grassed Areas could result in a defect of type IWED Injurious Weed this defect could in turn be cleared when the cyclic maintenance activity 69 Grassed Areas Treat Vegetation is carried out on the section These rules are set up and maintained using Valid for Maintenance Rules MAI3440 Each cyclic maintenance schedule is linked to a works category using this module Works categories are linked to cyclic maintenance activities using Item Code Breakdowns MAI1940 5 3 6 The Next Step If the calculated quantity is known to be accurate then each section will have the relevant number of assets associated with it this can be viewed using Cyclic Maintenance Schedules by Section these can be updates on a section by section level if required the changes will be reflected in the Actual Quantity field If having created a schedule and calculated the quantity of work the count is inaccurate due to the lack of relevant inventory in the dat
300. nominate another user who should authorise the current work order Version 4 7 168 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc acu Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Ss sedato WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT This field will only accept the initials of a user that can view and authorize a work order this picklist will be populated with those users that have been given the permission to authorise a work order by the System Administrator using Maintenance Manager User Data MAI4410 Population of this field does not restrict this work order to be authorised by the selected user it may be authorised by any user that has the permission to authorise a work order Authorised By Optional List Only the current User Initials are allowed to be entered in this field If the current user has also raised the Works Order i e is the Originator Product Option AUTH OWN must be set to Y in order for the same person to both Raise and Authorise a Works Order To Authorise a Works Order its total estimated cost must be within the range defined for the User in Users HIG1832 If the User has no limits set they may authorise any value of Works Order Works Orders may be individually using this field or in batches using form Works Order Authorisation M
301. not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ipie 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustelalag Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 4 Work Orders MAI3800 Edit Default WOL Shape 3 4 General Information When a work order line has been created against a work order the user is able to digitise a new location or shape that more accurately represents the work order line In order to edit the default shape of a Work Order Line the Get From Map button on the Work Order Line window should be used EET SSUTT Defect Id Treatment Status Work Category Type Priority Sheet Completed Repaired Asset Ref Labour Units Est Cost Act Cost Identifier Descr Location Remarks WOL Id jAsset Id Schedule Gang Invoice Registerable Register Status Target Date Registerable T Register Status Target Date Registerable Register Status Target Date BOG Items View Notices Get From Map Copy Line Select Defects TMA Interface Invoices Summary Figure 79 Work Order Lines The Get from Map button is only enabled when the Work Order Line is populated and is not COMPLETED Once the Get From Map button has been selected the form will search for themes where e The theme is based on the Work Order Lines base theme e The theme has MAI3800 as a theme function If more than one theme is found the extended LOV will
302. nsent of Bentley Inc EXOR gt B L k Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE D sssntseg Ttrestnicture MANAGING INSPECTIONS 2 8 3 Inspected Roads A summary of the road sections contained in the selected road group will be displayed The following check boxes and buttons allow you to indicate the status of the inspection on each section Not Inspected If the section was not inspected check this box To check all the boxes select the Set Not Inspected All button and uncheck those sections that were inspected No Defects If no defects were found on the section check this box this is the default condition To check all the boxes select the Set No Defects All Defects If defects were found on the selected road as this box is checked the Defects window from Inspections MAI3808 is displayed for defect completion The Cancel button will clear out the road details in the lower half of the window allowing the user to re select a road group Version 4 7 52 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE MANAGING INSPECTIONS 23 Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 2 9 Defects MAI3806 E Maintenance Manager ec Inventory EY Inspections Inspections Inspections by Group
303. ntre To he Authorised By Paul Moon Job Number 00000 Authorised By Remarks Date Raised 10 MAY 2011 15 10 vu m Target Complete aa n Date Authorised Estimates Date Instructed Sub Total 363 00 Last Prite Balancing Sum O0 tC Date Received gl Total Cost e300 Date Completed Labour Units Em Defect 1 Scheme D Cyclic 0 Lines Standard item Totals Contract Totals Additional Details Flexible Attributes J Navigator Notice Summary J TMA Interface TMA Register 0 J SWM Register 0 J Copy J Print J Authorise Instruct Figure 134 Other Works 3 9 1 General Information A works order can be created for any other type of highways related work that does not involve the previous collection of defects When raising an order of this type the same module is used as in raising a defect clearance works order but it is used in a slightly different way When creating an order for other work the user selects the road sections the work is to be carried out on followed by the BOQ items that will be used when carrying out the work As this process is carried out the various totals and sub totals contained on the works order are updated instantly The Work Orders form offers you the facility to carry out what if planning by constructing your works order gradually adding and removing works order lines and schedule items until the totals match your budget before confirming the work
304. nts of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR gt MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 Be n le y Sustaining Infrastructure PAYMENTS 7 2 Payment Run MAI3840 Maintenance Manager gt Inventory amp Inspections e Works e m Contracts gt Interfaces a Financial Deselect Items for Payment Payment Run Query Payment Run Details Figure 227 Payment Run Menu Option Payment Run MAI3840 Admin Unit CNTY_RD LANCASHIRE COUNTY COUNCIL Contract Id AEDAILY AREA EAST DAILY ACTION RESPONSE TEAM Apply VAT Y N B Process Payment Run Figure 228 Payment Run 7 2 1 General Information This module is used to request a payment run The payment run will pay all unpaid completed works orders and works order lines which meet the input criteria except for those which have held from payment using Deselect Items For Payment MAI3842 7 2 2 Payment Run Admin Unit Required List Enter the admin unit which this payment run is being run against Contract Id Optional List If required select a valid contract to restrict the payment run Version 4 7 283 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to b
305. nts of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 W etalafig VureptHict re WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Bllcopy works Order E Copy Estimated Quantities Continue Cancel Figure 95 Copy Works Order popup Continue will create new copy of the Work Order or Work Order Line Cancel will return the user to the Work Order details with no changes made Copy is only available on a scheme type work order If a copy is carried out on a work order that has combined defect and scheme lines only the scheme portion of the order is copied A work order can be copied at any stage of its life cycle the copied work order will be un instructed awaiting modification The copy work order will have a new number in line with the work order numbering convention the description of the new work order will contain the number of the original order with the word COPY appended Print Prints the instructed works order the format of the printout is set up in Product Options HIG9130 and setting the WORREPMOD option to the required works ordering report Once a works order has been printed changes to the works order lines are not allowed unless the Product Option ADDPRINT is set to Y Authorise Sets the Date Authorised to today s date and time sysdat
306. o O2RSDO1M 715 lO2RSDO1M 71 Date Instructed 22 NOV 2006 22 NOV 2006 Date Complete Road Sections Calculate Quantities Figure 210 Schedule by Section Version 4 7 262 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR P MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 6 CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERS ADMIN Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 5 4 1 General Information This option is used when the product option USECYCGRPD USECYCGRPL is set to N This form allows a schedule to be viewed along with all of the road sections that make up that schedule It is then possible to view the job items which when the schedule is run will be carried out on the inventory within each section Finally although the system will calculate how much work is required in each section via Cyclic Maintenance Schedules it is possible to amend the quantity on a section by section basis to retain complete control over how much work will be issued at any one time 5 4 2 Schedules by Road Section On entry to this window an existing schedule created using Cyclic Maintenance Schedules must be queried back before you can view and update the actual amounts on each road section Select Enter Query enter your selection criteria followed by Execute Query
307. o reference standard external activities Description Required Enter a description of the external activity Organisation Code Required List Enter the identifier of the organisation performing the external activity The organisation will have been set up using Organisations MAI1870 Version 4 7 210 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc pon 34 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustelaiag Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Name Display Only The organisations name will be displayed Address Display Only The organisations address will be displayed g Membership Section Start Date Signed Off Date Figure 180 Membership 3 17 3 Membership This window is used to maintain the links and dates associated with the external activity Link Id Required List Enter the linkcode for the required section Section Required List Enter the section number Version 4 7 211 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR 5 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Pa NEES WORK ORDER MANAGEM
308. o the GRI You will be prompted to enter a file name if you have a number of saved parameters double clicking the field will result in a list of saved parameters being displayed Version 4 7 214 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR w2 MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Ss WORKS ORDERING REPORTS Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 4 2 Work Order Unpriced MAI3485 Purpose This option produces a 3 part report The first provides an unpriced Work Order for the selected Works Order Number and includes the following information on each Works Order Line WO Line Number Link Number Road Section Number Start and End Chainage of Defect on W O Line XSP of Defect on W O Line Item Type Repair Description Unit Flexible attribute Order Quantity Rate Discount Order Value The Second part provides a summary of the Road Sections on the Selected Works Order and includes the following information Agency Code Link Code Road Section Number Section Class Road Section Description The third part provides a list of Cross Sectional Positions XSP s on the Road Sections selected on the chosen Works Order 4 2 1 Selection Parameters Works Order No Required Enter the Works Order Number to be reported on
309. o which the Percentage Item is associated to be increased or decreased depending on the percentage value defined for the Percentage Item in the selected Contract For example work carried out on Bank Holidays may attract a percentage surcharge Adding a Percentage Item to the BOQ would allow this surcharge to be applied Percentage Items may only be associated with the Standard Job Items which have the Allow Percent Items flag set to Y in Standard Items MAI3888 Maintenance Manager System Administration Manual Percentage Items are those Standard Job Items which have the Unit of Measurement as defined for Product Option PERC ITEM e g PERCENTAGE The computation method for a Percentage Item is determined by Product Option CUM PERC and can either by NORMAL When set to NORMAL a percentage item will display the percentage of the standard item Or CUMULATIVE A setting of CUMULATIVE will result in the percentage item being the sum of the standard item and other percentage items related to the standard item The Product Option Value can be overridden by adding the required value into the Percent Item Computation field in the program details window This will set the Computation method for any subsequent Percentage Items added to a BOQ for a Works Order line on the current Works Order to the value entered This allows for different Computation methods to be used without the need to edit the Product Option value Note These Values Normal a
310. oc inspections carried out as a result of a traffic accident or public enquiry are commonly carried out without the aid of a DCD these inspections can be logged directly onto the system using this form The road section inspected can be quickly located by using wildcards and some selection criteria in either the Road Section or Description fields For example fill in the mandatory fields then enter 12 followed by List will call the gazetteer and display all road sections and road groups containing the above selection criteria Similarly in the description field if you enter GIANTS followed by List will retrieve all road sections and road groups with GIANTS in the description This is very useful if you have set your gazetteer up in inspection areas routes or zones because you do not have to remember which group each section is in Manual inspections can be entered using this form but if your inspections contain a large number of road sections it is more advisable to use Inspections by Road Group MAI3899 Inspections and associated defects can also be logged onto the system as a result of a public enquiry using Enquiries DOC 0150 View the inspection history for a road section by querying back by section The details can then be viewed using Next Record This information is vital when defending an insurance claim and can be printed out using the Insurance Claims Report MAI2790 If the system has been set up to use multiple Admin
311. of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 23 Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 3 7 Send Notice to Register TMA1800 ERE Notice to Register TMA1800 DORSET tmatest2 EXDL1 6VM6 TMA v4 0 5 2 Choice of Dealt Notice Type Notice Promoter District Works Reference Selected With fis soon amp cont v Ea Work Detais Gonads N Messanae E oere Validation Results ErrorVarning Message Recipient District 001 DORSET COUNTY COUNCIL Warning Notice submitted late possible FPN Minor z au E Works Category Mororen Warning Works starting early need agreement to start before expiry of notice g Way Restrict Type None signing only ae m Ru pothole repair Works Description Detects Location Description lene 4 Ext Ref TEST ANNE Estimated Start Date 27 MAR 2009 T Estimated End Date 27 MAR 2003 T Actual Start Date TI Actual End Date T Start Time Estimated Insp Units h Actual Insp Units Works Restricted Parking Suspensions Additional Information Working Hours Footway Closure LL Notes Default duration for this works category is 3 working days End date defaulted to earliest defect completion date 27 MAR 2009 Start date defaulted to estimated end date minus remaining default duration Defaults Send To Register Figure 119 Send Notice To Register 3 7 1 General Information When the form is ca
312. or Manual Work Sheet Display Only This field will be used to display the reference number of the work sheet containing this repair once it has been printed Payment Id Display Only This field will be used to display the reference number of the payment covering this repair once it has been received Payment Id s are associated to repairs once the Payment Run MAI3840 module has been executed Date Paid Display Only This field will display the date that the payment run was executed Check Batch Display Only If this repair is selected for a random quality inspection this field will be used to display the system generated batch number for that quality inspection Check Result Display Only If this repair was selected for a random quality inspection the results of that inspection will appear in this field Check Date Display Only When required the date of the quality inspection will appear in this field Version 4 7 22 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc e 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS E Total Qty Unit Rate Item Code Dim 1 Dim 2 Dim 3 Lab Units Est Cost Act Cost cum wo 1 421 Hon 188 03 TME Mobi
313. or the Rogue Item Version 4 7 184 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ipie 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE prosdhesded Br bids WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Standard job items including Rogue Items are managed through Standard Items MAI3888 For further information on Standard Items refer to the Contracts and Contractors section of the Maintenance Manager Administration Manual 3 12 11 Contracts and Rates It is possible to select standard job items which do not appear on the current contract for this works order These items can be identified as the Rate field will be empty indicating that there is no known unit rate for this item in the selected contract In this situation the software will not be able to calculate the Total Qty for this item and can therefore not cost the works order correctly This can be used effectively when comparing multiple contracts the contract selected when raising the works order may not be the contract suitable once all the schedule items have been entered To circumvent this situation you must do one of the following actions Replace the job item with an item which appears on the current contract Replace the job item with a Rogue Item Select a different contract Add the missing item to the c
314. orders Once the status code is set to available it is automatically updated by the system e When the defect is placed on a work order the status will be updated to SELECTED e Once the work order is instructed the defect status code will be updated automatically to INSTRUCTED Version 4 7 13 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE e Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS Some organisations choose to have the defects default to Unavailable defects that are set to Unavailable can be made available individually simply by changing the status field this is the only case where the status code is updated manually Alternatively all defects for an inspection can be made available in one operation by selecting the Set Batch Available button when in the previous window If the status of the defect is changed manually a The Status Reason pop up window will appear where a reason for the status change should be entered Reason For Status Change Defect completed as part of a scheme Figure 12 Status change The history of changes made to the defect status can be viewed using Audit Details HIG1505 Rules for the audit should be set up by the system administrator in form Audit Details
315. ork order line will be displayed 3 11 5 Completing a Works Order When completing a works order it is possible to update the schedule items to reflect the actual cost of repairing the defect Version 4 7 158 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 23 Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure For information on making an Interim Payment refer to the section Making an Interim Payment above To enter the actual cost of repairing the defect and Complete the Works Order Line follow the procedure below Change the status of the works order line to COMPLETED Enter the completed date Update the dimensions in the BOQ Items window to the actual dimensions Add any further BOQ items if required Note To avoid problems the Save button should be used when each BOQ item has been added Once the work order has been instructed if the wrong BOQ has been entered or the band has changed prior to the entry of the actual values the incorrect BOQ item should be zeroed it cannot be deleted as it has been used in the definition of the estimated values before entering the correct item Save the changes Once the changes have been saved no further changes can be made to that works order line or its BOQ ite
316. oviding it is also allowed with feature 5 The defect has been repaired via structural maintenance Superseded defects are reopened with this status This happens in Inspections MAI3808 when a superseding defect is deleted The defect has been written off If no chainages are recorded the inspection loader cannot supersede defects so they have to be written off This may be set manually in Inspections MAIB3S808 or automatically from Works Orders MAI3800 by setting the work status to NOT DONE The description type and location are protected This feature is only relevant when the defect is updateable i e feature 5 Y If a status code ceases to be required the end date must be set it must not be deleted for historical reasons Version 4 7 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE MANAGING INSPECTIONS 234 Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 2 2 Inspections MAI3808 Gi inspections ma2808 Inspection Id Inspector 2nd Inspector Initiation Type Weather Condition Road Section Description Start Chainage Activities Defects L x A Maintenance Manager h Inventory E Inspections Inspections Inspections by Group Defects Figure 3 Inspections
317. ow Itis a display only window which shows all contracts which can satisfy some or all of the work defined on the Works Order For each contract the window shows the percentage of the order lined that the contract has priced and can therefore complete as well as the total cost where that contract is to be used If available the window will also show the average score achieved by that contractor over the past year to date as well as the total value of orders placed with that contractor in the year to date If the Contractor has had a financial limit on Works Order values that may be issued to him imposed in Contractors MAI3881 the Minimum and Maximum values will be displayed To select an alternative contract for use on this works order highlight the required contract then select the Select Contract button If product Option WORREFGEN is set to either C for Contract Based Works Order Reference Number generation or A for Administration Unit Works Order Reference Number Generation and the initial Contract selected is changed the Works Order will Cancelled and an exact copy made with the new reference number being generated The Works Order will have Cancelled appended to the start of it s description To return to the Works Order form without selecting a Contractor press the Cancel button If the Value of the Works Order is outside the limits set for the Contractor a warning will be displayed a shown below Version 4 7 1
318. ow this process Select the Works Order Line for which to make the Interim Payment Set the Works Order Line status to VALUATION The BOQ estimated quantities will be stored and Zero estimates will be displayed in their place Enter the actual quantities of work done to date that this is a cumulative amount Version 4 7 195 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR P MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE S WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure Note When entering a Valuation for an Interim Payment the Minimum Quantity limit for the Standard Item is overridden but the Maximum Quantity limit is retained If required add any Percentage Items or other Standard Items needed Set the Works Order Line status to INTERIM Press the Save button on the menu toolbar The Works Order Line is now ready for part payment on the next Payment Run i e the work done to date will be paid but the Works Order Line will not be Completed When the Works Order Line is included on a Payment Run the Status of the Works Order Line will be set to PART PAID If a further Interim Payment is to be made on this Works Order Line simply repeat this process Details of the last valuation can be seen for a BOQ item by pressing the Expand button o
319. pections by road group and quickly indicate which sections have been inspected and which of the inspected sections contained defects This will considerably speed up data entry if a paper based inspection system is being used Any road group within the gazetteer are valid for use it is therefore important that your road group hierarchy is set up correctly to allow you to gain most advantage from the use of this form Setting up the gazetteer can be viewed in the Network Manager Manual Inspections Created using this form can be viewed or edited using Inspections MAI3808 For ad hoc inspections of individual road sections it is more advisable to use Inspections MAI3808 discussed above Version 4 7 50 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE e Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS 2 8 20 Inspections by Group This window holds basic details of the inspection such as the date it was performed who carried it out the weather and road conditions at the time Inspector Required List Select the inspector from the List of Values These inspectors must be logged on the system and are set up using Users HIG1832 2nd Inspector Optional List If required select the 2nd inspec
320. played on this form if they have been selected during the running of report Work for Quality Inspection MAI3950 Once Quality Inspection results have been updated using this form they can be reported on using Quality Inspection Performance MAI3952 3 16 2 Work Order Lines When you enter this window it will be in query mode enter your selection criteria followed by Execute Query to return the required works order line details Quality Inspections can be queried on Check Batch Road Id Defect Id Schedule Id Works Order Number or any combination of these fields Check Batch Display Only List Displays the Check Batch number generated during the running of report Work for Quality Inspection MAI3950 List is only available in query mode Road Id Desc Display Only Displays the section ID and description of the road section to which this works order relates Version 4 7 207 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 B etal fig VuFeptHictUre WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Defect Id Display Only Displays the unique ID of the defect which this works order was rectifying Schedule Display Only For cyclic maintenance works orders this field displays the ID of the
321. ple POTH Version 4 7 128 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc acu Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 PaA hts WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Priority Display Only For a defect clearance work order the defect priority will be displayed for example 2 1 End Date Display Only For defect clearance work orders the Defect Due by date will be displayed For small scheme and cyclic work orders the Target Date will be displayed TMA Notice Count Display Only The number of notices that this work order line is on will be displayed Small scheme and Cyclic work order lines may span more that one USRN Select WOL Checkbox This Checkbox is used to include or exclude a work order line from the highlighted notice above Default for the highlighted notice is to select the Checkbox When the Checkbox is unchecked the following validation is carried out e If itis the only WOL against the selected Notice and the WOL has only one Notice against it if the check box gets deselected the Select Notice check box becomes non selectable for this WOL so no notice can be generated e fitis not the only WOL against the selected Notice and the WOL has only one Notice against it then the check box gets deselected The Select Notice che
322. ption LITTLEBREDY FARM ROAD JCT LONGLANDS LANE TO JCT SHEEP DOWN ROAD LITTLEBREDY x Co ordinate 359350 471 y Co ordinate 88654 617 Cancel Figure 27 Confirm Network Selection The following Details are displayed on the Confirm Network Selection window e Network Type and Description e Section Name and Description e Section Admin Unit e Xand Y coordinates of the defect Version 4 7 30 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc 5 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS e Defect Details Date Time Created 25 Nov 2009 t T 17H Inspector SYS SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR Safety Detailed Flag D Detailed Inspection Activity MC Minor Carriageway Repairs Initiation Type NRM Normal SISS ALL Al Standard Items Defect Type POTH w Pehoe Priority umm Category 0 Location Description laet 70000000 0 XSP amp g Defect Description pothole Special Instructions Notify zj Recharge vj Asset Modification Number 24 lt Back Next gt Figure 28 Defect Details A window will be displayed allowing the Defect details to be entered To abandon the Defect creation process
323. quired select the 2nd inspector from the List of Values Last Updated Display Only Displays the date the inspection report was last updated Initiation Type Required List Select the initiation type of this inspection from the list These values can be added to using Domains HIG9120 and updating the INITIATION TYPE option An initiation type of NRM will re schedule the inspection of the selected type on the section selected Safety Detailed Required List Enter S for Safety Inspection D for Detailed Inspection Weather Condition Optional List If known select the weather at the time of the inspection These values can be added to using Domains HIG9120 and updating the WEATHER_CONDITION option Road Surface Condition Optional List If known enter the road surface condition at the time of the inspection These values can be added to using Domains HIG9120 and updating the SURFACE_CONDITION option Road Section Required List Use the Gazetteer to select the road section in which this inspection occurred Wildcards may be used The road section inspected can be quickly located by using wildcards and some selection criteria in either the Road Section or Description fields For example fill in the mandatory fields then enter 12 followed by List will call the gazetteer and display all road sections and road groups containing the above selection criteria If a Road Section is Closed subsequ
324. r List The method of works order number generation is set up in Product Options HIG9130 setting the WORREFGEN option There are three methods of generating the works order number 1 Manually entered by the user the system will check the number is unique 2 Contract Based the contract name will prefix a unique number 3 Admin unit based the admin unit number for the selected contract will prefix a unique number A list of existing works orders is only available in query mode When creating new Works Orders enter a description of the order in the adjacent field Interim Payment Optional Enter Y to signify that the Works Order will be subject to Interim Payments on Part Completed Works Order lines This may be entered at any time during the life of the Works Order Version 4 7 87 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ipie 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Biaesialeg Vitae WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Priority Optional List Enter a Priority for the Works Order These will have been previously set up using Work Order Priorities MAIO312 In addition the contents of the WOR PRIORITY list of values maintained using Domains HIG9120 will be concatenated onto the list this is to cater for backward compatibilit
325. r also interfaces into contractor based systems which manage the labour plant and materials primitives that make up the higher level BOQ maintenance manager includes a wide range of standard reports which enable performance to be monitored against predetermined standards These measures include how quickly defects of given priorities are repaired and can be used to monitor inspectors contracts and budgets maintenance manager by exor is supplied with a standard set of activities interval codes defects and treatments these can be modified and added to to suit your own operational requirements if required using the modules contained within this chapter This User Manual is one of four manuals that are provided with each copy of Maintenance Manager by Exor MM Those manuals are e Installation Manual Describes how to install MM on different computing environments e Maintenance Manager System Admin Manual Describes how to configure MM metadata and initially populate MM tables to conform to an organization s business processes e Maintenance Manager User Manual Describes how to use MM on a daily basis to manage the preventative recurring and ad hoc maintenance and repair activity e Maintenance Manager Inspection Loader Manual Describes how to download and upload information between MM and other applications or Data Collection Devices lap tops pen based PDAs etc Version 4 7 1 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this
326. r for new Standard Items to be added Once the actual quantities have been added the Works Order Line can then be included in a payment run As the work progresses further this Interim Payment process can be repeated until the work is Completed and the Final Payment is made If an Interim Payment is made on a Works Order Line raised to repair a defect the defect status will be set to STR MAIN the Status Code with feature 6 allowed A Works Order cannot be completed until all the Works Order Lines on the Works Order are Completed Version 4 7 120 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc cdd Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 sedat hito WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Interim payments can only be made on Works Orders that have the Interim Payment flag set to Y This flag can be changed at any time To make an Interim Payment follow this process Select the Works Order Line for which to make the Interim Payment Set the Works Order Line status to VALUATION The BOQ estimated quantities will be stored and Zero estimates will be displayed in their place Enter the actual quantities of work done to date that this is a cumulative amount Note When entering a Valuation for an Interim Payment the Minimum Quantity limit for the Standard I
327. r is not selected the reason entered as to why the cheapest Contractor was not selected will be displayed Percent Item Computation Optional List The Product Option Value can be overridden by adding the required value into the Percent Item Computation field in the Program details window This will set the Computation method for any subsequent Percentage Items added to a BOQ for a Works Order line on the current Works Order to the value entered This allows for different Computation methods to be used without the need to edit the Product Option value Select Continue to return to the Works Orders Defects window Version 4 7 194 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 N etal fig Vurestiictur WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 12 19Invoices DE 47x Payment Id Payment Value Date Paid Invoice 221 47 50 23 JAN 2007 TDS18J 44 E Figure 169 Invoices Once a Works Order Line or Part of a Works Order Line in the case of an Interim payment has been included in payment run the Invoice details can be displayed by pressing the Invoices button on the Works Order Line window The Payment Id Payment Value and Date Paid will be displayed To add the Invoice number cli
328. r the Work Order The default value is determined by the value set for Product Option DEFSCHTYPL or DEFSCHTYPD depending on the System Flag set for the Section or Budget Allocation Group on which the Defect is raised The default value may only be updated if product option DEFSCHTYPU is set to Y Contract Required Default List This is the Contract used within the Work Order The default value is determined by the value set for product Option DUMCONCODE Once the appropriate Contract has been selected press the Next Button Work Order Default If Product Option WORREFGEN Is set to M manual the Work Order Number and Description should be entered If set to C Contract based or A Admin Unit based the work order number will be automatically generated when the Next gt button is pressed and a valid Budget is selected If Multiple Budgets exist for the defect Activity Scheme Type Section or Budget Allocation Group combinations a list will be displayed from which to select the required Budget Version 4 7 11 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR PF MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 6 MANAGING INSPECTIONS Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure Description Balance Cost Code LOCAL ACCIDENT A TER CARE sc 0 LOCA
329. r written consent of Bentley Inc acu Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE e Sustaining Infrastructure WORKS ORDERING REPORTS 4 4 BOQ Work Order Defects MAI3906 Purpose This report produces a detailed Work Order which includes any Bill of Quantity items specified for Work Order Lines on the Selected Works Order You may choose to print Labour Units and or target repair dates for each Work Order Line using the appropriate Selection Parameters You may also choose to print only the Work Order only a Control Sheet for the Work Order or both 4 4 1 Selection Parameters Work Order No Required List Enter the Works Order Number to be reported on Work Sheet No Optional To reprint part of an already printed Work Order enter the Work Sheet Number to be reprinted This appears near the top of each Sheet Print Lab Units Y N Required Default List Enter Y to include the number of Labour Units needed to complete a Bill of Quantity Item on a Works Order Line or N to not include Labour Units The default value is N Print Target Repair Dates Required Default List Enter Y to include the target repair date for a Work Order Line or N to omit this detail The default value is N Wrks ord Ctrl sht Both Required Default List Enter W to print only the Work Order C to print only the Control Sheet for a Work Order or B to print both Version 4 7 219 CONFIDENTIALITY STATE
330. ral Information This module is intended to allow the user to view defect details by any road group or road section Adding additional criteria can restrict the numbers of defects retrieved Version 4 7 59 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 6 Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS 2 10 2 View Defects Road Type Required List The road type entered here will restrict the road groups displayed when the Gazetteer button is selected Road Id Required Gaz Enter the required road id selecting the Gazetteer button will display the full gazetteer this can be restricted by either entering a value in the Road Type field or by entering some criteria in this field For example if you enter 12 followed by Gazetteer the gazetteer will display all road sections and road groups containing the above selection criteria Road Desc Required Gaz Enter the road description As above if you enter W GIANTS followed by Gazetteer the gazetteer will retrieve all road sections and road groups with GIANTS in the description This is very useful if you have set your gazetteer up in inspection areas routes or zones because you do not have to remember which group each section is
331. rated in one of the following ways Entered into the Data Capture Device by the inspector at the time of the inspection Automatically by the use of Treatment Models MAI3814 Maintenance Manager System Admin Manual When the inspection is loaded onto the system either manually or by the use of a DCD the BOQ items can be added once the relevant inspection is retrieved These BOQ items can be modified and added to in the following ways Retrieve the inspection containing the relevant defect Version 4 7 54 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 Be ntle y MANAGING INSPECTIONS When the defect is placed on a works order The following additional information will be displayed for the selected BOQ item when the Expand key is selected BOC tern Details Item Code Item Name Min Quantity Max Quantity Lab Unit Factor BMC0001 Bitmac black road surfacing 00 1000 00 Dim 1 Dim 2 Dim 3 Quantity Unit Cost Labour Units Estimates 2 00 2 00 EUN Cancel Actuals 5 00 T se so 5o Figure 56 BOQ Item details This window allows you to compare the actual values vs the original estimated values to see any variation If the estimated values are blank and the actual values are populated the s
332. rds X and Y Optional The Co ords X and Y fields will display the defect coordinates if the defect has been raised via Locator or within MapCapture The user may additionally enter or modify the co ordinates of the defect in these fields if required Roadstud Type Optional List For Roadstud related defects enter M for a Mandatory defect A for an advisory This field can only be updated if the inventory type is RS Activity Required Default List This field will display the inspection activity carried out during the inspection These activities are set up using Activities MAI1200 Maintenance Manager System Administrator Manual Defect Type Required List Select the type of defect The list of available defects will be restricted to those associated with the previously selected activity This association is set up using Defect Control Data MAI1300 Maintenance Manager System Administrator Manual Flexible Attribute Fields Number shown in this screen shot Flexible fields may be displayed on screen dependant on the Defect Activity and Defect Type These flexible fields will display the values for the attributes as defined in Defect Control Data MAI1300 Maintenance Manager System Administrator Manual for the chosen Defect and Activity Type The field name will also be determined by the value entered in the Text field for an Attribute in Defect Control Data MAI1300 SISS Required Lis
333. re confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE S EE CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERS ADMIN Description Optional If required enter further descriptive text concerning the schedule Work Category Required List Select a work category that is to be associated with this schedule Work categories are defined using Item Code Breakdowns MAI194 Maintenance Manager System Administration Manual Agency Required Default List Select the agency responsible for this schedule SISS Optional List If required select a Standard Item Sub Section code to restrict the schedule Frequency Required List Select a frequency code to indicate how often the work contained in this schedule will take place The frequency codes are defined via Interval Codes HIG1220 Maintenance Manager System Administration Manual Schedule by Asset Optional List Enter Y to generate a cyclic work order with a work order line per asset using Cyclic Works Orders MAI3800A The work order line created will also contain the asst reference With this field set to Y the schedule will not be visible in Cyclic Maintenance by Road Section MAI3862 Road Group Type Required List Select a valid road group type from the List of Values The road groups available will have been defined in a
334. re tete Ph tre REEE a PL eda ah LEER RD 205 3 16 Quality Inspection Results MAI3820 essere nennen 206 3 16 1 General IntormatiOn Leti Crete tee reos tte tries ti Dad oL etb Ce Se bae Pob TEE ERR EEE 207 3 16 2 Work Order Lite iieri Lee re ete intet Pr Here Led di Cte redet Por e HE DET d pda d rone de 207 3 17 External Activity MAII280 esssesssssesseseeeeseeeee eene entente nennen tene en nene tenes tne ne intent 209 3171 GeneralbIntormatiOn iiie rint eet te rede reir in eo eta eia E STE REDE SE LRL REGE 210 3 172 External ACUVIDy ioci n ceti de ie cer t EE foi eee RE ELE TREE REUS 210 3 143 Membership zs uiid thes oss torri tet eo fue epu A egt eile bent etes et es es veo Rene EE EEan 211 4 Works Ordering Reports Ge hie Ert leven re eL EP PP eR PP Urea e be ERR Ree L Eee pe ESSE Ede 213 4 1 R nning REPOMMS fr agen teeice 213 4 2 Work Order Unpriced MAI3485 0 0 cece ceccceceeececeeeeeeaeceeneeceeceeesaeceeaaeceeaeeceaeeeeaaeceeaaeseeaeeees 215 4 2 1 Selection Parameters 2 2 sceseccedsicedsassavkecessdeacsedsesacdesdesadsatdascecevsdecdcadussdcaebhadedsaduescecesader cate 215 4 2 2 Works Order Unpriced MAI3485 oo ceecceesseceeneeceeececeeeeeaaeceeaeeceeneeseaeeeeaaeeeeaeeesaes 216 4 3 Work Order Priced MAI3480 cece cccssecccssssececsessececeesaeeeenssaececsesseeecsesseseceesseseeseaeeeesenaes 217 4 3 1 Selection Parameters
335. red or the band has changed prior to the entry of the actual values the incorrect BOQ item should be zeroed it cannot be deleted as it has been used in the definition of the estimated values before entering the correct item For information on adding a Percentage Item to a BOQ refer to the section Adding a Percentage Item Page 109 above Item Code Required List Select a valid standard job item to represent a task to be carried out Version 4 7 157 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR P MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE j WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure Any items added must exist on the selected contract Description Display Only Displays the description of the standard job item Dim 1 Dim2 Dim3 Required or Optional Each standard job item can have one or more dimensions associated with it depending on the nature of the work represented by the job item For example replacing damaged kerbing will have a single dimension representing the length of kerbing to be replaced whilst filling a pothole may have three dimensions representing the length width and depth of the pothole to be filled Consequently these three dimension fields are Required or Optional according to the needs of the
336. retrieved Date Due Display Only The date on which the roadstuds are due to be repaired is displayed This date is arrived at by adding the three months to the date that the last defective roadstud was discovered Version 4 7 70 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS Exclude Y N Required Enter either Y or N which denote exclusion or inclusion from the batch setting of repair dates for the defective roadstuds 2 14 4 Confirm Select the Set Batch Repair Date button to confirm the selected roadstuds are to be repaired Repair Display Only The date on which the roadstuds are due to be repaired is displayed This date is arrived at by adding the three months to the date that the last defective roadstud was discovered Version 4 7 71 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc 5 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS 2 15 Responses to Notices MAI3816 LE Ma
337. s 2 15 2 Notice Notifiable defect notices are produced automatically in response to the Notify field being completed in Inspections MAI3808 Before the notice can be retrieved it has to be printed using Print Defect Notices MAI3904 Enter suitable criteria to restrict the display of notices to those with which you are concerned then press Execute Query to retrieve those notices The following fields are query only and can be used to retrieve notice details Notifiable Org Notice Id Date Printed Respond By Admin Unit 2 15 3 Defects All the defects associated with the selected notice will be displayed When a response is received from the notifiable organisation enter the Response Type Date of Response and the Accepted fields to record the contents of the reply Selecting the Defects button will display the defects using Defects MAI3806 Defect Id Display Only The number of the defect This number is allocated when the defect is first logged and cannot be changed It serves to uniquely identify the defect Defect Type Display Only The code and description representing the standard defect type relating to this defect This will have originally been decided by the inspector Date Raised Display Only The date the defect was originally recorded Road Section Id Display Only The road section number of the section in which the defect was found Resp Type Optional List Select a code
338. s order and forwarding it to the contractor Defect clearance works order lines can also be added to works orders of this type if required this is covered in Works Orders Defects Copy This will copy the entire work order including all work order lines and associated BOQ items the following pop up window will be displayed allowing the user to copy the BOQ items and their associated estimated quantities or copy the BOQ items only without the estimated quantities Version 4 7 146 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ia 5 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustelaiag Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT I copy works Order m Copy Estimated Quantities F Continue Cancel Figure 135 Copy Works Order pop up Continue will create new copy of the Work Order or Work Order Line Cancel will return the user to the Work Order details with no changes made The Copy button is only available on a scheme type work order If a copy is carried out on a work order that has combined defect and scheme lines only the scheme portion of the order is copied A work order can be copied at any stage of its life cycle the copied work order will be un instructed awaiting modification The copy work order will have a new number in line wit
339. schedule under which this works order was created Work Order Display Only Displays the reference number of this works order Work Sheet Display Only Displays the serial number of the worksheet Check Result Optional List Enter the result of the inspection Check Code Optional List If the inspection result is Fail enter the appropriate code to define the reason for the failure These values are amended in Domains HIG9120 and by editing Domain CHECK CODE Check Date Optional Enter the date the Quality Inspection was carried out Check By Optional List Enter the Initials of the supervisor who conducted the Quality Inspection Comments Optional Edit Enter any required comments Version 4 7 208 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 cH en t le y Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 17 External Activity MAI1280 Maintenance Manager C Inventory Ld Inspections Works Works Orders Defects amp Small Schemes Works Orders Cyclic Maintain Work Orders Contractor Interface Work Order TMA Interface Gang Crew Allacation Work Orders Authorisation View Cyclic Maintenance Work Cyclic Maintenance Schedules Cyclic M
340. sent of Bentley Inc EXOR P MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Ss WORKS ORDERING REPORTS Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 4 10 Review Raised Works Orders MA3490 Purpose This report produces a summary list of all Work Orders which match the required selection parameters The following information is displayed Date Raised Road Group Id Work Order No Maintenance Work Order or Defect Clearance SISS Code Expenditure Code Date Closed 4 10 1 Selection Parameters Works Order Status Required Default List Enter A to include all Work Orders C to include Completed Work Orders only or R to include Raised but not completed Work Orders Date From Required Default Enter the earliest date from which to select Work Orders Only Work Orders Raised after this date will be included in the report The default value is the system date 365 days Date To Required Default Enter the latest date from which to select Work Orders Only Work Orders Raised before this date will be included in the report The default value is the system date Local or DoT Flag Required Default Enter D to include Work Orders on DoT roads or L for Work Orders on Local roads The default value is D Version 4 7 231 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without
341. sing Contracts MAI3880 Maintenance Manager Administration Manual If you have set up a dummy contract using Product Options HIG9130 and setting the DUMCONCODE option this contract can be selected this will allow you to fully define the work order before assigning it to a contract Once you have specified the relevant Bill of Quantity items for this work order press the Contract Totals button to view a list of suitable contracts If product Option WORREFGEN is set to either C for Contract Based Works Order Reference Number generation or A for Administration Unit Works Order Reference Number Generation and the initial Contract selected is changed the Works Order will Cancelled and an exact copy made with the new reference number being generated The Works Order will have Cancelled appended to the start of it s description Contractor Display Only The code and name for the contractor will be displayed This is obtained from the contract details Contact Optional Enter a contact name if required Contractor Score Optional If required enter a score to represent the performance of the contractor in fulfilling this works order This can only be entered when the works order is complete Originator Required Default List Select a valid person ID to represent the originator of the contract Default is the current user To be Authorised By Optional List When creating a work order the user may
342. spection will be displayed in this field Cost Display Only Displays the total cost of the works order or work order line Paid to date Display Only The amount that has been paid on this work order will be displayed Auth Initials Display Only The Authorising officers initials from the work order will be displayed Balance Display Only The Balance on the work order or work order line will be displayed Estimated Cost Display Only Displays the estimated cost of the works order or work order line Auth Name Display Only The Authorising officers name will be displayed Status Required Default List To stop a works order from being paid in the next payment run set this field to HELD To release the payment set the field back to COMPLETED The payment will then be made by the next Payment Run Refer to the section Payment Run MAI3840 below If the Works Order Line is part of an Interim Payment the Status code may be changed to either VALUATION which would allow the actual quantities of the BOQ items to be amended or UNAPPROVED To release the payment set the field back to INTERIM The payment will then be made by the next Payment Run Refer to the section Payment Run MAI3840 below Percent Diff Display Only The percentage difference between the cost and the estimated cost will be displayed Version 4 7 282 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The conte
343. ssociated documents An example of the Worktray showing hover on the work order number is shown below 4 exor Information Manager Home Work Orders Admin Work Orders for Authorisation Instruction Raised gt 5 Days P Rows 18 qb Locsin J This query returns more than 10 000 rows please filter your data to ensure complete results Map Oa n n ws 3 a a 1 14204 07 JUL 10 test e a a a 1 0 00 26 FEB 10 P NE A12 COLCHESTER RD WB JW WHITELANDS WAY ON DEDICATED LEFT TURN LN C W PH PATCH a A A n 1 0 00 26 FEB 10 P A312 CHURCH RD SB BEFORE WHITE HART RBT BY LC 062 L1 MHC SURR FAILED L amp R amp PATCH WITH HRA a 1 0 00 26 FEB 10 P A312 CHURCH RD NB OPP NORTHOLT LIBRARY B4 JW BENGARTH RD POTHOLE PATCH WITH HRA 109 PM 3 a ri iu ri 1 0 00 26 FEB 10 P NW A406 NCR JW RANDALL AVE O S 724 NOISY MHC L amp R amp PATCH SURROUND 109 PM3 o o 1 1 1 0 00 27 FEB10 NW PERM HRA PATCH AROUND GULLY A1 BARNET WAY NB BEFORE STIRLING RDBT LC 1072 LANE3 d m iu ri a 1 0 00 27 FEB 10 NE PERM LARGE HRA PATCH A12 EASTERN AVE EB FROM JW MAWNEY RD TO LC 85 LANES 182 ir f Tr Road Id Road Description Renal Meteet Era 2 Schedule Estimated Labour Type Priority Cost aah Ee Description Units Work Category AT2EASTERN AV EAST WB FROM NORTH STREET TO BARK F z 0000A12_1 00042 amp DAG BOUNDARY RU7 237440 POTH 1A wwe 9 c 0 o 109_PW3715 SS Se 09 PW3T gy ug mA a Fi
344. sssessseeeeseeeeene eene nennen nennen enne nnns 227 4 8 1 Selection Parameters 1 5 112 tete EER s AO SC EER AREE FEES ER RERUMS E PER REI TR Ede 227 4 8 2 Work Orders Enhanced MAI3919 0 0 cecccsscceessnececsseaeeeessacececsesaeeecsesaeeeessaaeeeeneaaes 228 4 9 Work Order Strip Plan MAI5130 00 eee eecceceeceeesseeeeaeceeaeeceeeeecaeceeaaeceeaeeceseeesaeeeeaaeceeaeeees 230 4 9 1 Selection Parameter c0scesiecccscsatsescesseccssceadsesseueecesdececcedaascccsedeveccsdnascecesduscceetnessscceeduateets 230 4 9 2 Works Order Strip Plan MAIS130 esee eene eere 230 EXOR E MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 Be ntle y TABLE OF CONTENTS 4 10 Review Raised Works Orders MA3490 essseeesseereerssressesrresisrisserrrssresresresesrrssreresseeseeseeet 231 4 10 1 Selection Parameters sconna a aa 231 4 10 2 Review Raised Works Orders MAI3490 esssssssssseeeeeeeeeeee ener rennen 232 4 11 Defects not yet Instructed MAI3922 00 eee eecsseceeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeseecaaecsaecnaeseaeseaeeeeeeseeeeneeees 233 4 11 2 Defects Not Yet Instructed MAI3922 ooo ceccceeseeceeeeeeeeeeeesaeceeaaeceeneeeeaeeesaaeceeaeeeaes 234 4 12 Summary of Defects Not Yet Instructed MAI3920 ssesseeseeeeeeeneren nennen enn 235 4 12 1 Selection Parameters ssssssssssseseseeeeee eene eene en tnneennnet nnns et nnne tentent s ten ne nenne 235 4 13 Instructed Work by Status MAI3924 sssssssssses
345. st If required enter the Road Group Id from which to select defects from If this field is left blank all Road Group Types will be reported on Date Instructed From Optional If required enter the earliest Date Instructed to be included on the report Only those Defects on Work Orders Instructed after this date will be included in the report Date Instructed To Optional If required enter the latest Date Instructed to be included on the report Only those Defects on Work Orders Instructed before this date will be included in the report Work Status Required List Enter the Work Status to be reported on Defect Priority Optional List If required enter the defect priority to be reported on If this field is left blank all defect priorities will be included To report on multiple Defect Priorities press the Create Record button on the toolbar Contract Name Optional List If required enter the name of the contract to be reported on Repair Type P T Optional List Enter P to include Defects with Permanent Repair types only T to include Defects with Temporary Repair types only or leave blank to include both Version 4 7 237 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTE
346. t RemCode Include Perm Y Inspections Between andl Include remp Y xsp O Continue Cancel Figure 99 Selection Criteria This window is displayed when the Select Defects button is pressed in the Work Order Lines window This window contains a collection of selection criteria fields enabling you to select a defect or defects to be used for this works order Enter enough of these fields to restrict the selection to the required defects Defects may also be selected using the Asset Query button or the PBI button This allows you to select defects which have been raised against particular Asset Items Pressing the Asset Query button will call the Query Asset window and allow you to select an individual asset item This would allow you to select any AVAILABLE defects raised against the item The PBI button allows the user to define a Parameter Based Inquiry and select any AVAILABLE defects raised against the resulting assets items of the inquiry Work Category Required List Select a work category from the List of Values these values are linked to budgets and are therefore mandatory Only defects with activities that apply to this work category will be selected for inclusion on the current works order Activities are associated to a work category using Item Code Breakdowns MAI1940 Road Id 1 6 Optional List If required select up to 6 roads Only those d
347. t Select a valid Standard Item Sub Section Code Asset Modification Optional List A code and associated description will identify any asset modification required These codes are maintained in Domains HIG9120 in the ASSET MODIFICATION domain Notify Optional List If the defect is notifiable select a valid organisation to be notified of the defect The responses to any notifications are maintained in Responses to Notices MAI3816 Recharge Optional List If the defect is rechargeable select a valid organisation to be recharged Notice Id Display Only If this defect is notifiable the system generated reference number of the notice will displayed here after printing the notice using Print Notice Details The date the notice was printed will be displayed in the adjacent field Date Printed Display Only The date the notice was printed will be displayed Version 4 7 16 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR w2 MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 1 Be ntle y MANAGING INSPECTIONS Per Imm Tmp Checkbox These checkboxes can be used in a number of ways They will indicate if Permanent Immediate or Temporary repairs exist against a defect if one or more of the boxes are checked selecting the
348. t Chainage Date Inspected Due Date Days to due date Special Instructions Repair Type Defect Priority BOQ Item BOQ Quantities Total Cost Labour Units 4 11 1 1 Selection Parameters Admin Unit Required Default List Select an administrational unit to be used for this report The default is the Admin Unit assigned to the current User Road Type Optional List If required enter the Road Type from which to select defects from If this field is left blank all Road Group Types will be reported on Road Id Optional List If required enter the Road Group Id from which to select defects from If this field is left blank all Road Group Types will be reported on From Date Optional If required enter the earliest Date Inspected to be included on the report Only those Defect Records recorded after this date will be included in the report To Date Optional Version 4 7 233 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ic 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sawai tania on WORKS ORDERING REPORTS If required enter the latest Date Inspected to be included on the report Only those Defect Records before this date will be included in the report Defect Type Optional List If required
349. t Layer must be the Active Layer This is done using the Layer Control Tool After selecting the asset s on which the defect s is to be created select the Create Defects On Assets option from the Feature Edit Menu Tool This will call a form displaying details of the selected assets that allows the User to confirm their selection prior to raising defects If an asset has been selected erroneously it may be de selected by unchecking the record selection flag on the right hand side of the form Only assets that are flagged as selected will have defects raised against them Version 4 7 41 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc pies 34 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS Restrict Z An tama no location restriction Nene Description Entire Asst Asset Type Type Doconplion Asset Description yCrordinata y Cr nrr nata STRB Structures 369657 000 ETRS Structures 369857 000 f T I ERR Select To Figure 41 Confrim Asset Selection The following Asset Details are displayed on the Confirm Asset Selection window Asset Type Code Asset Type Description Asset Id Primary Key Asset Item Description X
350. tae da 63 2 l4 Superseding Delect ise npo eee n rre ED Ee C be o oie iwi 63 2 12 Unmatch Duplicate Defects MAI2760 ssssseseeseeeeeeeeeenn ener nre 65 2 12 1 General Information et tree eene tono egent aea reapse eaae iesise so ee ENTRAR 65 2 12 2 Section Details eee eer tet re EE Ree E Eee EE E ee Ue Post EE Eee EE ea ERE ER eee ET ERE TED 66 2 13 Delete Inspections MAI2470 eese eene enne enne nennen emere en nennen nenne 67 2 13 1 General Information seseris ata iiaeie orines e Ea EES entes terns ENE tenen 68 2 13 2 Delete PspectioNnS cicien ae ae e Te Reo Tai 68 2 14 Batch Setting of Repair Dates MAI2775 csse eene nente ren rennen 69 2 14 1 General Information ssssssesssessseeesee enne enne entente stent entes enne s tens stern en nene en 70 UNE M TDI 70 DNAS NDCHCCIS p 70 PA T COMM ERE D 71 2 15 Responses to Notices MAI3816 sess nennen nnne rennen rennen 72 215 1 General Information c eee rette reet Deere eene eus HERE RETE EUR EE eS EE doe Ern 72 PME UI C O MX 73 NSMEEb oU C w 73 3 Work Order Management doter ne cene LU dra ELE P epa e Ev Peg egeo e Ee Yea Dep eae eic eL ede 75 3 1 Prerequisite T 75 3 2 Using Locator with Works Ordering Defects ces ceecesecsseceseeeseeeeeeeeaeeeae
351. tatus will be updated automatically If a works order has a combination of lines that have been paid with some being unpaid the status will be PART PAID Checkbox Optional When checked this will display the date time and user Id in the Date received field in MAI3800 allowing the contractor to indicate that they have received and are working on the selected work order A number of buttons have been defined on this window for use when completing a works order they are as follows Lines Opens the defects window and allows the user to add works order lines This window is also common to both other works and cyclic maintenance works orders Figure 140 WO Detail Opens the defects window enabling the contractor user to complete individual lines on the selected works order Figure 144 Flexible Attributes Opens the maintain flexible attributes window attribute values can be added if required Figure 145 Programme Details Displays the programme details window Figure 146 Standard Item Totals Displays the standard item totals window and shows the estimated and actual costs and quantities for each standard item in the works order Figure 147 Complete Completes all works order lines on the selected order once this button has been selected and the date entered no changes can be made to the works order To make changes to the actual BOQ amounts works order lines should be completed individually Version 4 7
352. tch Duplicate Defects MAI2760 By Display Only If this defect has been superseded this field will display the defect ID of the superseding defect Version 4 7 14 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 6 Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS Associating a Defect with an Asset Defects may be raised against an Asset using the Map Window of the Locator module or directly from the form using the Find Asset button When either of these methods is used the Asset Type Primary Key value and Asset Id will be displayed Refer to the Asset Manager User guide for information on raising Defects against Assets from the Map Window or for information relating to Find Assets Asset Type Asset Ref ld Find Asset Figure 13 Asset Type Optional List Select the asset type that is to be linked to the defect this asset type will have been previously associated with the Inspection Activity using Asset Activities MAI3632 Asset Ref Required If you know the asset reference it can be entered in to this field directly if selected from Locator the asset ref will be displayed Id Display Only The unique system generated asset id will be displayed Find Asset
353. ted by the user group only a subset of works notices will be processed from this interface Other notice types will have to be manually entered using the TMA modules The noticing regime Notice or Permit will be derived from the street characteristics The following notice types may be used e 0200 Initial Notice e 0210 PAA Major Permit Application Non Major e 0300 Confirmation Notice e 0310 Permit Application e 0400 Actual Start Date e 0600 Works Stop Version 4 7 127 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR P MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 2 WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure Once the noticing regime has been derived and a notice has been sent only notices relevant to the specific regime will be used WOL Count Display Only The number of work order lines associated with Notice will be displayed A summary of the work order lines for this notice will be displayed in the work order lines area at the bottom of the window Select Notice Checkbox Select Deselect the notice that is to be progressed The user now has two options for a selected notice 1 Select the Send to Register button to send the notice to Send Notice to Register TMA1800 The system will send th
354. ted in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc acu Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 Siassialeg Dv WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT TMA Interface This button is enabled when one or more work order lines are ticked as Registerable The Work Order TMA Interface TM A3990 is called and is navigated to the TMA Noticing tab this is the same functionality as the Work Order level TMA Interface button Figure 72 Get From Map This button is enabled when the WOL Id is populated and the Work Order Line status is not COMPLETE Locator NM0572 is called to allow the user to digitise a new location or shape for the defect or work order This will give the user the option to enter a point polyline or polygon that better represents the location and the shape of the work to be carried out on the selected work order line Figure 36 Invoices This will display any interim payment invoices that apply to this work order line Figure 169 Copy Line This will create a copy of the selected works order line and associated BOQ items all copied BOQ item quantities are re set to zero A work order line can only be copied if it a small scheme order Summary Opens the Schedules summary window and displays a summary of the works order lines on the currently selected Works Order 3 12 4 Select Schedules Button selection Criteria Schedule Id 329 GRASS CUTTING Date Due 25 JAN 2007 Continue Cancel F
355. ted in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc vieil Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE e Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS 2 Managing Inspections This chapter describes the forms used to create maintain and review Inspections and associated data Inspections MAI3808 Inspections by Group MAI3899 Defects MAI3806 View Defects MAI3810 Match Duplicate Defects MAI2730 Unmatch Duplicate Defects MAI2760 Delete Inspections MAI2470 Batch Setting of Repair Dates MAI2275 e Responses to Notices MAI3816 The form descriptions provide you with detailed information about each Works Ordering form in highways by exor including an overall description of the form e adetailed explanation of each field including available features such as List of Values default values and other characteristics e helpful information for using the form Version 4 7 3 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc pies 34 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS 2 1 Defect Status Codes gt a Launchpad exor 4 Security Reference Data Figure 1 Status Codes Menu Option During a defects life cycle it will automatically pass through a number of
356. tem is overridden but the Maximum Quantity limit is retained If required add any Percentage Items or other Standard Items needed Set the Works Order Line status to INTERIM Press the Save button on the menu toolbar The Works Order Line is now ready for part payment on the next Payment Run i e the work done to date will be paid but the Works Order Line will not be Completed When the Works Order Line is included on a Payment Run the Status of the Works Order Line will be set to PART PAID If a further Interim Payment is to be made on this Works Order Line simply repeat this process Details of the last valuation can be seen for a BOQ item by pressing the Expand button on the menu toolbar when the BOQ item is selected 3 5 20 Completing a Works Order Line with an Interim Payment In order for a Works Order to be completed all Works Order Lines on it must be completed If a Works Order Line has had an Interim Payment made on it it must also be set to Complete If any further work has been done since the last Valuation the Works Order Line Status should be changed to COMPLETED and the Actual quantity of work done to date entered this should be the cumulative amount of all work done otherwise the Works Order Line will keep the same Actual amounts as for the last Valuation When the Works Order Line is Completed and is included in the next payment run no payment will be made if the Actual quantities have not been changed since the l
357. the Work Order Line uplift item this item will uplift the entire work order line The List of Values will only contain those items that have the WOL Percent Uplift set to Y in Standard Items MAI3888 Note When a Repair having either BOQ or WOL Percent Uplift Item Codes assigned is added to a Work Order a check is made against the Contract for that work order to determine if the Standard Item Code has been assigned as a Contract Item and that the contract will allow for Percentage Uplifts If not the user will be prevented from saving or Instructing the Work Order 3 5 6 Percentage Uplifting of the value of an individual work order line Entering a BOQ uplift item to a work order line will uplift the value of the work order line by applying the percentage uplift only to those BOQ items that have been flagged as Allow Percent Items Y in Standard Items MAI3888 In addition if the entire work order line needs a percentage uplift entering a WOL Uplift item to the work order line will apply the uplift to the entire line including any BOQ percentage uplifts that have already been applied Note Ifthe value of the Work Order needs to be uplifted based on a banding for the value of the entire work order then Discount Groups MAI3624 Maintenance Manager Admin should be used 3 5 7 Adding Individual Percentage Items to a BOQ Item Adding a Percentage Item to a Bill Of Quantities allows the cost of the BOQ item t
358. the maintenance manager work order description then a list of all the defects associated with the relevant work order lines This can be updated if required For other notices it is the current value from the works phase Location Description Default For Initial notices this will display the location of the first work order line with a location This can be amended if required For other notices it is the current value from the works phase Estimated Start Date Default The estimated start date will be displayed This can be updated The system will derive the estimated start date based on the following 1 Get the earliest repair due date from the associated work order lines defect clearance e If this does not exist it will use the work order target completion date 2 Work out what the default duration is for the category of works being noticed from metadata An example is shown below Works Category Default Duration 1 Major 20 2 Standard 10 3 Minor 3 4 Immediate Urgent 1 5 Immediate Emergency 1 98 Unattributable 1 99 Barholes 1 Figure 122 TMA Notice period 3 Work out the TMA notice period for the category of works notice type being produced For example If we have a value for the target date If target date is today OR in the future then end date target date start date estimated end date minus the default duration Ensure that start date cannot be lt today Else if that target date lt today t
359. the prior written consent of Bentley Inc el 5 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure WORKS ORDERING REPORTS 4 10 2 Review Raised Works Orders MAI3490 LIVE2108 amp LIVE2108 NORTH PENNINE LINK GROUP 21 DEC 1999 MAI3490 Review Raised Works Orders l Date Raised Road Work Order No MD SISSCode Expenditure Codi Date Closed 05 MAR 1999 4510A69 1 325 D HH MAR 1999 11 MAR 1999 2900A69 1 2 274 D 16 JUL 1999 0900A69 1 3 26 D 16 JUL 1999 0900A69 1 2 775 n 22 OCT 1999 2900A69 1 2 276 D 17 NOV 1999 CLOSEGILL 3 27 D 22 NOV 1999 0900A69 4 66 D 23 NOV 1999 2900A69 3 28 M 23 NOV 1999 DEPOT WORK 4 67 D 24 NOV 1999 2900A69 2271 D Figure 193 Version 4 7 232 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc acu Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE e Sustaining Infrastructure WORKS ORDERING REPORTS 4 11 Defects not yet Instructed MAI3922 Purpose This report produces a List of defects which have a Status of AV AILABLE and which meet the required selection parameters Defects which appear on this report may be selected on a Work Order The following information is displayed Defect Id Defect Type Link and Section Id Road Section Description Defect Location Rechargeable Organistaion Defect XSP Defec
360. the sysdate for the creation of retrospective work orders Note When the User attempts to Authorise a Works Order this date field is used to determine the total value of Works Orders already Authorised by the User on the same day Note Ifthe value of the current Works Order would lead to the User s Daily Authorisation Limit see the Max value per Day field in Maintenance Manager User Data MAI4410 being exceeded an error will be displayed and the current Works Order will not be Authorised Date Instructed Optional When the works order has been completely defined and you are ready to issue it to the contractor set the Date Instructed to the current date by pressing the Instruct button on the form When the Work Order is instructed this button will be used to Complete a Works Order When building the works order leave this field blank All works order lines must be priced before the order can be instructed When the Instruct button is selected the following pop up window is displayed allowing the user to enter a date that is prior to the sysdate enabling the creation of retrospective work orders W instruct works Order Please Enter The Date Instructed Continue Cancel Figure 92 Instruct pop up Continue will Instruct the work order at the displayed date and time Cancel will return the user to the Work Order details with no changes made A works order must have a date instructed if the contractor is to vi
361. the user has the appropriate permissions see the Authorise button for details Once the Date Instructed has been saved the button will change to read Complete Work order lines can be added to an instructed works order if the Product Option ADDINSTR is set to Y Complete Completes all works order lines once this button has been selected and the date entered no changes can be made to the works order To make changes to the actual BOQ values Works Order lines should be completed individually using the following process Change the work order line status code to COMPLETE Update all the BOQ items for the work order lines to reflect the actual values 3 Save the changes pO Version 4 7 96 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc acu Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 21 PaA NEES WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Blocs EFAULTIA2 Defect Id Treatment Status Work Category Type Priority Sheet Completed Repaired Asset Ref Labour Units Est Cost Act Cost Identifier Descr Location Remarks WOL Id Asset Id Schedule Gang Invoice Registerable Register Status o Target Date D7 JUN 2011 00 00 l emm Registerable Register Status Target Date
362. tiate another search 6 Press the Continue button to add the selected defects to the works order Note If any of the selected defects have documents associated with them through document manager these documents will automatically be associated with the Works Order as well p Oy po Version 4 7 105 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Item Code Description Quantity Quantity Est Labour Unit Rate Cost Add 96 EZ Buingnomarwonnghows 00000000 Fa ao xw e 5 mue I n _ oe FEE LET P r i Mn mm Add Item r Total Est Labour BOQ Total Cost 1381 40 BOQ Uplift Item pcci 1 IRWH TOTAL SCHEME 0 00 1 400 00 BOQ Uplift Total 13 81 WOL Uplift Item DCC 2 RWH TOTAL SCHEME 1 400 01 34 000 0C WOL Uplift Total 27 90 WOL Total Cost 1423 12 Figure 101 BOQ Items 3 5 5 BOQ Items This window is displayed when the BOQ Items button is pressed in the Work Order Lines window This window enables you to select the BOQ items to rectify the defect specified in the Work Order Lines window Initially it will be populated with the BOQ items specified by the inspector at the time
363. timated Cost and Total Actual Cost of the selected Works Order is also displayed on the front cover sheet 4 5 1 Selection Parameters Works Order No Required Enter the Works Order Number to be reported on 4 5 2 Works Order Detail MA3500 LIVE2108 LIVE2108 NORTH PENNINE LINK GROUP int W Orders Detail Date 21 DEC 1999 l MAI3500 Print Works Pave Defect Attribute Due Comp Chainage XSP ld Defect Description Name Value Code Description Location Date Section 2900A69 1 10 GREENHEAD DUALING EASTBOUND FROM B630 Length 205 19 3 3 pothole 3 2 50 RENEW 4 BEAMS STRAIGHTEN pothole 3 2 50 17 APR 96 POSTS Section 2900A69 1 124 C302HALTWHISTLE E TO U7051 MELKRIDGE N Length 2330 3 4 RENEW 1 BOLLARD SHELL 17 APR 96 Version 4 7 222 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR w2 MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Ss WORKS ORDERING REPORTS Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 4 6 Works Order Summary MAI3505 Purpose This report produces a summary of all Works Orders which meet the required selection parameters for the selected Road Group The Total Estimated Cost and Total Actual Cost of all qualifying Work Orders is also calculated The following information is displayed Work Order Number Road Part Link Id Sch
364. tity of work for each job item you can use this window to override this figure with the actual amount of work to be done The items of work themselves are represented by standard job items These are created and maintained using Standard Items MAI3888 Maintenance Manager Administration Manual On entry to the window the cursor sits in the first Actual Quantity field awaiting the input of an actual quantity for the first job item on the schedule Either enter the actual quantity of work to be carried out or select Duplicate Record from the menu bar to accept the system calculated quantity Item Code Display Only Displays a standard job item representing a job of work to be carried out on this section This item will appear on the works orders generated for this schedule Description Display Only Displays the full description of the standard job item Unit Display Only Displays the unit of measurement of this job item Calculated Quantity Display Only This field will display the amount of work to be done as calculated by the system each time this schedule is used This calculation is a one off batch process and is initiated when the schedule is being created using Cyclic Maintenance Schedules MAI3860 Version 4 7 264 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any
365. tly from the Map window the appropriate Asset Layer must be the Active Layer This is done using the Layer Control tool After selecting the asset on which the defects are to be created select the Create Defects On Assets at XY option from the Feature Edit Menu tool Click the left mouse button at each of the appropriate XY locations for the defects A dot will be displayed at each click point to indicate the position at which the defect will be created To complete the creation of the defects against the asset click the right mouse button The Confirm Asset Selection and Defect Details window will be called to allow the defect details to be entered as described under Create a Defect on Network at X Y using Locator Version 4 7 44 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR gt B l k Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE S E ssstsfeg Titrostnicture MANAGING INSPECTIONS 2 7 Create a Small Scheme Work Order using Locator A small scheme work order can be created through Locator for one or more maintenance section Each section selected will be a separate work order line Note The theme for network must be set up in GISThemes GIS0010 with a function for MAI3801 NET Raise Small Scheme Work Order To cr
366. tor from the List of Values Date Inspected Required Enter the date the inspection took place If the inspection has been loaded from a DCD this field cannot be amended Weather Condition Optional List If known select the weather at the time of the inspection These values can be added to using Domains HIG9120 and updating the WEATHER CONDITION option Initiation Type Required List Select the initiation type of this inspection from the list These values can be added to using Domains HIG9120 and updating the INITIATION TYPE option Road Surface Cond Optional List If known enter the road surface condition at the time of the inspection These values can be added to using Domains HIG9120 and updating the SURFACE CONDITION option Safety Detailed Required List Enter S for Safety Inspection D for Detailed Inspection The default Value for this field is set using Product Option MANINSACT Road Type Required List Enter a valid road group type Road Required Gaz Use the Gazetteer to select the road group to which this inspection applies A description will be displayed in the adjacent field Activity Required List Enter the inspection activity Version 4 7 51 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written co
367. tory gt Inspections e Works e0 Contracts e0 Interfaces a Financial leselect Items for Payment Payment Run Figure 225 Deselct Items for Payment Menu Option Deselect Items for Payment MAI3842 Road Id Defect Id Work Order Check Cost Balance Description Schedule Worksheet Result Paidto date Est Cost Status Contract Remarks Orig Initials Orig Name Auth Initials Auth Name Percent Diff Iscon omceroooe psr 9woo swoobeo lis CON 5012c661 0 00008 B IS CON 2 IJ 300 00 300 00 COMPLETED BROWNSIDE ROAD LEN 0 00 300 00 svs SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR sys SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR lis CON 5012661 0 00006 _ IS CON 2 IB 3600 00 3600 00 COMPLETED BROWNSIDE ROAD HEC 0 00 3600 00 svs SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR s YS SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR LANCDAILY 1001F77300 00003 91093 P LANCDAILY 1 ti 12 00 12 00 COMPLETED CHURCH STREET 0 00 12 00 sys SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR s SYS SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR LANCDAILY 1001F77300 00003 91095 P LANCDAILY 2 IB 0 00 0 00 COMPLETED CHURCH STREET 0 00 0 00 sys SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR sys SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR gj Figure 226 Deselect Items for Payment Version 4 7 280 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc
368. tribute _Not Set B F Sub Select Existing Select To Raise Small Scheme Work Order Figure 47 Confirm Selection Use the Select To drop down list to select Raise Small Scheme Work Order Version 4 7 46 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 6 Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS The Raise Small Scheme Work Order MAI3801_NET will be called Braise Small Scheme Works Order GIS MAI3801 NET DORSET tmatest2 EXDL16VM6 MAI v4 1 0 0 Scheme Type LR Contract JB TEST 2 JB TEST 2 Work Order Cancel Figure 48 Raise Work Order The Raise Small Scheme Works Order form allows the required Scheme Type and Works Order Contract to be selected Scheme Type Required Default List This is the Scheme Type for the Work Order The default value is determined by the value set for Product Option DEFSCHTYPL or DEFSCHTYPD depending on the System Flag set for the Section or Budget Allocation Group on which the Defect is raised The default value may only be updated if product option DEFSCHTY PU is set to Y Contract Required Default List This is the Contract used within the Work Order The default value is determined by the value set
369. ttern of traffic flows 2 Poletesting Pole testing involving excavation does not require registration via the noticing system in advance of work commencing as per other types of excavation unless one or more of rules 2 6 above apply However in all circumstances the work must be registered within 10 days of completion 3 5 23 1 3 Regulations provide that the register must record the following information Particulars of all notices under sections 54 55 and 57 served to the highway authority relating to street works in any street which is a maintainable highway Particulars of all notices given under sections 54 55 and 57 served on street managers relating to street works in any street which is not a maintainable highway Particulars of all directions given under section 56 or 56A Particulars of all notices consents and directions published or given by a street authority under section 58 or 58A Particulars of all notices served by an undertaker under section 58A Particulars of all notices served by a street authority under section 66 Particulars of all notices given by a street authority under s72 3 Particulars of all notices given under section 74 or 74A Description and location of street works for which plans and sections have been submitted under Schedule 4 to NRSWA streets with special engineering difficulties Particulars of notices given by any relevant authority under Schedule 4 to NRSWA Details of every street
370. tton on the Work Orders Defects MAI3800 and Work Orders Cyclic MAI3800A modules as shown below The TMA Register button will become active when the Register checkbox has been selected Pressing this button will call the TMA Interface MAI3990 form Lines Standard Item Totals Notice Summary TMA Interface Figure 114 TMA Interface button Note Street Works Manager by Exor MUST be implemented to send Work Items to the Street Works Register Version 4 7 124 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 B en le Y Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 6 TMA Interface MAI3990 Maintenance Manager CJ Inventory LJ Inspections Works Works Orders Defects amp Small Schemes Works Orders Cyclic Maintain Work Orders Contractor Interface Gang Crew Allocation Figure 115 TMA Interface Menu Option Work Order Work Order TEST ANNE Description pothole repair Date Raised 27 M4R 2009 TWA Noticing Wark Order Lines TMA Notices WOL TMA Works Ref USRN Street Name Phase End Date Last Notice Type New Notice Type Count Select Notice Womrsmg 0 O OO maawke B o oA l _ SS dice m ideam Mi C m a
371. uasa ARVONEN ERE EAEE esk 111 3 5 11 BOQ Details ssi issis tccteacaineesteiadicatiapeliodessiestgvesiebviediatbbvaseneatecscsdlavenseligedlaabbennedasonatele 113 3 35 12 Standard Item Totals eet meer ero eee eR RETI RC de Sea snncy tives epu PE MEE E ead 114 39 13 Contractor Totals ertet e tee reete ener ee pe eoe Vent eno conie ete Ra 115 3 5 14 Work Order Flexible Attributes sessi entren nennen 117 3 5 13 Blexibl Attrib tes ii insert hetero here dna roe sha ia EE ee eoe EE ERE T SEEN CERE YS ENR 117 3 5 16 Additional Details Planning Support eese 118 3 5 17 Additional Details Quality Finance esee nennen 119 BONG MMV OICES MEI TE 120 3 5 19 Making Interim Payments essere rennen eren neee tenete nnne nnne nnne enne 120 3 5 20 Completing a Works Order Line with an Interim Payment eee 121 3 5 21 Completing Works Orden cessisse nireki iia ainiin debe 121 3 5 22 Changing a Completed Works Order sees een 122 3 5 23 Raising a Notice In the Street Works Register eesseeeeeeeeeeeneenenne 122 3 5 24 Raising a Notice from Maintenance Manager eese 124 3 060 IMA Interface M AL3900 attri pene atem etti ete I ED EREXIT SEDE N eee ed oe 125 3 6 1 General Information EMMEEMMMMMMM 125 3 6 2 TMA Noticing Tab ure terreri pere ttr tinere etre gea EEEE EERE EEE
372. ucture CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERS ADMIN 5 2 CyclicMaintenance Inventory Rules MAI3626 Maintenance Manager eg Inventory amp Inspections e Works e0 Contracts o0 Interfaces e7 Financial amp Reports OG Reference Z3 Inventory Z3 Inspections Maintenance Activities Activity Groups Local Activity Frequencies Default Section Intervals Calculation Default Section Intervals Valid For Maintenance Rules Related Maintenance Activities Work Order Auditing Maintenance Figure 204 Cyclic Maintenance Inventory Rules Menu Option Version 4 7 253 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 B en le y Sustaining Infrastructure CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERS ADMIN Maintenance Inventory Rules Local Inv Attribute Item Code Description DoT Type Condition Factor isoo01 IS SOR Plant L ke 1 000 LAB0001 Non Skilled labour o 1 000 LAB0001 Non Skilled labour L lev 1 000 LAB0001 Non Skilled labour L e 1 000 Figure 205 Cyclic Maintenance Inventory Rules 5 2 1 General Information When a cyclic maintenance works order schedule is set up it looks at the data within this form to work out the quantity of work to be done based on
373. ule items window and allows the entry of the schedule items that are to be used in this cyclic maintenance schedule Calculate Quantities Once the schedule items have been entered in the next window this button will calculate the actual quantities to be included in the schedule based on the values set up in Cyclic Maintenance Inventory Rules MAI3626 and the inventory present in the road sections for the selected road group Calculated Actual Last Item Code Description Unit Quantity Quantity Updated Figure 208 Schedule Items 5 3 3 Schedule Items This window allows you to define the actual items of work which make up the schedule The tasks themselves are represented by standard job items These are created and maintained using Standard Items MAI3888 Maintenance Manager System Administration Manual On entry to the window the cursor sits in the Item Code field awaiting the selection of a job item When viewing an existing schedule this block will be populated with those items currently attached to the schedule Version 4 7 259 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc eek Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE S BAUR E EN CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERS ADMIN Item Code Required List Select a standard job
374. urrent contract As a general rule the works order can only be issued and printed when all the items on it have a rate either from the contract or as rogue items Version 4 7 185 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc pon Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 12 12Works Order Audit rs Works Order Audit Work Order ATLAS_1 35 Order by Initials Date Item Changed Change Old value SYS 05 12 2006 16 21 50 Completed By l 4 1 vs 2706152111 Estimate Cost 81 B SYS 05 12 2006 16 21 11 Authorised by SYS SYSTEM ADMINIS SYS SYSTEM 25485 svs 05712 2006 16 20 51 F CREATED pu es zaw erea 91063 Bmcoo01 sys 05 12 2006 16 20 09 F CREATED 91063 svs 05712 2006 16 20 01 F CREATED svs 05 12 2006 16 19 34 Authorised by SYS SYSTEM ADMINIS 1 vs 0521202006 16 19 34 Originator SYS SYSTEM ADMINIS SYS 05 12 2006 16 19 34 Work Order Number ATLAS 1 35 RE DES Show Changes fe All C Work Order C Work Order Line BOQ C Payments Figure 159 Work Order Audit The Works Order Audit shows the changes made to the fields on the Works Order which have been selected in form
375. ute values can be added if required Figure 110 Navigator Opens Navigator which allows the user to view and retrieve data associated a work order an example of this is shown below Details on the use of navigator can be found in the Query Builder and Navigator User Manual Version 4 7 93 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 4 en t le y Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Navigation Style GL Work Order BENTLEY M29 DORSET BENTLEY 28 LR BENTLEY Bentley Contract Document 256094 PHOT 256094_casterbridge jpg IMAGES 02 Nov 2010 Work Order Line 475605 DRAFT 18303 ELIZABETH PLACE JCT CAMBRIDGE Budget 060111 Budget 597000 Committed 12748 93 Actual 5551 53 E Repair Permanent Ok Defect 361563 SELECTED GC FLOD 1 F Inspection 1130697 Detailed DUM S YS 101089 Asset 1410933 GY Gully Work Order Line 475465 DRAFT 18596 BRAEMAR ROAD JCT BUCKINGHAN Document 256093 PHOT 256093_pothole jpg IMAGES 02 Nov 2010 Budget 060111 Budget 597000 Committed 12748 93 Actual 5551 53 E A Notice DCO091403 Minor Waiting to send BRAEMAR ROAD o s No 1 Repair Permanent MCA Ok Defect 361799 S
376. utstanding The WOL has been ticked as Registerable and at least one Notice has been sent for it but not a 0600 Works Stop Notice e Completed The WOL has been ticked as Registerable and a 0600 Works Stop Notice has been sent Once a Works Order Line has been included in a Payment Run the Invoice details can be viewed by pressing the Invoice button on the window Target Date Required The target date for the work order line can be entered manually for non defect clearance work orders The target dates for the individual work order lines will affect the overall work order Target Date A number of buttons have been defined on this window for use when raising a works order they are as follows BOQ Items Opens the BOQ Items window where BOQ items can be added to or removed from the selected works order line Figure 156 Select Schedules Opens the Selection Criteria window and allows the user to select the schedules that are to be included on the works order Figure 155 View Notices This button is enabled when one or more streetwork notices have been sent for the currently selected work order line The Work Order TMA Interface TMA3990 is called in read only mode and is navigated to the Work Order Lines tab Figure 73 Version 4 7 178 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distribu
377. vides a 2 part report The first is a summary of the performance of an Administrative Unit in terms of the quantity of work done within the required timescale The report provides a summary count for each defect priority and totals work in the following categories Number of defects completed Within Target Time Number of defects completed 0 7 days late Number of defects completed 8 14 days late Number of defects completed 15 28 days late Number of defects completed more than 28 days late this total may include defects not yet completed The report also provides the following information e Total Work Written Off e Within Time If a defect has not been repaired within the required Target Time a summary of the Defect the Work Order it has been instructed on is provided on Part 2 of the Report 4 18 1 Selection Parameters Admin Unit Required Default List Select an administrational unit to be used for this report The default is the Admin Unit assigned to the current User Date Inspected From Optional Enter the earliest date of Inspection to be included on the report Only those Defects raised after this date will be included in the report Date Inspected To Optional Enter the latest date of Inspection to be included on the report Only those Defects raised before this date will be included in the report Version 4 7 247 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas an
378. vidual line select the Complete button This will set all the BOQ Actual values equal to the current estimated values To complete a works order by completing each line individually the User can change the individual line to completed manually and enter a date in the next field At this point changes can be made to the actual values of the BOQ items these changes must be made before saving the changes Rechargeable Optional Enter either Y or N to indicate if some or all or this work order is rechargeable Cost Recharged Optional When a rechargeable defect has been rectified and the works order completed it is possible to recharge an amount of money to the contractor If required enter that amount here Estimates Sub Total Display Only As the works order is being compiled each works order line is costed up based on the current rates for the job items held against the contract This figure does not take into account any discount arrangements in place with the contractor Estimates Balancing Sum Display Only If the contractor to which this works order has been assigned uses Discount Groups then a percentage discount is applied to the total estimated works order cost The pre discount total is displayed in the Sub Total field above The balancing sum field contains the calculated value of the discount Estimates Total Cost Display Only This field contains the sum of the Estimated Sub Total and Est
379. vigated to the Work Order Lines tab Figure 73 TMA Interface This button is enabled when one or more work order lines are ticked as Registerable The Work Order TMA Interface TMA3990 is called and is navigated to the TMA Noticing tab this is the same functionality as the Work Order level TMA Interface button Figure 72 Get From Map This button is enabled when the WOL Id is populated and the Work Order Line status is not COMPLETE Locator NM0572 is called to allow the user to digitise a new location or shape for the defect or work order This will give the user the option to enter a point polyline or polygon that better represents the location and the shape of the work to be carried out on the selected work order line Figure 36 Invoices This will display any interim payment invoices that apply to this work order line Figure 113 Copy Line This will create a copy of the selected works order line and associated BOQ items the following pop up window will be displayed allowing the user to copy the BOQ items and their associated estimated quantities or copy the BOQ items only without the estimated quantities Version 4 7 101 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ie 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE ietdafg Dv WORK OR
380. vities are set up using Activities MAI1200 Version 4 7 272 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 4 en t le y Sustaining Infrastructure CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERS ADMIN 5 8 Related Maintenance Activities MAI3628 a Maintenance Manager Z3 Inventory c3 Inspections ca Works Z3 Contracts Z3 Interfaces e Inventory gt Inspections Maintenance Activities Activity Groups Local Activity Frequencies Default Section Intervals Calculation Default Section Intervals Valid For Maintenance Rules Related Maintenance Activities Cyclic Maintenance Inventory Rules Figure 221 Related Maintenance Activities Menu Option Version 4 7 273 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc tl 23 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Sustaining Infrastructure CYCLIC MAINTENANCE WORKS ORDERS ADMIN e TIER Maintenance Activities DORSET nm4beta2 GBEXOR730 MAI v4 0 Maintenance Activity Reschedule Activity Figure 222 Related Maintenance Activities 5 8 1 General Information
381. w called the Generic Reporting Interface GRI Whilst the selection criteria for each report will change from report to report the way the reports are run viewed and printed remains constant Below is an example of the Generic Reporting Interface Version 4 7 213 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 5 4 en t le y Sustaining Infrastructure WORKS ORDERING REPORTS ta List of Defects Not Yet Instructed Admin Unit Road Type Road Id Date Inspected From Date Inspected To Defect Type Defect Priority SISS Item Code XSP alala 4 a Olla la TI Figure 181 GRI The title of the report is displayed at the top of the window There are three buttons down the left hand side they are as follows 3 Run report When the selection criteria has been entered this will run the report and place the output in the report previewer Save Parameters The Parameters for reports that have to be constantly re run or have complex selection criteria can be saved to a file and re used You will be prompted to enter a file name Each user can have their own set of saved parameters Ta p Load Parameters Previously saved parameters for the selected report can be loaded directly int
382. window Itis a display only window which shows all of the Standard Items currently on this Works Order as well as the total quantities and costs both estimated and actual across the whole works order Note that the Actual fields are only displayed after a works order line has been completed or an Interim payment made and will therefore initially be empty If the contractor has added additional items to the order the estimated values will be empty with the actual values being populated Version 4 7 114 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc ia 5 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE ietciafag fetta WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT 3 5 13 Contractor Totals I contract Totals YTD YTD Order Total Average Previous Minimum Maximum Contract Code Description Lines Cost Score Orders Value Value BURCDAILY _ bumley core daily action respon 1000 sms zww ATLAS_1 Atlas test contract 1 100 0 967 50 24950 ATLAS 3 ATLAS test contract 3 100 0 967 50 5401 0 10000000 ATLAS 2 ATLAS test contract 2 100 0 2012 40 0 10000000 BURN TESTS Burnley Test Contract 5 100 0 2089 80 1522 zu T RE Figure 107 Contractor Totals This window is displayed when the Contractor Totals button is selected in the Works Orders Defects wind
383. with Works Ordering Defects Restrict RARR 4 5 n do db tx se C8 ro rese F All tems no location restriction Name Description F Entire Stat Search For DEFECTS Defect id ASSET ID Ree He ld St Chain Are Report id Atv Acty Area Code amp Confirm Select X Defect Code Advanced Attiva Layt DEFECTS Afiibula Not Set Select To Place Defect Onto Work Order Figure 76 Locator 3 2 1 General Information Full information on the use of locator can be found in the Locator and Web mapping User Guide In summary Locator NM0572 provides Exor Users with an easy to use web based spatial interface that allows the raising of a work order on defects Work orders can be raised in two ways these are e Create a work order directly after entering the defects via locator e Create a work order by selecting existing defects within locator Once the defects have been selected and the work order module is selected standard work order functionality is then available Version 4 7 76 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR PF MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Ss WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure 3 3
384. works entries in the street works register can be viewed using this button Figure 130 Copy Copy work order is intended for use on small scheme work orders Print Prints the instructed works order the format of the printout is set up in Product Options HIG9130 and setting the WORREPMOD option to the required works ordering report Once a works order has been printed changes to the works order lines are not allowed unless the Product Option ADDPRINT is set to Y Version 4 7 173 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 23 Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Authorise Note Sets the Date Authorised to today s date and time sysdate When this button is selected a pop up window is displayed allowing the user to enter a date that is prior to the sysdate enabling the creation of retrospective work orders A user will only be able to authorise a work order if they have been given the appropriate permission by the system administrator using Maintenance Manager User Data MAI4410 When the User attempts to Authorise a Works Order the Date Authorised field is used to determine the total value of Works Orders already Authorised by the User on the same day If the va
385. works order lines in the next block Road Type Optional List The road type entered here will restrict the road groups displayed in the adjacent field Road Id Optional Gaz Enter the required road group that is to be used to restrict the works order lines retrieved Status Optional List This field will be displayed when the Allocate Gang checkbox is selected Enter a status Code The status code is unrestricted allowing this form to also be used for general work order queries Gang Optional List This field will be displayed when the Allocate Gang checkbox is selected Enter the gang details that are to have lines re allocated to another gang Gangs are set up in Domains HIG9120 in the GANG domain Defect Priority Optional List Version 4 7 201 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Ss Sastalaleg Vutreptiicture WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Enter the defect priority code Treatment Optional List Enter the treatment code Gang Type Optional List Enter the Gang work type Gang Work Types are set up in Domains HIG9120 in the GANG_WORK_TYPE domain SISS Code Optional List Enter a Standard Item Sub Section code Date Raised Target Complete
386. y MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE A NEES WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT e Additional Details Planning Suppor Planning Support Quality Finance Continue Planned Actual Stat Earliest Start Completion Latest Completion Duration Risk Assesment Report N Utility Plans IN Method Statement INC Location Plan B Works Programme N Additional Safety N Supporting Documentation Work Restrictions Figure 111 Additional Details Planning Support 3 5 16 Additional Details Planning Support This window is displayed when the Additional Details button is selected in the Works Orders Defects window All the fields in this window are optional and are intended for information only Any documents that are to be held against a work order will be held using Document Manager Version 4 7 118 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc iod 4 Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE aA edendi WORK ORDER MANAGEMENT Additional Details Quality Finance AAAA AAAA PAE II I E gia atat aut atat al ada ad al M dad aM Qs Y Ib Planning Support Quality Finance Continue Defect Correction Period B Revised Completion Extention of Time B Defect Correction Quality Acceptable Not Lowest Cost contains specialist
387. y Sustaining Infrastructure WORKS ORDERING REPORTS CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc LIVE2108 Lrvr2108 NORTH FENNINE LINK GROUP Due NDEC 19 MA19936 Admir Une Pedoman Benet Pore 2 Pen Conc City Works Foo Deos Dus Dats se ats Works Onder Dx oxid WorkeOcderNo Shect No e Code inpats ito Due Contient Bone Done 30000 i MISS HEAPR IU96 ELAPR 1005 DAAPRI996 LAP Read Road la 4S10A08 168 As THROCKLEY BYPASS MAIN CWY WESTROLND a 3600001 t MESS PLAPR ESR PAPRI P AP IO APES Read Grows Rood M 4S10A00 L8 A68 THROCKLEY BYPASS MAIN CWY WESTBOUND 300001 i MISS MEAPROICM EEAPIE 2006 DAPEIO DEAD 8008 Road Grown Reed ha AT 0A49 168 A THROCKLEY BYPASS MAIN CWY WESTBOUND ot 30000 1 MISS B APK HAS IECAPR IU PR APES 2EAPR IO06 Road Uron Read id 431068 L168 AM THROCKLEY BYPASS MAIN CWY WESTBOUND EE 300001 1 MISS IEAPR 1996 IE APR I008 P9 APRIOM U APRONS Road Grows Road id 4310089 188 At THROCKLEY BYPASS MAIN CWY WESTBOUND w 30000 i MIRS ILAPR 10 IE APE 1006 8 FOAPR 1005 1 APR 1006 Road Group Road ld 441009 1 55 AM THROCKLEY BYPASS MAIN CWY WESTBOUND v 160001 1 MISS IEAPRA9M IEAPRIOS IR APRIOM 2R APR 1996 Road Crown Road jd 4S10A6 1 55 MA
388. y This will automatically populate the Target Date field below Road Type Required List Select the road type for the works order If budgets are to be used the road type must match the road types set in the Product Options HIG9130 for DoT roads BUDGRPTYPD for Local roads BUDGRPTYPL Road Id Required List When List is selected only groups of the type entered in the previous field will be displayed make your selection from this list without drilling down through the gazetteer Scheme Type Required Default List Select the scheme type under which this work will be carried out Some restrictions will apply based on the values set using Item Code Breakdowns they are as follows The options available on the list will be restricted to whether the road selected is DoT or Locally owned The scheme type selected will restrict the work categories available when raising the order The scheme type cannot be changed if works order lines are present on the works order The product option DEFSCHTYPU must be set to Y if the user is allowed to update the default scheme type The scheme type will affect the flexible attributed returned when the Flexible Attributes button is selected The flexible attributes for each scheme type are defined by the System Administrator using Application Attributes MAI3819 Register Optional Checkbox If all the contents of this works order are to be notified to street wor
389. y Detailed D Weather Condition FINE Road Surface Condition DRY Road Section 000045 0 00020 Description A5 EDGWARE ROAD BENFOLD PL TO ST JOHN S WOOD RD W2 Start Chainage m End Chainage Z Number of Defects b Create WO Summary d Activities A Description Create Work Order Mc MinorCariageway Repairs 7 v ees v Defects Set Batch Available Figure 7 Create Work Order While reviewing inspection and defect details within this form a user may create a work order by selecting the Create WO button 2 2 4 Create Work Order Selecting the Create WO button will call form Raise Work Order MAI3801 This will create a work order with one or more defects for the selected inspection Version 4 7 10 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR Bentley MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 6 Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS Raise Works Order GIS DORSET nmd4beta2 GBEXOR730 MAI v4 0 Scheme Type Contract 7 933 Routine Maintenance PS2 06 07 ACTUAL Work Order Cancel Figure 8 Raise Work Order The Raise Works Order form allows the required Scheme Type and Works Order Contract to be selected Scheme Type Required Default List This is the Scheme Type fo
390. you are manually superseding a defect you will probably know the defect id of the defect to superseded the defect selected above Select Enter Query enter the defect id in the Defect Serial Number field followed by Execute Query to retrieve the defect The following information will be displayed Defect Serial Number Length of the Defect Cross Sectional Position of the Defect Inspection Date Defect Priority Start Chainage Activity Area Version 4 7 63 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE Ss Bentley Sustaining Infrastructure MANAGING INSPECTIONS e Repair Date Due e Defect Type e Description e Defect Status Viewing both defects together will allow you to make a good comparison of the two defects If you are satisfied with your selection select the Supersede Defect button If two defects have been mistakenly matched use Unmatch Duplicate Defect MAI2760 to unmatch them Version 4 7 CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT 64 The contents of this document including system ideas and concepts are confidential and proprietary in nature and are not to be distributed in any form without the prior written consent of Bentley Inc EXOR MAINTENANCE MANAGER USER GUIDE 234

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

MSDSへ - Meiji Seikaファルマ  Dossier d`inscription  Cristalchem  Lexmark X544n  Samsung RB-F310G BMF com tecnologia Inverter Digital, 321 L manual de utilizador  Manuel de planification Siedle Access Édition 2013  screamin` eagle pro tc 110 (1800 cc) conversion kit - Harley  Manual de instruções do posicionadores 3660 e 3661  Istruzioni d`uso VEGABAR 17  Philips SA238  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file